LOGIQ-P5-Service-Manual-SM-5394141-100-5
Preview — first 20 pages
You've viewed the first 20 of 532 pages
Get the complete Service manual — free download sent straight to your email.
// No spam — file + occasional library updates only
[Page 1] GE Healthcare Technical Publication Direction 5394141 Revision 5 GE Healthcare LOGIQ™P5 Service Manual Operating Documentation Copyright© 2011, 2014 by General Electric Co.
[Page 2]
[Page 3] Important Precautions • THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY. • IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TRANSLATION SERVICES. WARNING • DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE (EN) MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD. • FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS. • CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS. • SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE TRADUIRE. AVERTISSEMENT • NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES é QUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE (FR) MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS é Té CONSULTé ET COMPRIS. • LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAîNER CHEZ LE TECHNICIEN, L’OPé RATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES à DES DANGERS é LECTRIQUES, Mé CANIQUES OU AUTRES. • DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE. • FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENö TIGT, IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN Fü R EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG ZU SORGEN. • VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERä T ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES WARNUNG KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN (DE) WURDE. • WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLä GE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE GEFAHREN KOMMEN. - i-3
[Page 4] • ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO Só LO EXISTE EN INGLé S. • SI ALGú N PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEHC SOLICITA UN IDIOMA QUE NO SEA EL INGLé S, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIó N. AVISO • NO SE DEBERá DAR SERVICIO Té CNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER (ES) CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO. • LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELé CTRICAS, MECá NICAS O DE OTRA NATURALEZA. • ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTê NCIA Té CNICA Só SE ENCONTRA DISPONíVEL EM INGLê S. • SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIç O DE ASSISTê NCIA Té CNICA, QUE Nã O A GEHC, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, é DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIç OS DE TRADUç ã O. ATENÇÃO (PT) • Nã O TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTê NCIA Té CNICA. • O Nã O CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANç A DO Té CNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELé TRICOS, MECâ NICOS OU OUTROS. • IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE è DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN INGLESE. • SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEHC RICHIEDE IL MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE è TENUTO A PROVVEDERE DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE. AVVERTENZA • SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO (IT) AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO. • NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI. • KÄESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES. • KUI KLIENDITEENINDUSE OSUTAJA Nõ UAB JUHENDIT INGLISE KEELEST ERINEVAS KEELES, VASTUTAB KLIENT Tõ LKETEENUSE OSUTAMISE EEST. HOIATUS • ä RGE ü RITAGE SEADMEID TEENINDADA ENNE EELNEVALT Kä ESOLEVA (ET) TEENINDUSJUHENDIGA TUTVUMIST JA SELLEST ARU SAAMIST. • Kä ESOLEVA HOIATUSE EIRAMINE Võ IB Põ HJUSTADA TEENUSEOSUTAJA, OPERAATORI Võ I PATSIENDI VIGASTAMIST ELEKTRILö ö GI, MEHAANILISE Võ I MUU OHU TAGAJä RJEL. i-4 -
[Page 5] • TÄMÄ HUOLTO-OHJE ON SAATAVILLA VAIN ENGLANNIKSI. • JOS ASIAKKAAN PALVELUNTARJOAJA VAATII MUUTA KUIN ENGLANNINKIELISTä MATERIAALIA, TARVITTAVAN Kä ä NNö KSEN HANKKIMINEN ON ASIAKKAAN VASTUULLA. VAROITUS • ä Lä YRITä KORJATA LAITTEISTOA ENNEN KUIN OLET VARMASTI LUKENUT (FI) JA YMMä RTä NYT Tä Mä N HUOLTO-OHJEEN. • MIKä LI Tä Tä VAROITUSTA EI NOUDATETA, SEURAUKSENA VOI OLLA PALVELUNTARJOAJAN, LAITTEISTON Kä YTTä Jä N TAI POTILAAN VAHINGOITTUMINEN Sä HKö ISKUN, MEKAANISEN VIAN TAI MUUN VAARATILANTEEN VUOKSI. • ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ∆ΙΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ∆ΙΑΤΙΘΕΤΑΙ ΣΤΑ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΑ ΜΟΝΟ . • ΕΑΝ ΤΟ ΑΤΟΜΟ ΠΑΡΟΧΗΣ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΕΝΟΣ ΠΕΛΑΤΗ ΑΠΑΙΤΕΙ ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ∆ΙΟ ΣΕ ΓΛΩΣΣΑ ΕΚΤΟΣ ΤΩΝ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΩΝ , ΑΠΟΤΕΛΕΙ ΕΥΘΥΝΗ ΤΟΥ ΠΕΛΑΤΗ ΝΑ ΠΑΡΕΧΕΙ ΥΠΗΡΕΣΙΕΣ ΜΕΤΑΦΡΑΣΗΣ . • ΜΗΝ ΕΠΙΧΕΙΡΗΣΕΤΕ ΤΗΝ ΕΚΤΕΛΕΣΗ ΕΡΓΑΣΙΩΝ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΣΤΟΝ ΕΞΟΠΛΙΣΜΟ ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ (EL) ΕΚΤΟΣ ΕΑΝ ΕΧΕΤΕ ΣΥΜΒΟΥΛΕΥΤΕΙ ΚΑΙ ΕΧΕΤΕ ΚΑΤΑΝΟΗΣΕΙ ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ∆ΙΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ . • ΕΑΝ ∆Ε ΛΑΒΕΤΕ ΥΠΟΨΗ ΤΗΝ ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ ΑΥΤΗ , ΕΝ∆ΕΧΕΤΑΙ ΝΑ ΠΡΟΚΛΗΘΕΙ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟΣ ΣΤΟ ΑΤΟΜΟ ΠΑΡΟΧΗΣ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ , ΣΤΟ ΧΕΙΡΙΣΤΗ Ή ΣΤΟΝ ΑΣΘΕΝΗ ΑΠΟ ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΠΛΗΞΙΑ , ΜΗΧΑΝΙΚΟΥΣ Ή ΑΛΛΟΥΣ ΚΙΝ∆ΥΝΟΥΣ . • EZEN KARBANTARTÁSI KÉZIKÖNYV KIZÁRÓLAG ANGOL NYELVEN ÉRHET Ő EL. • HA A VEV Ő SZOLGÁLTATÓJA ANGOLTÓL ELTÉR Ő NYELVRE TART IGÉNYT, AKKOR A VEV Ő FELEL Ő SSÉGE A FORDÍTÁS ELKÉSZÍTTETÉSE. FIGYELMEZTETÉS • NE PRÓBÁLJA ELKEZDENI HASZNÁLNI A BERENDEZÉST, AMÍG A (HU) KARBANTARTÁSI KÉZIKÖNYVBEN LEÍRTAKAT NEM ÉRTELMEZTÉK. • EZEN FIGYELMEZTETÉS FIGYELMEN KÍVÜL HAGYÁSA A SZOLGÁLTATÓ, M Ű KÖDTET Ő VAGY A BETEG ÁRAMÜTÉS, MECHANIKAI VAGY EGYÉB VESZÉLYHELYZET MIATTI SÉRÜLÉSÉT EREDMÉNYEZHETI. • ÞESSI ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK ER EINGÖNGU FÁANLEG Á ENSKU. • EF ÞJÓNUSTUAÐILI VIÐSKIPTAMANNS ÞARFNAST ANNARS TUNGUMÁLS EN ENSKU, ER ÞAÐ Á ÁBYRGÐ VIÐSKIPTAMANNS AÐ ÚTVEGA ÞÝÐINGU. VIÐVÖRUN • REYNIÐ EKKI AÐ ÞJÓNUSTA TÆKIÐ NEMA EFTIR AÐ HAFA SKOÐAÐ OG (IS) SKILIÐ ÞESSA ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK. • EF EKKI ER FARIÐ AÐ ÞESSARI VIÐVÖRUN GETUR ÞAÐ VALDIÐ MEIÐSLUM ÞJÓNUSTUVEITANDA, STJÓRNANDA EÐA SJÚKLINGS VEGNA RAFLOSTS, VÉLRÆNNAR EÐA ANNARRAR HÆTTU. - i-5
[Page 6] • TENTO SERVISNÍ NÁVOD EXISTUJE POUZE V ANGLICKé M JAZYCE. • V P ř íPAD ě , ŽE POSKYTOVATEL SLUŽEB ZÁKAZNÍK Ů M POT ř EBUJE Ná VOD V JINé M JAZYCE, JE ZAJIšT ě Ní P ř EKLADU DO ODPOVíDAJíCíHO JAZYKA ú KOLEM Zá KAZNíKA. • NEPROVÁD Ě JTE ú DRŽBU TOHOTO ZA ř íZENí, ANIŽ BYSTE SI P ř E č ETLI VÝSTRAHA TENTO SERVISNÍ NÁVOD A POCHOPILI JEHO OBSAH. (CS) • V P ř íPAD ě NEDODRŽOVá Ní Té TO VýSTRAHY M ů ŽE DOJíT ÚRAZU ELEKTRICKÁM PROUDEM PRACOVNíKA POSKYTOVATELE SLUŽEB, OBSLUŽNé HO PERSONá LU NEBO PACIENT ů VLIVEM ELEKTRICKé HOP PROUDU, RESPEKTIVE VLIVEM K RIZIKU MECHANICKÉHO POŠKOZENÍ NEBO JINÉMU RIZIKU. • DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN PÅ ENGELSK. • HVIS EN KUNDES TEKNIKER HAR BRUG FOR ET ANDET SPROG END ENGELSK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR AT SØRGE FOR OVERSÆTTELSE. ADVARSEL • FORSØG IKKE AT SERVICERE UDSTYRET MEDMINDRE (DA) DENNE SERVICEMANUAL ER BLEVET LÆST OG FORSTÅET. • MANGLENDE OVERHOLDELSE AF DENNE ADVARSEL KAN MEDFØRE SKADE PÅ GRUND AF ELEKTRISK, MEKANISK ELLER ANDEN FARE FOR TEKNIKEREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PATIENTEN. • DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS VERKRIJGBAAR. • ALS HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL EEN ANDERE TAAL VEREIST, DAN IS DE KLANT VERANTWOORDELIJK VOOR DE VERTALING ERVAN. • PROBEER DE APPARATUUR NIET TE ONDERHOUDEN VOORDAT DEZE WAARSCHUWING (NL) ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING WERD GERAADPLEEGD EN BEGREPEN IS. • INDIEN DEZE WAARSCHUWING NIET WORDT OPGEVOLGD, ZOU HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL, DE OPERATOR OF EEN PATIËNT GEWOND KUNNEN RAKEN ALS GEVOLG VAN EEN ELEKTRISCHE SCHOK, MECHANISCHE OF ANDERE GEVAREN. • š Ī APKALPES ROKASGR Ā MATA IR PIEEJAMA TIKAI ANG Ļ U VALOD Ā . • JA KLIENTA APKALPES SNIEDZ Ē JAM NEPIECIEŠAMA INFORM Ā CIJA CIT Ā VALOD Ā , NEVIS ANG Ļ U, KLIENTA PIEN Ā KUMS IR NODROŠIN Ā T TULKOŠANU. BR Ī DIN Ā JUMS • NEVEICIET APR Ī KOJUMA APKALPI BEZ APKALPES ROKASGR Ā MATAS (LV) IZLAS Ī ŠANAS UN SAPRAŠANAS. • Š Ī BR Ī DIN Ā JUMA NEIEV Ē ROŠANA VAR RAD Ī T ELEKTRISK Ā S STR Ā VAS TRIECIENA, MEH Ā NISKU VAI CITU RISKU IZRAIS Ī TU TRAUMU APKALPES SNIEDZ Ē JAM, OPERATORAM VAI PACIENTAM. i-6 -
[Page 7] • ŠIS EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVAS YRA IŠLEISTAS TIK ANGL Ų KALBA. • JEI KLIENTO PASLAUG Ų TEIK Ė JUI REIKIA VADOVO KITA KALBA – NE ANGL Ų , VERTIMU PASIR Ū PINTI TURI KLIENTAS. Į SP Ė JIMAS • NEM Ė GINKITE ATLIKTI Į RANGOS TECHNIN Ė S PRIEŽI Ū ROS DARB Ų , NEBENT (LT) VADOVAUTUM Ė T Ė S ŠIUO EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVU IR J Į SUPRASTUM Ė TE • NEPAISANT ŠIO PERSP Ė JIMO, PASLAUG Ų TEIK Ė JAS, OPERATORIUS AR PACIENTAS GALI B Ū TI SUŽEISTAS D Ė L ELEKTROS SM Ū GIO, MECHANINI Ų AR KIT Ų PAVOJ Ų . • DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN FINNES BARE PÅ ENGELSK. • HVIS KUNDENS SERVICELEVERANDØR TRENGER ET ANNET SPRÅK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR Å SØRGE FOR OVERSETTELSE. ADVARSEL • IKKE FORSØK Å REPARERE UTSTYRET UTEN AT DENNE (NO) SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN ER LEST OG FORSTÅTT. • MANGLENDE HENSYN TIL DENNE ADVARSELEN KAN FØRE TIL AT SERVICELEVERANDØREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PASIENTEN SKADES PÅ GRUNN AV ELEKTRISK STØT, MEKANISKE ELLER ANDRE FARER. • NINIEJSZY PODR Ę CZNIK SERWISOWY DOST Ę PNY JEST JEDYNIE W J Ę ZYKU ANGIELSKIM. • JE ś LI FIRMA ś WIADCZ Ą CA KLIENTOWI US ł UGI SERWISOWE WYMAGA UDOST ę PNIENIA PODR ę CZNIKA W J ę ZYKU INNYM NI Ż ANGIELSKI, OBOWI Ą ZEK ZAPEWNIENIA STOSOWNEGO T ł UMACZENIA SPOCZYWA NA KLIENCIE. OSTRZE Ż ENIE • NIE PRó BOWA ć SERWISOWA ć NINIEJSZEGO SPRZ ę TU BEZ UPRZEDNIEGO (PL) ZAPOZNANIA SI ę Z PODR ę CZNIKIEM SERWISOWYM. • NIEZASTOSOWANIE SI ę DO TEGO OSTRZE Ż ENIA MO ż E GROZI ć OBRA Ż ENIAMI CIA ł A SERWISANTA, OPERATORA LUB PACJENTA W WYNIKU PORA Ż ENIA PR Ą DEM, URAZU MECHANICZNEGO LUB INNEGO RODZAJU ZAGRO Ż E ń . • ACEST MANUAL DE SERVICE ESTE DISPONIBIL NUMAI ÎN LIMBA ENGLEZ Ă . • DAC Ă UN FURNIZOR DE SERVICII PENTRU CLIEN Ţ I NECESIT Ă O ALT Ă LIMB Ă DECÂT CEA ENGLEZ Ă , ESTE DE DATORIA CLIENTULUI S Ă FURNIZEZE O TRADUCERE. ATEN Ţ IE • NU ÎNCERCA Ţ I S Ă REPARA Ţ I ECHIPAMENTUL DECÂT ULTERIOR (RO) CONSULT Ă RII Ş I ÎN Ţ ELEGERII ACESTUI MANUAL DE SERVICE. • IGNORAREA ACESTUI AVERTISMENT AR PUTEA DUCE LA R Ă NIREA DEPANATORULUI, OPERATORULUI SAU PACIENTULUI ÎN URMA PERICOLELOR DE ELECTROCUTARE, MECANICE SAU DE ALT Ă NATUR Ă . - i-7
[Page 8] • Да н н о е рук о в о дс т в о п о о б с луж и в а н и ю ПРЕДОСТАВЛЯЕТСЯ т о ль к о н а а н г ли й с к о м Яз ы к е . • Ес ли с е рв и с н о МУ ПЕРСОНАЛУ к ли е н т а н е о б х о димо рук о в о дс т в о н е н а а н г ли йс к о м ЯЗЫКЕ , к ли е н т у с ле дуе т с а мо с т о Ят е ль н о ОБЕСПЕЧИТЬ п е ре в о д . ОСТОРОЖНО ! • ПЕРЕД ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕМ ОБОРУДОВАНИЯ ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬНО ОБРАТИТЕСЬ (RU) К ДАННОМУ РУКОВОДСТВУ И ПОЙМИТЕ ИЗЛОЖЕННЫЕ В НЕМ СВЕДЕНИЯ . • НЕСОБЛЮДЕНИЕ УКАЗАННЫХ ТРЕБОВАНИЙ МОЖЕТ ПРИВЕСТИ К ТОМУ , ЧТО СПЕЦИАЛИСТ ПО ТЕХОБСЛУЖИВАНИЮ , ОПЕРАТОР ИЛИ ПАЦИЕНТ ПОЛУЧАТ УДАР ЗЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИМ ТОКОМ , МЕХАНИЧЕСКУЮ ТРАВМУ ИЛИ ДРУГОЕ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ . • TÁTO SERVISNÁ PRÍRU Č KA JE K DISPOZíCII LEN V ANGLI Č TINE. • AK ZÁKAZNÍKOV POSKYTOVATE Ľ SLUŽIEB VYŽADUJE INÝ JAZYK AKO ANGLI Č TINU, POSKYTNUTIE PREKLADATE Ľ SKÝCH SLUŽIEB JE ZODPOVEDNOS Ť OU ZÁKAZNÍKA. UPOZORNENIE • NEPOKÚŠAJTE SA VYKONÁVA Ť SERVIS ZARIADENIA SKÔR, AKO SI (SK) NEPRE Č ÍTATE SERVISNÚ PRÍRU Č KU A NEPOROZUMIETE JEJ. • ZANEDBANIE TOHTO UPOZORNENIA Mô ŽE VYÚSTI Ť DO ZRANENIA POSKYTOVATE Ľ A SLUŽIEB, OBSLUHUJú CEJ OSOBY ALEBO PACIENTA ELEKTRICKýM PRú DOM, PRÍPADNE DO MECHANICKé HO ALEBO INé HO NEBEZPE č ENSTVA. • DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGÄNGLIG PÅ ENGELSKA. • OM EN KUNDS SERVICETEKNIKER HAR BEHOV AV ETT ANNAT SPRÅK ÄN ENGELSKA ANSVARAR KUNDEN FÖR ATT TILLHANDAHÅLLA ÖVERSÄTTNINGSTJÄNSTER. VARNING • FÖRSÖK INTE UTFÖRA SERVICE PÅ UTRUSTNINGEN OM DU INTE HAR LÄST (SV) OCH FÖRSTÅR DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN. • OM DU INTE TAR HÄNSYN TILL DEN HÄR VARNINGEN KAN DET RESULTERA I SKADOR PÅ SERVICETEKNIKERN, OPERATÖREN ELLER PATIENTEN TILL FÖLJD AV ELEKTRISKA STÖTAR, MEKANISKA FAROR ELLER ANDRA FAROR. • BU SERV İ S KILAVUZU YALNIZCA İ NG İ L İ ZCE OLARAK SA Ğ LANMI Ş TIR. • E Ğ ER MÜ Ş TER İ TEKN İ SYEN İ KILAVUZUN İ NG İ L İ ZCE DI Ş INDAK İ B İ R D İ LDE OLMASINI İ STERSE, KILAVUZU TERCÜME ETT İ RMEK MÜ Ş TER İ N İ N SORUMLULU Ğ UNDADIR. D İ KKAT • SERV İ S KILAVUZUNU OKUYUP ANLAMADAN EK İ PMANLARA MÜDAHALE (TR) ETMEY İ N İ Z. • BU UYARININ GÖZ ARDI ED İ LMES İ , ELEKTR İ K ÇARPMASI YA DA MEKAN İ K VEYA D İĞ ER TÜRDEN KAZALAR SONUCUNDA TEKN İ SYEN İ N, OPERATÖRÜN YA DA HASTANIN YARALANMASINA YOL AÇAB İ L İ R. i-8 -
[Page 9] (JA) (ZH-CN) (KO) - i-9
[Page 10] DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a GE representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period. CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Healthcare personnel. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment. OMISSIONS & ERRORS If there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, please contact the GE Healthcare Global Documentation Group with specific information listing the system type, manual title, part number, revision number, page number and suggestion details. Mail the information to: Service Documentation, 9900 Innovation Drive (RP-2123), Wauwatosa, WI 53226, USA. GE Healthcare employees should use the iTrak System to report all documentation errors or omissions. SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING. WARNING WARNING Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury. For a complete review of all safety requirements, see the Chapter 1, Safety Considerations section in the Service Manual. i-10 -
[Page 11] LEGAL NOTES The contents of this publication may not be copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written permission of GE Healthcare. GE Healthcare may revise this publication from time to time without written notice. TRADEMARKS All products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders. COPYRIGHTS All Material Copyright© 2011, 2014 by General Electric Company Inc. All Rights Reserved. - i-11
[Page 12] Revision History Revision Date Reason for change 1 May 3, 2010 Initial Release 2 Nov 2, 2010 PHI Update 3 Mar 2, 2011 Software version update 4 May 16, 2011 Add Mitsubishi Printer (P95 series) 5 Aug 26, 2014 Correct revision on the header List of Effected Pages(LOEP) Pages Revision Pages Revision Pages Revision Title Page 5 4-1 to 4-54 5 10-1 to 10-30 5 Warnings i-3 to i-12 5 5-1 to 5-60 5 Back Cover N/A TOC i-13 to i-28 5 6-1 to 6-8 5 1-1 to 1-19 5 7-1 to 7-37 5 2-1 to 2-12 5 8-1 to 8-229 3 3-1 to 3-26 5 9-1 to 9-23 5 i-12 -
[Page 13] Table of Contents CHAPTER 1 Introduction Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 Purpose of Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 Purpose of Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 LOGIQ™ P5 Models Covered by this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Purpose of Operator Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Important Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3 Conventions Used in Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3 Standard Hazard Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 Product Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 WEEE Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Human Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Label Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14 Dangerous Procedure Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16 Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16 EMC, EMI, and ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17 CE Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 System Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Table of Contents i-13
[Page 14] CHAPTER 2 Pre-Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 Purpose of chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 General Console Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2 Console Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2 Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3 EMI Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Scan Probe Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 Facility Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Purchaser Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Required Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Desirable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Recommended and Alternate Ultrasound Room Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9 Networking Pre-installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 i-14 -
[Page 15] CHAPTER 3 Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Purpose of chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Installation Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Average Installation Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Installation Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Safety Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Moving into Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Adjusting System Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Product Locator Installation Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Preparing for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Verify Customer Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 EMI Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Completing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Power On/Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Power Off/ Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Transducer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 On-Board Optional Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 External I/O Connector Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Video Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Setting VCR (Mitsubishi MD3000) USB Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Available Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Software/Option Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Connectivity Installation Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Insite IP Address Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Loading Base System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Loading Base system Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 - i-15
[Page 16] Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Paperwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26 Product Locator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26 User Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26 i-16 -
[Page 17] CHAPTER 4 Functional Checks Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Purpose of Chapter 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 General Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Power On/Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 System B/M-Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 System CFM and PWD Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Basic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Probe/Connectors Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Using Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Image Management (QG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Using the DVD-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images . . . . . 4-19 ECG Check Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Software Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Peripheral Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Monitor Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 15" LCDMON II Assy & LCD Panel with filter Function Validation Procedure 4-27 15" OSD Key Assy Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Keyboard Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Main Keyboard Assy Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Sub Keyboard Assy Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Trackball Assy validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 A/N Key assy validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Freeze key validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 TGC key assay / TGC Knob Set validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Sub Keyboard Encoder Knob Set validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Mechanical Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Cover Parts Function Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 LCD plastic filter Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 - i-17
[Page 18] Air filter set Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35 TGC key assy/TGC Knob Set, Sub keyboard encoder Knob Set, Keycap set, Main Keyboard Encoder Knob set Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36 Cup holder Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37 Front caster/Rear caster Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38 Probe holder Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39 Flexible LCD Arm Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40 Board Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41 CL1TRX Assy / BL1TRX Assy Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . .4-41 ACWD Assy Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42 Probe Assessment Diagnostic Test Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45 SYSCONML Assy Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47 APS/APS Pro Assy PCB Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48 P3RLY,P2RLY and P2RLY with Dummy Assy function check procedure . .4-49 SOM Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50 ASIG Assy Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50 BackPlane Assy Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51 Nest fan Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52 Transbox Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52 ACPC Assy set Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52 Transbox Assy Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53 Fuse set Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53 ARP Assy Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53 ASIG ASSY Function Validation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53 Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54 i-18 -
[Page 19] CHAPTER 5 Components and Functions (Theory) Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Purpose of Chapter 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 LOGIQ™ P5 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 LOGIQ™ A5/A5Pro Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Main Board Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 P3RLY and P2RLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 CL1TRX and BL1TRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 SOM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Top Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 LOGIQ™ P5 Monitor II and LOGIQ™ A5/A5Pro Monitor II . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 ARP (Rear Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Input/Output Signals for peripheral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 Power Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 TRANSBOX(AC Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 APS/APS Pro (LV Power & HV Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 AC Power Outlet for Peripheral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 Internal Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 Peripherals and Cable connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Service Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 Global Service User Interface (GSUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Service Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 - i-19
[Page 20] Error Logs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45 Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50 PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50 Remote Software/Option Installation and Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51 RFS (Service For Request) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52 System Checkout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52 Sending RFS Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54 Machine RFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-56 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-56 Enabling MRFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-56 Fast Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-59 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-59 Enabling Fast Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-59 i-20 -
[Page 21] CHAPTER 6 Service Adjustments Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Purpose of this chapter 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Regulatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Monitor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Rotate and tilt the monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Brightness and Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 LCD Plastic filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Flexible LCD arm - locking mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Trackball Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 - i-21
[Page 22] CHAPTER 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1 Purpose of Chapter 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1 Gathering Trouble Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 Collect Vital System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 Collect a Trouble Image with Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3 Screen Captures 4 Check and Record the P2 Key Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 Setting the P2 Key to Screen Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5 Capturing a Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 Reset the P2 Key to Customer’s Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8 Common Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9 PC Diagnostics (Non-Interactive Tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10 PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14 FRU Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16 LED Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20 CL1TRX/BL1TRX Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20 P3RLY/P2RLY Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20 SYSCONPM/SYSCONCM Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20 APS/APS Pro Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21 Trouble Shooting Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22 System Does Not Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22 System Does Not Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23 Noise in Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-26 Unable to Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27 Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28 Monitor Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29 Unable to Record to VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-31 Printer Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32 DVD-RW Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34 Network Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-35 i-22 -
[Page 23] CHAPTER 8 Replacement Procedures Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Purpose of Chapter 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 LCD Plastic filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Monitor cover set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 OSD button and lamp set, LCD Plastic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 LCD Std Arm with Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Monitor Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Flexible LCD Arm Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Main Keyboard Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 Sub Keyboard Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40 Trackball Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42 English, Greek, Russian, Swedish, Norwegian A/N Key assy . . . . . . . . . . 8-43 Freeze key assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45 TGC key assy / TGC Knob Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47 Sub Keyboard Encoder Knob Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49 Keycap set, Main Keyboard Encoder Knob set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50 Side Left Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51 Side Right Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52 Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53 Rear Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55 Middle Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57 Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 Top Bottom Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60 Pole Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61 Neck Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62 Neck Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64 Dummy Cover L / R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66 EMI Cover L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68 EMI Cover R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69 APS/APS Pro Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70 CL1TRX Assy / BL1TRX Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73 P3RLY / P2RLY Assy & P2RLY with Dummy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75 Backplane Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77 ACWD Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79 SYSCON PM Assy/SYSCON CM Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81 PM SOM Assy with 1G/ CM SOM Assy with 512M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-84 ASIG Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-86 - i-23
[Page 24] Battery on SYSCONPM/CM Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-87 Front Caster / Rear Caster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-89 Rear Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-91 Rear Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-92 Probe Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-94 Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-95 ECG Cable Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-96 Air Filter Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-97 DVD R/W Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-98 Nest Fan Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-100 ARP Assy 110V/220V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-102 SATA HDD Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-104 ACPC Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-107 Transbox Assy 110V/220V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-109 Fuse Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-112 Read and Write Serial Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-113 Software Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-117 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-117 Parts Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-117 TimeRequired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-117 Software Loading Steering Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-118 Before Starting Software Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-119 Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-129 Installing Base Image Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-129 Verifying Base Image Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-134 Installing Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-141 Standard Confirmation & Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-144 Full Backup / Restore Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-159 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-159 Parts Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-159 Full Backup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-159 Restore procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-162 Software Reloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-163 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-163 Software Reloading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-163 Mechanical Option Installation instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-172 Endo Probe Holder Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-174 Microphone Option fixture Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-175 i-24 -
[Page 25] Drawer Option installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-176 Cable Arm Hook installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-177 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-178 BW printer Fixture Middle installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-181 Color Printer Fixture Middle installation - UP23MD Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-183 Color Printer Fixture Middle installation - UP-D25MD Printer . . . . . . . . . . . 8-185 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation - UP23MD Printer . . . . . . . . . . . 8-187 Color Printer Fixture Top Installation - UP-D25MD Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-189 Printer VCR DVD fixture Top installation - CP900 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-192 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top Installation (MD-3000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-195 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top Installation (MD-800) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-200 Rear Handle installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-203 Additional Task Lamp installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-205 Protect Cover Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-207 Swivel Lock Caster Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-208 LOGIQ A5 Rear Swivel Caster Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-209 BT11 Drawer Option Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-210 MTZ PROBE HOLDER Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-213 DVR Fixture Top Installation - SONY DVO-1000MD DVD Recorder . . . . . 8-214 PHI(Protecting Health Information) DATA COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-219 Prevent exporting patient data to removable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-219 ENCRYPTION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-220 - i-25
[Page 26] CHAPTER 9 Renewal Parts Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1 List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3 KEYBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5 COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9 BODY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11 POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21 Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23 i-26 -
[Page 27] CHAPTER 10 Care & Maintenance Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Purpose of Chapter 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Why do Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Keeping Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Maintenance Task Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Standard GE Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Peripheral/Option Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Mains Cable Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Optional Diagnostic Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Probe Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Electrical Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Safety Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 GEMS Leakage Current Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Grounding Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Chassis Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Probe Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 When There's Too Much Leakage Current... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 - i-27
[Page 28] i-28 -
[Page 29] Chapter 1 Introduction Section 1-1 Overview 1-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 1 This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing the LOGIQ™ P5 scanner. The service provider must read and understand all the information presented in this manual before installing or servicing a unit. Table 1-1 Contents in Chapter 1 Section Description Page Number 1-1 Overview 1-1 1-2 Important Conventions 1-3 1-3 Safety Considerations 1-12 1-4 EMC, EMI, and ESD 1-17 1-5 Customer Assistance 1-18 1-1-2 Purpose of Service Manual This Service Manual provides installation and service information for the LOGIQ™ P5 Ultrasound Scanning System and contains the following chapters: 1.) Chapter 1 - Introduction: Contains a content summary and warnings. 2.) Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation: Contains pre-installation requirements for the LOGIQ™ P5. 3.) Chapter 3 - Installation : Contains installation procedures. 4.) Chapter 4 - Functional Checks: Contains functional checks that are recommended as part of the installation, or as required during servicing and periodic maintenance. 5.) Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory) : Contains block diagrams and functional explanations of the electronics. 6.) Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments : Contains instructions on how to make available adjustments to the LOGIQ™ P5. 7.) Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting : Provides procedures for running diagnostic or related routines for the LOGIQ™ P5. 8.) Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures: Provides disassembly procedures and reassembly procedures for all changeable Field Replaceable Units (FRU). 9.) Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts: Contains a complete list of field replaceable parts for the LOGIQ™ P5. 10.) Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance : Provides periodic maintenance procedures for the LOGIQ™ P5. Section 1-1 - Overview 1-1
[Page 30] 1-1-3 Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual • Service Personnel (installation, maintenance, etc.) • Hospital’s Service Personnel • Contractors (Some parts of Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation) 1-1-4 LOGIQ™ P5 Models Covered by this Manual Table 1-2 LOGIQ™ P5 Model Designation Hcat# Description H44662LD LP5 BT11 FOR USA H44662LE LP5 PRO BT11 FOR ASIA110V H44662LF LP5 PRO BT11 FOR KOREA H44662LN LOGIQ P5 OB KOREA H44662LP LP5 PRO BT11 FOR EUROPE H44662LR LP5 ADVANCED BT11 JAPAN H44662LT LP5 ADVANCED BT11 LATIN220 H44662LY LP5 PREMIUM BT11 EUROPE H44662LZ LP5 PREMIUM BT11 FOR ASIA H44672LA LP5 PREMIUM BT11 ASEAN 220 H44672LB LP5 PREMIUM BT11 ANZ 220 H44672LD LP5 PREMIUM BT11 LATIN220 H44672LE LP5 PREMIUM BT11 LATIN110 H44672LF LP5 PREMIUM BT11 FOR USA H44672LL LOGIQ P5 OB for Japan H44672LH LOGIQ P5 OB for EMEA H44672LJ LOGIQ P5 Basic OB H44672LK LOGIQ P5 Premium OB 1-1-5 Purpose of Operator Manual(s) The Operator Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ™ P5 and also kept near the unit for quick reference. 1-2 Section 1-1 - Overview
[Page 31] Section 1-2 Important Conventions 1-2-1 Conventions Used in Book Icons Pictures, or icons, are used wherever they reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels and conventions used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter. Safety Precaution Messages Various levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service information. The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary message. Known or potential hazards are labeled in one of following ways: DANGER DANGER IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED. WARNING WARNING WARNING IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT CAN CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED. CAUTION Caution is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury and property damage if instructions are ignored. NOTICE Equipment Damage Possible Notice is used when a hazard is present that can cause property damage but has absolutely no personal injury risk. Example : Disk drive will crash. NOTE: Notes provide important information about an item or a procedure. Information contained in a NOTE can often save you time or effort. Section 1-2 - Important Conventions 1-3
[Page 32] 1-2-2 Standard Hazard Icons Important information will always be preceded by the exclamation point contained within a triangle, as seen throughout this chapter. In addition to text, several different graphical icons (symbols) may be used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could cause harm. Table 1-3 Standard Hazard Icons ELECTRICAL MECHANICAL RADIATION LASER HEAT PINCH LASER LIGHT Other hazard icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed. Table 1-4 Standard Icons Indicating a Special Procedure Be Used AVOID STATIC ELECTRICITY TAG AND LOCK OUT WEAR EYE PROTECTION TAG LOCKOUT EYE PROTECTION Signed Date 1-4 Section 1-2 - Important Conventions
[Page 33] 1-2-3 Product Icons The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information provided on the equipment. Table 1-5 Product Icons LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION Manufacturer's name and address Rear of console near power inlet Date of manufacture Identification and Rating Plate Under monitor Model and serial numbers On each probe Electrical ratings Laboratory logo or labels denoting Rear of console Device Listing/Certification Labels conformance with industry safety standards Under front of monitor such as UL or IEC. Type/Class Label Used to indicate the degree of safety or protection. Indicates the degree of protection provided by IP Code (IPX8) the enclosure per IEC 529. IPX8 indicates drip Footswitch proof. Equipment Type CF (heart in the box symbol) IEC 878-02-05 indicates equipment having a ECG connector high degree of protection suitable for direct Surgical probes cardiac contact. Defibrillator IEC60601-2-27 "CAUTION" The equilateral triangle is usually used in combination with other symbols to Various advise or warn the user. ATTENTION - Consult accompanying documents " is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other Various instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the label. "CAUTION - Dangerous voltage" (the lightning flash with arrowhead in equilateral triangle) is Various used to indicate electric shock hazards. "Mains OFF" Indicates the power off position of Rear of system adjacent to mains switch the mains power switch. Section 1-2 - Important Conventions 1-5
[Page 34] Table 1-5 Product Icons LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION "OFF/Standby" Indicates the power off/ standby position of the power switch. CAUTION Adjacent to On-Off/Standby Switch This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply "Mains ON" Indicates the power on position of the mains power switch. "ON" Indicates the power on position of the power switch. Front Panel Switch This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply "Protective Earth" Indicates the protective Internal earth (grounding) terminal. Product schematics Indicates an earth GROUND potential Peripherals 1-6 Section 1-2 - Important Conventions
[Page 35] 1-2-4 WEEE Label The following table describes the meaning of WEEE label and its translation provided on the equipment. This symbol indicates that the waste of electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. English Please contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment. Tento symbol znamená, že díly elektrických nebo elektronických za ř ízení Czech (CZE) nesmí být likvidovány do net ř íd ě ného odpadu, ale musí být likvidovány samostatn ě . Obra ť te se prosím na autorizovaného p ř edstavitele výrobce, který poskytne informace týkající se likvidace vašeho p ř ístroje. Dette symbol angiver, at elektrisk og elektronisk affald ikke må Danish (DAN) bortskaffes som usorteret brændbart affald, men skal indsamles særskilt. Kontakt venligst en autoriseret repræsentant for producenten for at få oplysninger om, hvordan dit udstyr skal bortskaffes. Dit symbool geeft aan dat het afval van elektrische en elektronische apparatuur niet ongescheiden mag worden meegegeven met het Dutch (DUT) huisvuil, maar apart moet worden ingeleverd. Neem contact op met een erkende vertegenwoordiger van de fabrikant voor informatie over het inleveren van uw apparatuur. Aquest símbol indica que els residus dels equips elèctrics i electrònics Catalan (CAT) s'han d'abocar per separat, no com a residus municipals no classificats. Contacteu amb un representant autoritzat del fabricant per obtenir informació sobre com desfer-vos del vostre equip. Chinese (CHN) See märk näitab, et tarbetuks muutunud elektri- ja elektroonikaseadmeid Estonian (EST) ei tohi ära visata sortimata olmejäätmetena, vaid need tuleb eraldi kokku koguda. Seadmete käitlemise kohta küsige lisateavet tootja volitatud esindajalt. Section 1-2 - Important Conventions 1-7
[Page 36] Tämä kuvatunnus ilmaisee, että sillä merkittyä sähkö- ja elektroniikkalaitetta ei saa hävittää lajittelemattomana yhdyskuntajätteenä Finnish (FIN) vaan se on kerättävä talteen erikseen. Ota yhteyttä tuotteen valmistajan valtuuttamaan myyntiedustajaan ja kysy lisätietoja laitteen käytöstä poistosta. Ce symbole indique que les déchets relatifs à l'équipement électrique et French- France électronique ne doivent pas être jetés comme les ordures ménagères (FRA) non-triées et doivent être collectés séparément. Contactez un repré sentant agréé du fabricant pour obtenir des informations sur la mise au rebut de votre équipement. Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet elektrische und elektronische Geräte, die nicht mit dem gewöhnlichen, unsortierten Hausmüll entsorgt werden dü German (GER) rfen, sondern separat behandelt werden müssen. Bitte nehmen Sie Kontakt mit einem autorisierten Beauftragten des Herstellers auf, um Informationen hinsichtlich der Entsorgung Ihres Gerätes zu erhalten. Αυτό το σύμβολο υποδηλώνει ότι τα απόβλητα ηλεκτρικού και ηλεκτρονικού εξ οπλισμού δεν πρέπει να απορρίπτονται ως κοινά απορρίματα , αλλά να συλλέγον Greek (GRE) ται ξεχωριστά . Παρακαλούμε επικοινωνήστε με έναν εξουσιοδοτημένο αντιπρό σωπο του κατασκευαστή για πληροφορίες σχετικά με την απόρριψη του εξοπλισ μού . A szimbólum azt jelzi, hogy az elektromos és elektronikus készülék hulladékát Hungarian tilos nem szelektív lakossági hulladékként kezelni, hanem elkülönítve kell gy ű (HUN) jteni. Kérjük, a berendezés leselejtezését illet ő leg lépjen kapcsolatba a gyártó hivatalos képviseletével. Merki þetta táknar að rafeindatækjum skal eytt á sérstakan máta, ekki m Icelandic (ICE) á losa rafeindatæki í hefðbundin sorphirðuílát sem óflokkað sorp. Vinsamlega hafið samband við umboðsmann framleiðanda fyrir upplý singar um hvernig tækinu skal eytt. 1-8 Section 1-2 - Important Conventions
[Page 37] Questo simbolo indica che i rifiuti derivanti da apparecchiature elettriche ed elettroniche non devono essere smaltiti come rifiuti municipali indifferenziati e Italian (ITA) devono invece essere raccolti separatamente. Per informazioni relative alle modalità di smantellamento delle apparecchiature fuori uso, contattare un rappresentante autorizzato del fabbricante. Japanese (JPN) Šis apz ī m ē jums nor ā da, ka no elektrisk ā un elektronisk ā apr ī kojuma atkritumiem nedr ī kst atbr ī voties k ā no neš ķ irotiem m ā jsaimniec ī bas Latvian (LAT) atkritumiem un tie ir j ā sav ā c atseviš ķ i. L ū dzu, sazinieties ar pilnvarotu raž ot ā ja p ā rst ā vi, lai sa ņ emtu inform ā ciju par apr ī kojuma ekspluat ā cijas p ā rtraukšanu. Šis simbolis nurodo, kad elektros ir elektronin ė s į rangos atliekos turi b ū ti Lithuanian surenkamos atskirai ir negali b ū ti šalinamos kaip ner ū šiuotos savivaldyb ė (LIT) s tvarkomos atliekos. Informacijos apie į rangos veikimo sustabdym ą kreipkit ė s į į galiot ą j į gamintojo atstov ą . Dette symbolet angir at elektrisk og elektronisk utstyr ikke skal kastes Norwegian som restavfall, men må leveres inn separat. Ta kontakt med en autorisert (NOR) representant for produsenten hvis du vil ha informasjon om hvordan utstyret skal avhendes. Ten symbol oznacza, i ż sk ł adowanie zu ż ytych urz ą dze ń elektrycznych i Polish (POL) elektronicznych wraz z ogólnymi odpadami miejskimi jest zabronione. Informacji na temat miejsc sk ł adowania tego typu odpadów udziela producent sprz ę tu. Este símbolo indica que os resíduos do equipamento elétrico e eletrônico Portuguese- não devem ser descartados no sistema de coleta de lixo municipal, e sim Brazilian (POB) coletados separadamente. Favor entrar em contato com um representante autorizado do fabricante para obter informações sobre como descartar seu equipamento. Section 1-2 - Important Conventions 1-9
[Page 38] Acest simbol indic ă faptul c ă de ş eurile de echipamente electrice ş i Romanian electronice nu au voie s ă fie aruncate nediferen ţ iat ca gunoi menajer ş i c (ROM) ă ele trebuie colectate separat. V ă rug ă m s ă lua ţ i leg ă tura cu un reprezentant autorizat al produc ă torului pentru a ob ţ ine informa ţ ii referitoare la eliminarea ecologic ă a echipamentului dumneavoastr ă . Символ обозначает : недопустимо выбрасывать электрическое и эле ктронное оборудование с неотсортированным бытовым мусором . Он Russian (RUS) о должно собираться отдельно . Для получения сведений об утилиза ции оборудования обратитесь к авторизованному представителю ко мпании - производителя . Ovaj simbol ozna č ava da se otpad elektri č ne i elektronske opreme ne sme odlagati zajedno sa obi č nim gradskim sme ć em, ve ć se mora Serbian (SCC) pokupiti posebno. Molimo vas da kontaktirate ovlaš ć enog predstavnika proizvo đ a č a svoje opreme, kako bi ste se informisali o njenom pravilnom rashodu. Tento symbol ozna č uje, že odpad elektrického a elektronického materiá Slovakian lu sa nesmie vyhadzova ť do netriedeného komunálneho odpadu, ale mus (SLK) í sa likvidova ť oddelene. Viac informácií o likvidácii vášho zariadenia vám poskytne poverený zástupca výrobcu. Ta simbol obeležava da se elektronski otpad in elektronska oprema ne sme Slovenian odlagati skup z navadnim mesnim otpadom, ter se mora pobrat posebej. Prosimo (SLN) vas da kontaktirate pooblaš č enega prodajalca opreme, kako bi se informirali o njenem pravilnem rashodu. Este símbolo indica que el equipo eléctrico y electrónico no debe tirarse Spanish-Spain con los desechos domésticos y debe tratarse por separado. Contacte (SPA) con el representante local del fabricante para obtener más información sobre la forma de desechar el equipo. Denna symbol anger att elektriska och elektroniska utrustningar inte får avyttras Swedish som osorterat hushållsavfall och måste samlas in separat. Var god kontakta en (SWE) auktoriserad tillverkarrepresentant för information angående avyttring av utrustningen. 1-10 Section 1-2 - Important Conventions
[Page 39] Bu sembol, elektrikli ve elektronik ekipmanlar ı n s ı n ı fland ı r ı lmam ı ş çöp Turkish (TUR) olarak at ı lmamas ı ve ayr ı olarak toplanmas ı gerekti ğ ini belirtir. Lütfen ekipman ı n ı z ı n imhas ı yla ilgili olarak üreticinin yetkili temsilcisine ba ş vurun. The symbol is affixed to a battery to advise the user or owner that it must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local, state, or country laws. English The letter below indicates the toxic element (Pb=Lead, Cd=Cadmium, Hg=Mercury) that is contained in the battery that may require special recycling or disposal method, Please contact a GEHC representative to facilitate servicing, removal and disposal options. Section 1-2 - Important Conventions 1-11
[Page 40] Section 1-3 Safety Considerations 1-3-1 Introduction The following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. 1-3-2 Human Safety Operating personnel must not remove the system covers. Servicing should be performed by authorized personnel only. Only personnel who have participated in a LOGIQ™ P5 Training are authorized to service the equipment. 1-3-3 Mechanical Safety WARNING WARNING WHEN THE UNIT IS RAISED FOR A REPAIR OR MOVED ALONG ANY INCLINE, USE EXTREME CAUTION SINCE IT MAY BECOME UNSTABLE AND TIP OVER. WARNING WARNING ULTRASOUND PROBES ARE HIGHLY SENSITIVE MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS THAT CAN EASILY BE DAMAGED BY IMPROPER HANDLING. USE CARE WHEN HANDLING AND PROTECT FROM DAMAGE WHEN NOT IN USE. DO NOT USE A DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE PROBE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PRECAUTIONS CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE. WARNING WARNING NEVER USE A PROBE THAT HAS FALLEN TO THE FLOOR. EVEN IF IT LOOKS OK, IT MAY BE DAMAGED. CAUTION Always lower and center the Operator I/O Panel before moving the scanner. CAUTION The LOGIQ™ P5 weighs 75 kg or more, depending on installed peripherals, (165 lbs., or more) when ready for use. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts. Failure to follow the precautions listed could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly damage. ALWAYS: Be sure the pathway is clear. Use slow, careful motions. Use two people when moving on inclines or lifting more than 16 kg (35 lbs). CAUTION There is a pinch point in LCD monitor. Need care for injury on hands or fingers in flipping down the LCD monitor. 1-12 Section 1-3 - Safety Considerations
[Page 41] 1-3-3 Mechanical Safety (cont’d) NOTE: Special care should be taken when transporting the unit in a vehicle: • Secure the unit in an upright position. • Lock the wheels (brake) • DO NOT use the Control Panel as an anchor point. • Place the probes in their carrying case. • Eject DVD media from the system. CAUTION Keep the heat venting holes on the monitor unobstructed to avoid overheating of the monitor. 1-3-4 Electrical Safety To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. The system is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable. This must be plugged into an approved electrical outlet with safety ground. If an extension cord is used with the system, make sure that the total current rating of the system does not exceed the extension cord rating. The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment. Both the system power cable and the power connector meet international electrical standards. WARNING WARNING DO NOT SERVICE OR DISASSEMBLE PARTS UNDER FRU UNIT LEVEL AT ANY CIRCUMSTANCES. Section 1-3 - Safety Considerations 1-13
[Page 42] 1-3-5 Label Locations Figure 1-1 OUTSIDE MARKINGS OF LOGIQ™ P5 (Rear) 1.) Identification and Rating Plate - USA/Asia 120V Console 2.) Identification and Rating Plate - Europe/Asia/Latin America 220V Console 3.) Identification and Rating Plate - Japan 100V Console 4.) Identification and Rating Plate - Korea 220V Console 5.) Identification and Rating Plate - China 220V Console 6.) UL Label 1-14 Section 1-3 - Safety Considerations
[Page 43] 1-3-5 Label Locations (cont’d) Figure 1-2 OUTSIDE MARKINGS OF LOGIQ™ P5 1.) Possible Shock Hazard 2.) Label -”Do not use the following devices near this equipment.” 3.) Label - “The equipment weighs approximately 75kg. 4.) Prescription Devices 5.) CE Mark Label (Left), WEEE Label (Right) 6.) CISPR Label 7.) Grounding reliability Label 8.) Voltage Range Indication and Power indication Label 9.) Standard LCD Arm & flexible LCD Arm Option Label & Mercury Label 10.)LCD Arm Rotation Label Section 1-3 - Safety Considerations 1-15
[Page 44] 1-3-6 Dangerous Procedure Warnings Warnings, such as the examples below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed. DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING. WARNING WARNING EXPLOSION WARNING DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE. OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD. WARNING WARNING DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT BECAUSE OF THE DANGER OF INTRODUCING ADDITIONAL HAZARDS, DO NOT INSTALL SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR PERFORM ANY UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION OF THE EQUIPMENT. 1-3-7 Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the electrical Mains plug. 1-16 Section 1-3 - Safety Considerations
[Page 45] Section 1-4 EMC, EMI, and ESD 1-4-1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Electromagnetic compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other equipment, power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility results when a susceptible device fails to perform as intended due interference from its environment or when the device produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is often referred to as radio–frequency or electromagnetic interference (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated through space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic energy, EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic discharge and disturbances in the electrical power supply. 1-4-2 CE Compliance The LOGIQ™ P5 unit conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and to immunity from electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and power line transient requirements. For applicable standards refer to the Safety Chapter in the Basic User Manual. NOTE: For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh, clamps, are in good condition, installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following all comments noted in this service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance. 1-4-3 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention WARNING WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS: 1.ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (TO THE RIGHT OF THE POWER CONNECTOR). 2.FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT. Section 1-4 - EMC, EMI, and ESD 1-17
[Page 46] Section 1-5 Customer Assistance 1-5-1 Contact Information If this equipment does not work as indicated in this service manual or in the User Manual, or if you require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource, as listed below. Prepare the following information before you call: - System ID serial number. - Software version. Table 1-7 Phone Numbers for Customer Assistance Location Phone Number 1-800–437–1171 USA/ Canada GE Medical Systems Ultrasound Service Engineering 4855 W. Electric Avenue Milwaukee, WI 53219 1-800-682-5327 Customer Answer Center 1-262-524-5698 Fax: +1-414-647-4125 1-262-524-5300 Latin America GE Medical Systems Ultrasound Service Engineering 4855 W. Electric Avenue Milwaukee, WI 53219 1-262-524-5698 Customer Answer Center Fax: +1-414-647-4125 Europe Tel: +49 212 2802 208 GE Ultraschall Deutschland GmbH& Co. KG +49 212 2802 207 BeethovenstraBe 239 Postfach 11 05 60, D-42665 Solingen Germany Fax: +49 212 2802 431 Tel: +65 291-8528 Asia (Singapore/ Japan) +81 426-482950 GE Ultrasound Asia Service Department - Ultrasound 298 Tiong Bahru Road #15-01/06 Central Plaza Fax: +65 272-3997 Singapore 169730 +81 426-482902 1-18 Section 1-5 - Customer Assistance
[Page 47] 1-5-2 System Manufacturer Table 1-8 System Manufacturer Manufacturer FAX Number GE Ultrasound Korea, Ltd. 9, Sunhwan-ro 214beon-gil, Jungwon-gu, Seongnam-si, 82-31-740-6436 Gyeonggi-do, Korea Section 1-5 - Customer Assistance 1-19
[Page 48] This page was intentionally left blank. 1-20 Section 1-5 - Customer Assistance
[Page 49] Chapter 2 Pre-Installation Section 2-1 Overview 2-1-1 Purpose of chapter 2 This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the installation of a LOGIQ™ P5. Included are descriptions of the facility and electrical needs to be met by the purchaser of the unit. A checklist is also provided at the end of this section to help determine whether the proper planning and preparation is accomplished before the actual equipment installation is scheduled. Table 2-1 Contents in Chapter 2 Section Description Page Number 2-1 Overview 2-1 2-2 General Console Requirements 2-2 2-3 Facility Needs 2-7 Section 2-1 - Overview 2-1
[Page 50] Section 2-2 General Console Requirements 2-2-1 Console Environmental Requirements Table 2-2 Environmental Requirements for LOGIQ™ P5 Scanners Operational Storage Transport o o o 10 - 30 C -10 - 60 C -40 - 60 C Temperature o o o 50 - 104 F 14 - 140 F -40 - 140 F 30 - 85% 30 - 90% 30 - 90% Humidity non-condensing non-condensing non-condensing Pressure 700 - 1060hPa 700 - 1060hPa 700 - 1060hPa Table 2-3 Environmental Requirements for an Ultrasound Room Item Values Power Source refer to Table 2-4 on page 2-3. Current Rating 7.5A (100V-120V); 3.5A (220-240V) Radiation Shielding NONE REQUIRED for ULTRASOUND ENERGY Temperature 20-26 DEG. C (68-79 DEG F) for PATIENT COMFORT Humidity 50% to 70% for PATIENT COMFORT Heat Dissipation 2000 BTU/Hr. Floor Landing Approximately 680 - 800 kg/m 2 without Accessories Floor Condition Gradient: WITHIN 5 degrees Weight 75 kg (165lbs) without Accessories 2-2-1-1 Cooling The cooling requirement for the LOGIQ™ P5 is 2000 BTU/hr. This figure does not include cooling needed for lights, people, or other equipment in the room. Each person in the room places an additional 300 BTU/hr. demand on the cooling system. 2-2-1-2 Lighting Bright light is needed for system installation, updates and repairs. However, operator and patient comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination lighting system (dim/bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and diameters can be a source of EMI which could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize possible interface. 2-2 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements
[Page 51] 2-2-2 Electrical Requirements NOTE: GE Medical Systems requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system. Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live: The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral: The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. NOTE: Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit. 2-2-2-1 LOGIQ™ P5 Power Requirements The following power line parameters should be monitored for one week before installation. We recommend that you use an analyzer Dranetz Model 606-3 or Dranetz Model 626: Table 2-4 Electrical Specifications for LOGIQ™ P5 PARAMETER AREA LIMITS 100~120V 100~120 VAC ± 10% (90-132 VAC) Voltage Range 220~240V 220-240 VAC ± 10% (198-264 VAC) Power All applications MAX. 750 VA Line Frequency All applications 50/60Hz ( ± 2Hz) Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of Power Transients All applications transient, including line frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients. Less than 15% of peak voltage for less Decaying Oscillation All applications than 1 millisecond. 2-2-2-2 Inrush Current Inrush Current is not a factor to consider due to the inrush current limiting properties of the power supplies. 2-2-2-3 Site Circuit Breaker It is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the machine be ready accessible. CAUTION POWER OUTAGE MAY OCCURE. The LOGIQ™ P5 requires a dedicated single branch circuit. To avoid circuit overload and possible loss of critical care equipment, make sure you DO NOT have any other equipment operating on the same circuit. Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements 2-3
[Page 52] 2-2-2-4 Site Power Outlets A desiccated AC power outlet must be within reach of the unit without extension cords. Other outlets adequate for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment needed to support this unit must also be present within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the unit. Electrical installation must meet all current local, state, and national electrical codes. 2-2-2-5 Unit Power Plug If the unit arrives without the power plug, or with the wrong plug, you must contact your GE dealer or the installation engineer must supply what is locally required. 2-2-2-6 Power Stability Requirements Voltage drop-out Max 10 ms. Power Transients (All applications) Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of transient, including line frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients. 2-4 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements
[Page 53] 2-2-3 EMI Limitations Ultrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies, magnetic fields, and transient in the air wiring. They also generate EMI. The LOGIQ™ P5 complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However there is no guarantee that interface will not occur in a particular installation. Possible EMI sources should be identified before the unit is installed. Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of defect. These sources include: • medical lasers, • scanners, • cauterizing guns, • computers, • monitors, • fans, • gel warmers, • microwave ovens, • light dimmers, • portable phones. The presence of broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference. See for EMI Prevention tips. See Table 2-5 for EMI Prevention tips. Table 2-5 EMI Prevention/abatement EMI Rule Details Keep the unit at least 5 meters or 15 feet away from other EMI sources. Special shielding Be aware of RF sources may be required to eliminate interference problems caused by high frequency, high powered radio or video broadcast signals. Poor grounding is the most likely reason a unit will have noisy images. Check grounding of Ground the unit the power cord and power outlet. After you finish repairing or updating the system, replace all covers and tighten all screws. Replace all screws, RF Any cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end. Install the gaskets, covers, cores shield over the front of card cage. Loose or missing covers or RF gaskets allow radio frequencies to interface with the ultrasound signals. If more than 20% or a pair of fingers on the RF gaskets are broken, replace the gaskets. Replace broken RF gaskets Do not turn on the unit until any loose metallic part is removed. Do not place labels where RF Never place a label where RF gaskets meet the unit. Otherwise, the gap created will permit gaskets touch metal RF leakage. Or, if a label has been found in such a position, move the label. Use GE specified harnesses The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding. Also, and peripherals cable length, material, and routing are all important; do not change from what is specified. Take care with cellular phones Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal; that could cause image artifacts. Do not allow cables to lie across the top of the card cage or hang out of the peripheral bays. Properly dress peripheral Loop the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays. Attach the monitor cables cables to the frame. Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements 2-5
[Page 54] 2-2-4 Scan Probe Environmental Requirements Operation:10° to 30° C Storage:--10° to 60° C NOTE: Temperature in degrees C. Conversion to Degrees F = (Degrees C * 9/5) + 32). NOTICE SYSTEMS AND ELECTRONIC PROBES ARE DESIGNED FOR STORAGE TEMPERATURES OF -10 TO + 60 degrees C. WHEN EXPOSED TO LARGE TEMPERATURE VARIATIONS, THE PRODUCT SHOULD BE KEPT IN ROOM TEMPERATURE FOR 10 HOURS BEFORE USE. 2-6 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements
[Page 55] Section 2-3 Facility Needs 2-3-1 Purchaser Responsibilities The work and materials needed to prepare the site is the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay, confusion, and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre installation work before delivery. User the Pre Installation checklist to verify that all needed steps have been taken, Purchaser reasonability includes: • Procuring the materials required. • Completing the preparations before delivery of the ultrasound system. • Paying the costs for any alternations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract. NOTE: All electrical installation that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated and special engineering competence is required. All electrical work on these product must comply with the requirements of applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified personnel to perform electrical servicing on the equipment. The desire to use a non-listed or customer provided product or to place an approved product further from the system than the interface kit allows presents challenges to the installation team. To avoid delays during installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group performing the installation at the earliest possible date (preferable prior to purchase). The ultrasound suite must be clean proof to delivery of the machine. Carpet is not recommended because it collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI (electromagnetic interference) should also be investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact system. Section 2-3 - Facility Needs 2-7
[Page 56] 2-3-2 Required Features NOTE: GE Medical Systems requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system. Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live: The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral: The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit. • Dedicated single branch power outlet of adequate amperage meeting all local and national codes which is located less than 2.5 m (8 ft.) from the unit’s proposed location • Door opening is at least 76 cm (30 in) wide • Proposed location for unit is at least 0.3 m (1 ft.) from the wall for cooling • Power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within 2 m (6.5 ft.) of each other with peripheral within 1 m of the unit to connect cables. NOTE: The LOGIQ™ P5 has two outlets outside the unit. Both are for on board peripherals. • Clean and protected space to store transducers (in their cases or on a rack) • Material to safely clean probes (done with a plastic container, never metal) 2-3-3 Desirable Features • Door is at least 92 cm (3 ft.) wide • Circuit breaker for dedicated power outlet is easily accessible • Sink with hot and cold water • Receptacle for bio–hazardous waste, like used probe sheaths • Emergency oxygen supply • Storage for linens and equipment • Nearby waiting room, lavatory, and dressing room • Dual level lighting (bright and dim) • Lockable cabinet ordered by GE for its software and proprietary manuals. 2-8 Section 2-3 - Facility Needs
[Page 57] 2-3-4 Recommended and Alternate Ultrasound Room Layout Recommended standard floor plan and a minimal floor plan for ultrasound equipment: DEDICATED ALALOG TELEPHONE LINE FOR CONNECTION TO INSITE 18 IN. (46 CM) LINEN SUPPLY DEDICATED POWER RECEPTACLE CONSOLE FILM PROCESSING ROOM, FILM VIEWER FOOT SW FILE COUNTER TOP COUNTER TOP STOOL CABINET EXAMINATION TABLE SINK 76 IN. (193 CM) SUCTION LINE 24 IN. EMERGECY (61 CM) OXYGEN SECRETARYS OR DOCTOR’S DESK OVERHEAD PATIENT LIGHTS DIMMER TOILET FACILITY DOOR 42 IN. (107 CM) A 14 by 17 foot Recommended Floor Plan Scale : Each square equals one square foot FILM VIEWER LINEN SUPPLY SINK FILM SUPPLIES PROBES/SUPPLIES EXTERNAL PERIPHERALS DEDICATED POWER OUTLETS FOOT LOGIQ 5 SW STOOL CONSOLE DEDICATED ANALOG TELEPHONE LINE FOR CONNECTION TO INSITE EXAMINARION GE CABINET 24 IN. TABLE FOT SOFTWARE (61 CM) 76 IN. AND MANUALS (193 CM) DOOR 30 IN. (76 CM) An 8 by 10 foot Minimal Floor Plan Figure 2-1 RECOMMENDED ULTRASOUND ROOM LAYOUT Section 2-3 - Facility Needs 2-9
[Page 58] 2-3-5 Networking Pre-installation Requirements 2-3-5-1 Purpose of DICOM Network Function DICOM services provide the operator with clinically useful features for moving images and patient information over a hospital network. Examples of DICOM services include the transfer of images to workstations for viewing or transferring images to remote printers. As an added benefit, transferring images in this manner frees up the on-board monitor and peripherals, enabling viewing to be done while scanning continues. With DICOM, images can be archived, stored, and retrieved faster, easier, and at a lower cost. 2-3-5-2 DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements To configure the LOGIQ™ P5 to work with other network connections, the site’s network administrator must provide some necessary information. Information must include: • A host name, local port number, AE Title, IP address and Net Mask for the LOGIQ™ P5. • The IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING INFORMATION. • The host name, IP address, port and AE Title for each device the site wants connected to the LOGIQ™ P5 for DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION. A field for the make (manufacturer) and the revision of the device, is also included. This information may be useful for solving errors. 2-10 Section 2-3 - Facility Needs
[Page 59] 2-3-5-2 DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements (cont’d) LOGIQ™ P5 Host Name Local Port IP Address . . . AE Title Net Mask . . . ROUTING INFORMATION GATEWAY IP Addresses Destination IP Addresses Default . . . ROUTER1 . . . . . . ROUTER2 . . . . . . ROUTER3 . . . . . . DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION NAME MAKE/REVISION AE TITLE IP ADDRESSES PORT Store 1 . . . Store 2 . . . Store 3 . . . Store 4 . . . Store 5 . . . Store 6 . . . Worklist . . . Storage . . . Commit MPPS . . . Figure 2-2 Worksheet for DICOM Network Information Section 2-3 - Facility Needs 2-11
[Page 60] This page was intentionally left blank. 2-12 Section 2-3 - Facility Needs
[Page 61] Chapter 3 Installation Section 3-1 Overview 3-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 3 This chapter contains information needed to install the unit. Included are references to a procedure that describes how to receive and unpack the equipment and how to file a damage or loss claim. How to prepare the facility and unit of the actual installation, and how to check and test the unit, probes, and external peripherals for electrical safety are included in this procedure. Also included in this section are guidelines for transporting the unit to a new site. Table 3-1 Contents in Chapter 3 Section Description Page Number 3-1 Overview 3-1 3-2 Installation Reminders 3-2 3-3 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment 3-4 3-4 Preparing for Installation 3-10 3-5 Completing the Installation 3-11 3-6 System Configuration 3-16 3-7 Available Probes 3-23 3-8 Software/Option Configuration 3-23 3-9 Connectivity Installation Worksheet 3-24 3-10 Insite IP Address Configuration 3-25 3-11 Loading Base System Software 3-25 3-12 Warnings 3-25 3-13 Paperwork 3-26 Section 3-1 - Overview 3-1
[Page 62] Section 3-2 Installation Reminders 3-2-1 Average Installation Time Table 3-2 Average Installation Time Description Average Installation Time Comments Unpacking the scanner 0.5 hour Scanner wo/options 0.5 hour Dependant on the configuration that is required DICOM Option 0.5 hour Dependant on the amount of configuration InSite Option 0.5 hour The LOGIQ™ P5 has been designed to be installed and checked out by an experienced service technician in approximately four hours. LOGIQ™ P5 consoles with optional equipment may take slightly longer. 3-2-2 Installation Warnings 1.) Since the LOGIQ™ P5 weighs approximately 75 kg.(165 lb.) without options, preferably two people should unpack it. Two people are also preferable for installing any additional bulky items. 2.) There are no operator serviceable components. To prevent shock, do not remove any covers or panels. Should problems or malfunctions occur, unplug the power cord. Only qualified service personnel should carry out servicing and troubleshooting. NOTE: For information regarding packing labels, refer to LABELS ON PACKAGE. 3.) After being transported, the unit may be very cold or hot. If this is the case, allow the unit to acclimate before you turn it on. It requires one hour for each 2.5 ° C increment it's temperature is below 10 ° C or above 30 ° C. CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Turning the system on without acclimation after arriving at site may cause the system to be damaged. Table 3-3 Acclimation Time ° C 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40 ° F 140 131 122 113 104 96 86 77 68 59 50 41 32 23 14 5 -4 -13 -22 -31 -40 hrs 8 6 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 3-2 Section 3-2 - Installation Reminders
[Page 63] 3-2-3 Safety Reminders DANGER WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE OF OPENING THE AC GROUND LINE (I.E., METER’S GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN), DON’T TOUCH THE UNIT! CAUTION Two people should unpack the unit because of its weight. Two people are required whenever a part weighing 19kg (35 lb.) or more must be lifted. CAUTION If the unit is very cold or hot, do not turn on its power until it has had a chance to acclimate to its operating environment. CAUTION To prevent electrical shock, connect the unit to a properly grounded power outlet. Do not use a three to two prong adapter. This defeats safety grounding. CAUTION Do NOT wear the ESD wrist strap when you work on live circuits and more than 30 V peak is present. CAUTION Do not use a 20 Amp to 15 Amp adapter on the 120 Vac unit’s power cord. This unit requires a dedicated 20 A circuit and can have a 15A plug if the on board peripherals do not cause the unit to draw more than 14.0 amps. CAUTION Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System performance and cooling require this. CAUTION OPERATOR MANUAL(S) The User Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ™ P5 and kept near the unit for quick reference. CAUTION ACOUSTIC OUTPUT HAZARD Although the ultrasound energy transmitted from the LOGIQ™ P5 probe is within FDA limits, avoid unnecessary exposure. Ultrasound energy can produce heat and mechanical damage. Figure 3-1 Environmental Labels Section 3-2 - Installation Reminders 3-3
[Page 64] Section 3-3 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment When a new system arrives, check that any components are not damaged and are not in short supply. If shipping damage or shortage occurs, contact the address shown in Chapter 1. CAUTION Do not lift the unit by the Keyboard. Equipment damage may result. CAUTION The crate with the LOGIQ™ P5 weighs approximately 75 kg. (165 lb.) Be prepared for a sudden shift of weight as the unit is removed from its base (pallet) 1.) Cut the three PLASTIC BANDs. Plastic Bands Figure 3-2 Cutting the Plastic Bands. 3-4 Section 3-3 - Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment
[Page 65] 2.) Lift the TOP COVER up and off. Top Cover Figure 3-3 Removing the top Cover Section 3-3 - Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment 3-5
[Page 66] 3.) Remove the Top Plate up and off.. Top Plate Figure 3-4 Removing the Top Plate 3-6 Section 3-3 - Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment
[Page 67] 4.) Remove the three PLASTIC JOINTs from the OUTER SLEEVE. 5.) Remove the OUTER SLEEVE. Plastic Joint Outer Sleeve Palette Assy Figure 3-5 Removing Plastic Joints and Sleeves Section 3-3 - Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment 3-7
[Page 68] 6.) Remove the MONITOR SUPPORTER and Option Box. 7.) Remove the PLASTIC BAG. 8.) Unlock the front caster and carefully put the console off the PALETTE. Monitor Pad Figure 3-6 Moving the LOGIQ™ P5 from the crate 3-8 Section 3-3 - Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment
[Page 69] 3-3-1 Moving into Position CAUTION Do not lift the unit by the Keyboard. Do not tilt the unit more than 5 degrees to avoid tipping it over. To avoid injury by tipping over. Set the monitor to the lowest position before moving. CAUTION Equipment Damage Possibility. Lifting the console by holding covers may damage the covers. Do not lift the console by holding any covers. In general, a single adult can move the LOGIQ™ P5 along an even surface with no steep grades. At least two people should move the machine when large humps, grooves, or grades will be encountered. (It is better to pull from the rear rather than push from the front of the unit). Before moving, store all loose parts in the unit. Wrap transducers in soft cloth or foam to prevent damage. Although LOGIQ™ P5 is a compact and mobile machine, two people should move it over rough surfaces or up and down grades. 3-3-2 Adjusting System Clock Set the system clock for the LOGIQ™ P5 to the local time. For procedure of adjusting the system clock, refer to section 3-6-1-1 on page 16. Fill out proper customer Information the Product Locator Installation Card. Mail this Installation Card “Product Locator” to the address corresponding to your pole. 3-3-3 Product Locator Installation Card NOTE: The Product Locator Installation Card shown may not be same as the provided Product Locator card. Figure 3-7 Product Locator Installation Card Section 3-3 - Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment 3-9
[Page 70] Section 3-4 Preparing for Installation 3-4-1 Verify Customer Order Compare items received by the customer to that which is listed on the delivery order. Report any items that are missing, back ordered or damaged. 3-4-2 Physical Inspection 3-4-2-1 System Voltage Settings Verify that the scanner is set to the correct voltage. The Voltage settings for the LOGIQ™ P5 Scanner is found on a label to the right of the Power switch and External I/O, on the rear of the system. WARNING WARNING Connecting a LOGIQ™ P5 scanner to the wrong voltage level will most likely destroy the scanner. 3-4-2-2 Video Formats Check that the video format for VCR playback is set to the locally used video standard, NTSC or PAL. 3-4-3 EMI Protection This Unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the system from image artifacts caused by this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and secured before the unit is put into operation. 3-10 Section 3-4 - Preparing for Installation
[Page 71] Section 3-5Completing the Installation 3-5-1 Power On/Boot Up NOTE: After turning off the system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly. 3-5-1-1 Scanner Power On 1.) Connect the Main Power Cable at the rear of the System. WARNING WARNING Protective earth must be taken when connecting AC power cable (200V) without its plug to wall outlet. 2.) Connect the Main Power cable to an appropriate mains power outlet. 3.) Switch ON the Main Circuit Breaker at the rear of the System. Figure 3-8 Circuit Breaker When power is applied to the Scanner, and the Rear Circuit breaker is turned ON, Power is distributed to the DC Power supply unit and power control assy in the AC power assy. When the Power ON/OFF key is pressed once, the DC power supply is enabled and feed each DC power to board assemblies. and system run the software. 4.) Press the ON/OFF key at the front of the System once. Section 3-5 - Completing the Installation 3-11
[Page 72] 3-5-1-1 Scanner Power On (cont’d) Figure 3-9 Power On/Off Switch Location 3-12 Section 3-5 - Completing the Installation
[Page 73] 3-5-1-2 Power Up Sequence 1.) The Start Up Screen will be shown on the Monitor display when the system is turned ON. Figure 3-10 Start Up Screen Display 2.) After initialization is complete, all lighted buttons on the Control Panel light and the default B-Mode screen or Patient screen (no probes are connected) is displayed on the monitor display. 3-5-1-3 Power Up Sequence NOTE: To enter the Maintenance Mode, select Maintenance button. NOTE: Figure 3-11 on page 3-13 displays when Service Dongle inserted in Rear Panel. Figure 3-11 Start Application Window NOTE: Start is selected automatically when it time out. NOTE: In case the system is locked with task manager, use arirang as a password to unlock the system. Section 3-5 - Completing the Installation 3-13
[Page 74] 3-5-2 Power Off/ Shutdown NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly. 3-5-2-1 Power Shutdown 1.) Press the ON/OFF key at the front of the System. refer to Figure 3-9 on page 3-12 . 2.) Click the shutdown icon in the shutdown dialog box and wait until the system shutdown. 3.) Switch OFF the Main Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system refer to Figure 3-8 on page 3-11 . 4.) Disconnect the Main Power Cable is necessary. For example : Relocating the scanner. 3-14 Section 3-5 - Completing the Installation
[Page 75] 3-5-3 Transducer Connection 1.) Connect a transducer to one of the three rightmost transducer receptacle as follows: A.) Ensure that the transducer twist lock lever to the horizontal position. B.) Insert the transducer connector on the receptacle guide pin until it touches the receptacle mating surface. C.) Twist the transducer twist lock lever to horizontal position to lock it in place. Twist the lever to the vertical position to disconnect the transducer. NOTE: It is not necessary to turn OFF power to connect or disconnect a transducer. Section 3-5 - Completing the Installation 3-15
[Page 76] Section 3-6 System Configuration 3-6-1 System Specifications 3-6-1-1 System Settings Table 3-1 System Configuration Configuration Category Description Enables the user or service personnel to set the date, time, unit, language, basic information about Settings the organization such as the institution name and department. 1.) Press Insert key on the A/N keyboard to enter the utility menu. 2.) Select Utility > System > General. 3.) Set the Hospital name, Department, Date and Time, Language, and Units. Figure 3-12 Setting Display 4.) Click on Exit to terminate the utility function. 3-16 Section 3-6 - System Configuration
[Page 77] 3-6-1-2 Physical Dimensions The physical dimensions of the LOGIQ™ P5 unit are summarized in Table 3-2 on page 3-17 . The Size of LOGIQ™ P5, with monitor and peripherals Table 3-2 Physical Dimensions of LOGIQ™ P5 Height Width Depth Unit 135/141 43.0 64.0 cm 53.15 - 55.50 16.97 25.2 inches WEIGHT : 75Kg (165bs) including Monitor NOTE : Length is in mm Variation +/- 10% 1350 / 1410 840 / 900 Figure 3-13 Overall Dimensions Section 3-6 - System Configuration 3-17
[Page 78] 3-6-1-3 Weight without Monitor and Peripherals Table 3-3 Weight of LOGIQ™ P5 With Monitor and Without Other Peripherals Model Weight [kg] Weight [lbs] LOGIQ™ P5 Approximately 75 Approximately 165 3-6-1-4 Acoustic Noise Output: Less than 70dB (A) according to DIN 45635 - 19 - 01 - KL2. 3-6-2 Electrical Specifications Table 3-4 Electrical Specifications for LOGIQ™ P5 System Voltage Current Frequency 1 110 ~ 120 VAC 7 ~ 9A 50~60Hz 2 220 ~ 240 VAC 3.5 ~ 4.5A 50~60Hz 3-6-3 On-Board Optional Peripherals Table 3-5 List of Recording Devices Device Manufacturer Model Video Signal Mitsubishi P93D/P95DW/P95D/ P95DE/P95DW-N/P95DW- B/W Video Printer N/A (* USB Interface) SONY UP-D895/UP-D897 HS-MD3000U Video Cassette Recorder Mistubishi NTSC/PAL (USB Interface) HS-MD3000E DVD Video Recorder Panasonic LQ-MD800 NTSC/PAL (USB Interface) Mitsubishi CP30DW/CP30DW-Z A6 Color Video Printer N/A (* USB Interface) SONY UP-D23MD/UP-D25MD See each option installation instructions for installation and connection procedures. NOTE: There are no external peripheral options for the LOGIQ™ P5. 3-18 Section 3-6 - System Configuration
[Page 79] 3-6-4 External I/O Connector Panel Located on the rear panel are video input and output connectors, audio input and output, USB, footswitch connector power connector and control connections for VCR or DVD Recorder, printer, and service tools. This section indicates the pin assignment for each connector. Figure 3-14 Rear Connector Panel NOTE: Each outer (case) ground line of peripheral/accessory connectors are protectively grounded. Signal ground lines are not isolated, except the Service port (3). All of signal lines (include signal GND) of the Service port are isolated. Section 3-6 - System Configuration 3-19
[Page 80] 3-6-4-1 External I/O Pin Outs Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal 1 RED 9 N/A 2 GREEN 10 SGND 3 BLUE 11 N/A 4 N/A 12 N/A 5 GND 13 HSYNC 6 RGND 14 VSYNC 7 GGND 15 N/A 8 BGND Table 3-6 Pin Assignments of DB15 connector for External VGA Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal 1 +5 VDC 3 DATA + 2 DATA - 4 GND Table 3-7 Pin Assignments of USB Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal 1 TX+ 5 NC 2 TX- 6 RX- 3 RX+ 7 NC 4 NC 8 NC Table 3-8 Pin Assignments of Ethernet 3-20 Section 3-6 - System Configuration
[Page 81] 3-6-5 Video Specification Video specifications may be needed to be able to connect the VCR or DVD Video Recorder to the LOGIQ™ P5. Table 3-9 Video Specifications 640x480 800x600 800x600 1024x768 Timing Parameter NTSC PAL 60Hz 60Hz 75Hz 60Hz Horizontal Rate [kHz] 60.02 31.25 31.47 37.88 46.88 48.36 Horizontal Period [μ s] 16.66 32.00 31.78 26.40 21.33 20.68 Pixel Clock [MHz] 78.75 29.50 24.55 40.00 49.50 65.00 H Blank Width [μ s ] 3.66 5.97 5.70 6.40 5.17 4.92 H Sync Width [μ s ] 1.22 2.34 2.36 3.20 1.62 2.09 H Front Porch [μ s ] 0.20 0.75 0.73 1.00 0.32 0.37 Active Horizontal Period [μ s ] 13.00 26.03 26.07 20.00 16.16 15.75 Vertical Rate [Hz] 75.03 50.00 59.94 60.32 75.00 60.00 Vertical Period [ms] 13.33 20.00 16.68 16.58 13.33 16.67 V Sync Width [lines=ms] 32=0.53 49=1.57 45=1.43 28=0.74 25=0.53 38=0.79 V Front Porch [ lines= μ s ] 3=50.00 5=160.00 6=190.70 4=105.60 3=64.00 6=124.10 Equalization Gate [ lines= μ s ] 1=16.66 5=160.0 6=190.7 1=26.4 1=21.3 3=62.00 Lines: Field/Frame 800 625/625 525/525 628 625 806 Active Lines/Frame 768 576 480 600 600 768 Section 3-6 - System Configuration 3-21
[Page 82] 3-6-6 Setting VCR (Mitsubishi MD3000) USB Interface 1.) Turn off the Power of the VCR. 2.) Open the rear panel of the VCR. 3.) Set dip switches. Off 1~6 pins, On 7 pin, and Off 8 pin. NOTE: 7 Pin ON = USB Interface, OFF = RS232C Interface. Figure 3-15 Setting VCR USB Interface 3-22 Section 3-6 - System Configuration
[Page 83] Section 3-7 Available Probes See Specifications in the LOGIQ™ P5 User Manual for probes and intended use. See Chapter 9 , for part numbers to be used when ordering new or replacement probes. Section 3-8 Software/Option Configuration refer to the LOGIQ™ P5 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System for information on configuring items like Hospital, Department, Language, Units (of measure), Date, Time and Date Format. For information on configuring Software Options, refer to the LOGIQ™ P5 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System. For information on configuring DICOM Connectivity, refer to the LOGIQ™ P5 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System. Section 3-7 - Available Probes 3-23
[Page 84] Section 3-9 Connectivity Installation Worksheet Site System Information Floor: Comments: Site: Dept: Room: LOGIQ SN: Type: REV: CONTACT INFORMATION Name Title Phone E-Mail Address TCP/IP Settings Name - AE Title: IP Settings Remote Archive Setup IP Address: Remote Archive IP: Subnet Mask: Remote Archive Name: Default Gateway: Services (Destination Devices) Device Type Manufacturer Name IP Address Port AE Title 3-24 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Installation Worksheet
[Page 85] Section 3-10 Insite IP Address Configuration This information needed to facilitate the OnLine Center engineers in connecting to the system is found in the InSite Installation Manual. Section 3-11 Loading Base System Software 3-11-1 Loading Base system Software For more information on loading base system software, refer to Chapter 8. Section 3-12 Warnings 3-12-1 Warnings 3-12-1-1 USB HDD External USB type Hard drive may be used to back up the data. But not all kinds of USB type can be supported. Never use USB types which require additional power source. 3-12-1-2 Starting Echoloader in Maintenance mode If Echoloader never started once, starting Echoloader in the maintenance mode will not work. In other words, in order to be able to start Echoloader in maintenace mode, Echoloader should have been started at least once. Section 3-10 - Insite IP Address Configuration 3-25
[Page 86] Section 3-13 Paperwork NOTE: During and after installation, the documentation (i.e. User Manuals, Installation Manuals...) for the peripheral units must be kept as part of the original system documentation. This will ensure that all relevant safety and user information is available during the operation and service of the complete system. 3-13-1 Product Locator Installation NOTE: The Product Locator Installation Card shown may not be same as the provided Product Locator card. Figure 3-16 Product Locator Installation Card 3-13-2 User Manual(s) Check that the correct User Manual(s) for the system and software revision, is included with the installation. Specific language versions of the User Manual may also be available. Check with your GE Sales Representative for availability. 3-13-2-1 Reference off-board peripherals and options None. 3-26 Section 3-13 - Paperwork
[Page 87] Chapter 4 Functional Checks Section 4-1 Overview 4-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 4 This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of the LOGIQ™ P5 scanner diagnostics by using the built-in service software, and power supply adjustments. Table 4-1 Contents in Chapter 4 Section Description Page Number 4-1 Overview 4-1 4-2 Required Equipment 4-1 4-3 General Procedure 4-2 4-4 Software Configuration Checks 4-25 4-5 Peripheral Checks 4-26 4-6 Monitor Function Checks 4-27 4-7 Keyboard Function Checks 4-29 4-8 Mechanical Function Checks 4-34 4-9 Board Function Checks 4-41 4-10 Site Log 4-54 Section 4-2 Required Equipment • An empty (blank) DVD-R or CD-R Disk. • At least one transducer. Section 4-1 - Overview 4-1
[Page 88] Section 4-3 General Procedure CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS Operate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes. NOTICE Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA only) Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the Power Cable on the system. TAG LOCKOUT Signed Date 4-3-1 Power On/Boot Up NOTE: After turning off the system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly. 4-3-1-1 Scanner Power On 1.) Connect the Main Power cable to an appropriate mains power outlet. 2.) Switch ON the Main Circuit Breaker at the rear of the System. Figure 4-1 Circuit Breaker When power is applied to the Scanner, and the Rear Circuit breaker is turned ON, Power is distributed to the DC Power supply unit and power control assy in the AC power assy. When the Power ON/OFF key is pressed once, the DC power supply is enabled and feed each DC power to board assemblies. and system run the software 4-2 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 89] 4-3-1-1 Scanner Power On (cont’d) 3.) Press the ON/OFF key at the front of the System once. Figure 4-2 Power On/Off Standby Switch Location Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4-3
[Page 90] 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly. 4-3-2-1 Scanner Shutdown 1.) Press the On/Off Key at the front of the System once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu. 2.) Select Shutdown from the SYSTEM - EXIT menu. Figure 4-3 System Exit Menu for Power Down 4-3-2-2 Switch off the System 1.) Switch OFF the Circuit Breaker at the back of the scanner. 2.) Unplug the power cord if necessary. For example : Servicing or relocating the scanner. 4-4 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 91] 4-3-3 System Features 4-3-3-1 Control Panel for LOGIQ™ A5 4 8 Figure 4-4 Control Panel Tour LOGIQ™ A5 1.) Power on/off switch 2.) Alpha Numeric key 3.) Patient Key 4.) TGC 5.) Track Ball 6.) Function Select key 7.) Freeze Key 8.) Gain Knob 9.) User Define Key Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4-5
[Page 92] 4-3-3-2 Control Panel for LOGIQ™ A5/LOGIQ™ A5Pro Figure 4-5 Control Panel Tour LOGIQ™ A5/ LOGIQ™ A5Pro 1.) Power on/off switch 2.) Alpha Numeric key 3.) Patient Key 4.) TGC 5.) Track Ball 6.) Function Select key 7.) Freeze Key 8.) Gain Knob 9.) User Define Key NOTE: If the LOGIQ™ A5 have been upgrade with Color Upgrade kit, LOGIQ™ A5 have same keyboard as LOGIQ™ A5. NOTE: LOGIQ™ A5Pro has the same control panel of LOGIQ™ A5, but PW Mode button is not enabled. 4-6 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 93] 4-3-3-3 Monitor Display for LOGIQ™ A5 1 2 3 12 5 13 19 20 21 Figure 4-6 P5 Monitor Display Tour 1. Institution/Hospital Name, Date, Time, 13. Imaging Parameters by Mode. Operator Identification. 14. Focal Zone Indicator. 2. Patient Name, Patient Identification. 15. TGC. 3. Power Output Readout 16. Body Pattern. 4. GE Symbol: Probe Orientation Marker. 17. Depth Scale. 5. Image Preview. 18. Top Menu 6. Gray/Color Bar. 19. Caps Lock: Lit when On. 7. Cine Gauge. 20. Service Interface icon (wrench), iLinq 8. Measurement Summary Window. icon, and system messages display 9. Image. (not shown on image) 10. Measurement Calipers. 21. Trackball Functionality Status: Scroll, 11. Measurement Results Window. M&A (Measurement and Analysis), 12. Probe Identifier. Exam Preset. Position, Size, Scan Area Width and Tilt. 22. Sub Menu Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4-7
[Page 94] 4-3-4 System B/M-Mode Checks For a basic functional check of the system’s different modes, the Quick Guide will familiarize you with image optimization for B-Mode , M-Mode , Color Flow , and Doppler . Table 4-2 B/M-Mode Functions Optimizes image quality and allows user to reduce beam Power Output (Acoustic Power) intensity. 2% increments between 0-100%. Dynamic Range controls how echo intensities are converted to Dynamic Range shades of gray, thereby increasing the adjustable range of contrast. Increases the number of transmit focal zones or moves the focal zone(s) so that you can tighten up the beam for a specific Focus Number and Position area. A graphic caret corresponding to the focal zone position(s) appears on the right edge of the image. Selects a level below which echoes will not be amplified (an Rejection echo must have a certain minimum amplitude before it will be processed). Edge Enhance brings out subtle tissue differences and boundaries by enhancing the gray scale differences Edge Enhance corresponding to the edges of structures. Adjustments to M Mode's edge enhancement affects the M Mode only. Temporal filter that averages frames together. This has the Frame Average effect of presenting a smoother, softer image. Enables gray scale image colorization. To deactivate, reselect Colorize a Gray Map. Determines how the echo intensity levels received are Gray Map presented as shades of gray. Rotation (Up/Down) Rotates the image by selecting the value from the pop up menu. Multi Frequency mode lets you downshift to the probe's next lower Frequency frequency or shift up to a higher frequency. Optimizes B Mode frame rate or spatial resolution for the best Frame Rate/Resolution possible image. Provides intuitive representation of non-quantitative B Flow hemodynamics in vascular structures. Sensitivity/PRI Adjusts the sample rate for the flow signal. Background On lets you view the anatomy roadmap; Background On/Off Background Off lets you view just flow information. Sweep Speed Changes the speed at which the timeline is swept. 4-8 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 95] 4-3-5 System CFM and PWD Checks Table 4-3 CFM and PWD Functions Adjusts the baseline to accommodate faster or slower blood Baseline flows to eliminate aliasing. Velocity scale determines pulse repetition frequency. If the sample volume gate range exceeds single gate PRF capability, PRF/Wall Filter the system automatically switches to high PRF mode. Multiple gates appear, and HPRF is indicated on the display. Estimates the flow velocity in a direction at an angle to the Angle Correct Doppler vector by computing the angle between the Doppler vector and the flow to be measured Threshold assigns the gray scale level at which color Threshold information stops. Allows a specific color map to be selected. After a selection has Map been made, the color bar displays the resultant map. Allows blood flow to be viewed from a different perspective, i.e. Invert red away (negative velocities) and blue toward (positive velocities). The real-time or frozen image can be inverted. Controls the number of samples gathered for a single color flow Packet Size vector. Quick Angle Correct Quickly adjusts the angle by 60 degrees Display layout can be preset to have B-Mode and Time-motion side-by-side or over-under. In the side-by-side layout, there are three display alternatives Doppler Display Formats defined: equal priority, time-motion priority or time-motion with B-Mode reference. In the over-under layout, there are three display alternatives defined: time-motion priority, B Mode priority or equal priority. Sample Volume Gate Length Sizes the sample volume gate Slants the B-Mode or Color Flow linear image left or right to get Scan Area more information without moving the probe Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4-9
[Page 96] 4-3-6 Basic Measurements NOTE: The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press Freeze . 4-3-6-1 Distance and Tissue Depth Measurements 1.) Press MEASURE once an active caliper displays. 2.) To position the active caliper at the start point (distance) or the most anterior point (tissue depth), move the TRACKBALL . 3.) To fix the start point, press Set . The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper. 4.) To position the second active caliper at the end point (distance) or the most posterior point (tissue depth), move the TRACKBALL . 5.) To complete the measurement, press SET . The system displays the distance or tissue depth value in the measurement results window. Before you complete a measurement: To toggle between active calipers, press MEASURE . To erase the second caliper and the current data measured and start the measurement again, press CLEAR once. NOTE: To rotate through and activate previously fixed calipers, turn CURSOR SELECT . NOTE: After you complete the measurement, to erase all data that has been measured to this point, but not data entered onto worksheets, press CLEAR . 4-3-6-2 Circumference/Area (Ellipse) Measurement 1.) Press MEASURE once; an active caliper displays. 2.) To position the active caliper, move the TRACKBALL . 3.) To fix the start point, press SET . The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper. 4.) To position the second caliper, move the TRACKBALL . 5.) Turn the ELLIPSE control; an ellipse with an initial circle shape appears. NOTE: Be careful not to press the Ellipse control as this activates the Body Pattern. 6.) To position the ellipse and to size the measured axes (move the calipers), move the TRACKBALL . 7.) To increase the size, turn the ELLIPSE control in a clockwise direction. To decrease the size, turn the ELLIPSE control in a counterclockwise direction. 8.) To toggle between active calipers, press MEASURE . 9.) To complete the measurement, press SET . The system displays the circumference and area in the measurement results window. Before you complete a measurement: - To erase the ellipse and the current data measured, press CLEAR once. The original caliper is displayed to restart the measurement. - To exit the measurement function without completing the measurement, press CLEAR a second time. 4-10 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 97] 4-3-6-3 Worksheets Measurement/Calculation worksheets are available to display and edit measurements and calculations. There are generic worksheets as well as Application specific worksheets. Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4-11
[Page 98] 4-3-7 Probe/Connectors Usage 4-3-7-1 Connecting a probe 1.) Place the probe's carrying case on a stable surface and open the case. 2.) Carefully remove the probe and unwrap the probe cable. 3.) DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free. Impact to the probe head could result in irreparable damage. 4.) Turn the connector locking handle counterclockwise. 5.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place. 6.) Turn the connector locking handle clockwise to secure the probe connector. 7.) Carefully position the probe cable in the probe cord holder spot so it is free to move, but not resting on the floor. 4-3-7-2 Activating the probe Select the appropriate probe from the probe indicators on the monitor screen. The probe selection screen will be come up when the application key is enabled. The probe activates in the currently-selected operating mode. The probe's default settings for the mode and selected exam are used automatically. 4-3-7-3 Deactivating the probe When deactivating the probe, the probe is automatically placed in standby mode. 1.) Press the Freeze key. 2.) Gently wipe the excess gel from the face of the probe. (refer to the Basic User Manual for complete probe cleaning instructions.) 3.) Carefully slide the probe around the right side of the keyboard, toward the probe holder. Ensure that the probe is placed gently in the probe holder. 4-3-7-4 Disconnecting the probe Probes can be disconnected at any time. However, the probe should not be selected as the active probe. 1.) Move the probe locking handle counterclockwise. Pull the probe and connector straight out of the probe port. 2.) Carefully slide the probe and connector away from the probe port and around the right side of the keyboard. Ensure the cable is free. 3.) Be sure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage box. 4-12 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 99] 4-3-8 Using Cine 4-3-8-1 Activating CINE Press FREEZE , then roll the TRACKBALL to activate CINE. To start CINE Loop playback, press Run/ Stop. To stop CINE Loop playback. press Run/Stop. 4-3-8-2 Quickly Move to Start/End Frame Press FIRST to move to the first CINE frame; press LAST to move to the last CINE frame. 4-3-8-3 Start Frame/End Frame Turn the START FRAME dial to the left to move to the beginning of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial to the right to move forward through the CINE Loop. Turn the END FRAME dial to the right to move to the end of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial to the left to move backward through the CINE Loop. 4-3-8-4 Adjusting the CINE Loop Playback Speed Turn the LOOP SPEED dial right/left to increase/decrease the CINE Loop playback speed. 4-3-8-5 Disconnecting B-Mode CINE from Timeline CINE To review the B-Mode CINE Loop only, press CINE MODE SELECTION and select B ONLY. To review the Timeline CINE Loop only, press CINE MODE SELECTION and select TL ONLY. To return to linked B-Mode and Timeline CINE Loop review, press CINE MODE SELECTION and select B/TL. 4-3-8-6 Moving through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame Turn FRAME BY FRAME to move through CINE memory one frame at a time. Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4-13
[Page 100] 4-3-9 Image Management (QG) For Image Management functionality refer to the LOGIQ™ P5 Quick Guide. It talks about several topics: • Clipboard • Printing Images • Browsing and Managing an Exam’s Stored Image • Connectivity, and Dataflow Concept and Creation • Starting an Exam • Configuring Connectivity • TCP/IP • Services (Destinations) • Buttons • Views Verifying and Pinging a Device 4-14 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 101] 4-3-10 Using the DVD-R 4-3-10-1 Using the DVD-R NOTICE Never move the unit with a disk in the DVD-R because the drive actuator will not be locked and the DVD-R could break. 1.) Go to the Utility->Connectivity->Removable Media. 2.) Insert CD/DVD media. 3.) Press Verify 4.) The properties will be like below. a.) Capacity, Free space depends on media type. b.) Formatted / Finalized : No Figure 4-7 Removable Media 5.) Go to Patient. 6.) Press Data Transfer (located at the upper-left side of Patient screen) 7.) Select Export task. Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4-15
[Page 102] 8.) Select the type of Removable CD/DVD on the [To] combo box. 9.) It will do auto-formatting. Figure 4-8 Formatting 10.)After auto-formatting, select some patients on the upper list area and then press the [Transfer] button. 11.)it will do transferring to CD/DVD. Figure 4-9 Transferring 4-16 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 103] 12.)The selected data is transferred correctly. Figure 4-10 Transfer 13.)Press F3 and select the [Yes and Verify files]. 14.)It will do finalizing. Figure 4-11 Finalizing Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4-17
[Page 104] 15.)It will do Verifying. Figure 4-12 Verifying 16.)It will eject the CD/DVD and Go to Utility and reinsert the CD/DVD. 17.)Go to Utility->Connectivity->Removable Media. Figure 4-13 Removable Media 18.)Press Verify 19.)The properties will be like below. a.) Capacity is the size of transferred data. b.) Free space is 0. c.) Formatted / Database Present / Finalized : Yes (DICOMDIR Present : depends on setting) NOTICE Avoid mechanical ejection whenever possible. Mechanical ejection leaves the actuator unlocked. If forced to use this method, reboot the system, then insert and eject a known good disk using one of the other methods. 4-18 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 105] 4-3-11 Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images NOTE: When upgrading from R1.0.x or R2.0.x to R3.0.x or R4.0.x ,preset cannot be transferred. Refer to the table below. Table 4-4 LP5 BT11(R4.x.x) compatibility Compatibility Preset R1.x.x R2.x.x R3.x.x Patient Archive Yes Yes Yes Report Archive Yes Yes Yes Imaging Presets No No Yes Connectivity Configuration No No Yes Measurement Configuration No No Yes Comment/Body Pattern Libraries No No Yes Report Templates (Same Software Version Only) No No No 3D/4D No No Yes Key Macro No No Yes All Others No No Yes 4-3-11-1 Formatting Media 1.) To format the backup media, CD-R or DVD-R, select the UTILITY key on the Front Panel. 2.) Select CONNECTIVITY, then RERNOVABLE MEDIA. Properly label and Insert the backup media. 3.) Select the media type from the drop down menu. 4.) Enter the label for the media as shown in Figure 4-14. It is best to use all capital letters with no Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4-19
[Page 106] spaces or punctuation marks. Media Verify Format Selection Format Media Label Figure 4-14 Format and Verify Media 5.) The Ultrasound system displays a pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 4-15. When the formatting has been completed, press OK to continue. 6.) If desired, verify that the format was successful by returning to Utility > Connectivity > Removable Media and selecting VERIFY as shown in Figure 4-12. Figure 4-15 Format Successful Pop-up Menu 4-20 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 107] 4-3-11-2 Backup System Presets and Configurations NOTE: Always backup any preset configurations before a software reload. This ensures that if the presets need to be reloaded, after the software update, they will be the same ones the customer was using prior to service. 1.) Insert a formatted CD-R or DVD-R into the drive. 2.) Press UTILITY key 3.) Select SYSTEM. on the monitor screen 4.) On the monitor display, select BACKUP/RESTORE. 5.) In the Backup list, select Patient Archive, Report Archive, User Defined Configuration. 6.) In the Media field, select DVD-R. 7.) Select BACKUP. The system performs the backup. As it proceeds, status information is displayed on the Backup/Restore screen. Check here to backup presets and configurations Figure 4-16 Backup/Restore Menu Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4-21
[Page 108] 4-3-11-3 Restore System Presets and Configurations The restore procedure overwrites the existing database on the local hard drive. Make sure to insert the correct CD-R or DVD-R. 1.) Insert the Backup/Restore CD-R or DVD-R into the drive. 2.) Press the UTILITY. key 3.) Select SYSTEM.menu on the monitor screen 4.) On the monitor display, select BACKUP/RESTORE. 5.) In the Restore list, select Patient Archive, Report Archive, User Defined Configuration. 6.) In the Media field, select the Backup/Restore DVD-R. 7.) Select RESTORE. d.) The system performs the restore. As it proceeds, status information is displayed on the Backup/Restore screen. Figure 4-17 Backup/Restore Menu 4-22 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 109] 4-3-11-4 Archiving Images To export an exam(s) to a compatible Ultrasound system: 1.) Format the removable media (CD-ROM/DVD-R). Label the removable media. Answer Yes/OK to the messages.Press Patient. Deselect any selected patient(s) in the search portion of the Patient screen. Press Exam Data Transfer (located at the upper, left-hand corner of the Patient menu). Figure 4-18 Exam Data Transfer 2.) Select Export task Button. Figure 4-19 Task button 3.) The [From] combo box is not active. It displays Local Archive. The [To] combo box is active. Select the type of removable media CD R/DVD-R. Then please wait until the patient list is visible. Figure 4-20 To Combo Box Section 4-3 - General Procedure 4-23
[Page 110] 4-3-11-4 Archiving Images (cont’d) 4.) In the patient list at the top of the Patient menu, select the patient(s) you want to export. You can use Windows commands to select more than one patient. To select a consecutive list of patients, click the cursor on the first name, move the cursor to the last name, then press and hold down the Shift+right Set key to select all the names. To select a non-consecutive list of patients, click the cursor at the first name, move the cursor to the next name, then press and hold down the Ctrl+right Set key, move the cursor to the next name, then press and hold down the Ctrl+right Set key again, etc. You can also search for patients via the Search key and string. Or, Select All Button from the Patient Menu: Figure 4-21 Source Section NOTE: You need to use your best judgment when moving patients' images. If there are lots of images or loops, then only move a few patients at a time. 5.) Once you have selected all of the patients to export, press Transfer Button as shown in Figure 4-18 from the Patient Menu. 6.) The progress bar appears as the copy is taking place. Once transfer completed, the exported patient list will be shown as Figure 4-22. Figure 4-22 Destination Section of Patient Screen 7.) Press F3 to eject the media. Specify that you want to finalize the CD-ROM. 4-24 Section 4-3 - General Procedure
[Page 111] 4-3-12 ECG Check Out Connect the ECG Harness and check: Table 4-5 ECG Harness Check Step Task to do Expected Result(s) Connect the ECG at the Connector on the Front of the It will display a curve along the bottom edge of the image 1. scanner. sector Section 4-4 Software Configuration Checks Table 4-6 Software Configuration Checks Step Task to do Expected Result(s) 1. Check Date and Time setting Date and Time are correct 2. Check that Location (Hospital Name) is correct Location Name is correct 3. Check Language settings Desired Language is displayed 4. Print1, 2 Keys and User define Keys are assigned as Check assignment of Printer Keys and User Define Keys desired by the customer 5. Check that all of the customer’s options are set up correct All authorized functions are enabled Section 4-4 - Software Configuration Checks 4-25
[Page 112] Section 4-5 Peripheral Checks Check that peripherals work as described below: Table 4-7 Peripheral Checks Step Task to do Expected Result(s) 1. Press ( FREEZE ) Stop image acquisition. The image displayed on the screen is printed on B&W or Color printer, 2. Press ( P1 ) or ( P2 ) on the Keyboard depending on the key assignment configuration 3. Press RECORD on the Keyboard. To start the video counter at a different point: 4. Press UPDATE MENU in the Trackball area. The Video Set Counter / Search Dialog window is displayed Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter 5. Number appears the counter number in the counter field. 6. Press SET COUNTER to save the change. Number is saved 7. Press RECORD on the KEYBOARD to return to the scanning mode to Start Recording 8. Press REC/PAUSE icon on the screen A red dot is displayed in the VCR status area on the Title bar to indicate that recording has begun To Stop recording 9. Press REC/PAUSE icon on the screen. The video status icon is changed to (Pause) Press RECORD on the KEYBOARD and the 10. To start, Play back an examination assignable play to perform actions on the recorded session, such as stop, pause, rewind Use the Assignable keys on the Control 11. or fast forward. Panel The video status icon in updated accordingly. While in playback mode, use the 12. TRACKBALL to adjust the video playback To search on the tape speed and scroll through the record. 13. Press the assignable PAUSE to stop the tape at the desired frame. part of it can be stored on the computer’s memory as a cineloop.The 14. When playing back an examination cineloop enables the user to perform further operations on the stored section (see for further information on cineloop operation). Press ( FREEZE ) while playing back a To store a recorded sequence as a cineloop. The last few seconds are 15. recorded session. stored as a cineloop. 4-26 Section 4-5 - Peripheral Checks
[Page 113] Section 4-6Monitor Function Checks 4-6-1 15" LCDMON II Assy & LCD Panel with filter Function Validation Procedure 2.) Select "Utility Key” on the Key board and then choose “Test Pattern” and “Resolution” marked in the figure below. Figure 4-23 15” LCDMON Assy Function Check 3.) All the Numbers from 0 to 100 on the figure above should be easily distinguished. Section 4-6 - Monitor Function Checks 4-27
[Page 114] 4-6-2 15" OSD Key Assy Function Validation Procedure 2.) Select “OSD Button” and “Lamp Button” marked below in the figure below. OSD button for Lamp Button menu display Figure 4-24 Select OSD Button & Lamp Button 3.) OSD Menu should be displayed within 5sec and the Lamp should be turned on as soon as Lamp Button is pushed. 4.) Select “OSD Button” marked below in the figure below and check that contrast value is changed as soon as the button pushed. OSD button for adjusting values Figure 4-25 Select OSD Button 5) Displayed value should be changed as soon as the button pushed. 4-28 Section 4-6 - Monitor Function Checks
[Page 115] Section 4-7Keyboard Function Checks 4-7-1 Main Keyboard Assy Function Validation Procedure 1.) Boot up the system. 2.) Insert the Service Dongle and go to the maintenance mode. 3.) Click 'Start' and go to 'Run'. Figure 4-26 Start and run 4.) Click the Run and then you can get the 'Run' dialog box. 5.) Write the 'cmd 'command into 'Run' dialog box and press 'OK' button to display command prompt. Figure 4-27 Run dialog box Figure 4-28 command prompt Section 4-7 - Keyboard Function Checks 4-29
[Page 116] 4-7-1 Main Keyboard Assy Function Validation Procedure (cont’d) 6.) Write the 'scfpapitest.exe' on the command prompt and press 'Enter' button to pop up the scfpapitest program. Figure 4-29 scfpapitest program 7.) Press the keyboard button and rotate rotary button. When you press or rotary keys, Log dialog box displays the key log. Button name and displaying log name is like the table. Table 4-8 Button and Rotaty Table Button or Rotary Name The Name displayed in Log Button or Rotary Name The Name displayed in Log Patient New Patient Button Active Mode Active Mode Button Probe/Preset Probe Button CF CFM PushEncoder Button Report Report Button PDI PDI Button End Exam End Exam Button Dept (Button) Depth PushEncoder Button Record Record button Dept (Rotary) Depth PushEncoder Rotary P1 Print or record button1 PW PWD PushEncoder Button P2 Print or record button2 CW CW Button Reverse Reverse Button M M Mode PushEncoder Userdefine 1 Userdefine 1 Button Scan Area ScanArea Button Userdefine 2 Userdefine 2 Button M/D Cursor MD Cursor Button Userdefine 3 Userdefine 3 Button Zoom (Button) Zoom/Size PushEncoder Button Userdefine 4 Userdefine 4 Button Zoom (Rotary) Zoom/Size PushEncoder Rotary Userdefine 5 Userdefine 5 Button Measure Measure Button BodyPattern/Ellipse PushEncoder L (Left) Left Button BodyPattern/Ellipse (Button) Button 4-30 Section 4-7 - Keyboard Function Checks
[Page 117] Table 4-8 Button and Rotaty Table Button or Rotary Name The Name displayed in Log Button or Rotary Name The Name displayed in Log BodyPattern/Ellipse PushEncoder R (Right) Right Button BodyPattern/Ellipse (Rotary Rotary THI Harmonics Button Comment comment Button AO Auto Right Button Clear Clear Button B (Button) B PushEncoder Button TGC Slide Slider : n=8 s1 ~ s8 B (Rotary) B PushEncoder Rotary NOTICE When you can check the name displayed in log as you press or rotate keys, the main keyboard assy was replaced correctly. 8.) Check the 'Fast' radio button into Indicator box on scfpapitest program and press 'Set All' button. Figure 4-30 Fast button NOTICE After pressing Fast radio button, indicators should be blanked on the frontpanel. Section 4-7 - Keyboard Function Checks 4-31
[Page 118] 4-7-2 Sub Keyboard Assy Function Validation Procedure 1.) Boot up the system and run the scfpapitest program. NOTICE Follow up the procedure 4-7-1 "Main Keyboard Assy Function Validation Procedure" on page 4-29 to run the scfpapitest program. 2.) Press and Rotary sub keyboard, and Paddle (up/down, right/left) button. 3.) Check the log dialog box in scfpapitest program Table 4-9 Button and Rotary Table Button or Rotary Name The Name displayed in Log 1 (Button/Rotary) PushEncoder 1 of Touchpanel Button/Rotary 2 (Button/Rotary) PushEncoder 2 of Touchpanel Button/Rotary 3 (Button/Rotary) PushEncoder 3 of Touchpanel Button/Rotary 4 (Button/Rotary) PushEncoder 4 of Touchpanel Button/Rotary 5 (Button/Rotary) PushEncoder 5 of Touchpanel Button/Rotary Up Paddle Up Button Down Paddle Down Button Left Paddle Left Button Right Paddle Right Button 4-7-3 Trackball Assy validation 1.) Boot up the system. 2.) Press the measurement button. 3.) Move the Trackball. When you move the trackball in measurement mode, the cursor should be moved. 4-7-4 A/N Key assy validation 1.) Boot up the system. 2.) Press 'Comment' button. 3.) Press A/N keyboard. Each key should be displayed on the monitor display. 4-7-5 Freeze key validation 1.) Follow up the procedure 4-7-1 "Main Keyboard Assy Function Validation Procedure" on page 4-29 to run the scfpapitest program. 2.) Press Freeze button and check up the Log dialog box if the freeze key was release. NOTICE After pressing Freeze button, Freeze button message should be displayed into Log dialogbox on scfpapitest program. 4-32 Section 4-7 - Keyboard Function Checks
[Page 119] 4-7-6 TGC key assay / TGC Knob Set validation 1.) Follow up the procedure 4-7-1 "Main Keyboard Assy Function Validation Procedure" on page 4-29 to run the scfpapitest program. 2.) Slide TGC pot and check up the value. NOTICE While sliding TGC pot, TGC message should be displayed. 4-7-7 Sub Keyboard Encoder Knob Set validation Follow up 4-7-2 "Sub Keyboard Assy Function Validation Procedure" on page 4-32. Section 4-7 - Keyboard Function Checks 4-33
[Page 120] Section 4-8Mechanical Function Checks 4-8-1 Cover Parts Function Validation Table 4-10 Cover parts of the FRU No Item 1 Right and Left cover 2 Front cover 3 Rear cover 4 Middle cover 5 Top cover 6 Top bottom cover 7 Pole cover 8 Neck front cover 9 Neck rear cover 10 Dummy cover L/R 11 EMI cover L/R 12 LCD Std Arm with cover 13 Rear handle 14 Rear hook 15 ECG cable hook 16 Cable Arm hook 17 LP5/LA5 Monitor Cover set • Check if the FRU parts are assembled tightly by naked eye and hands. • Check if there are dents, scratches, or cracks on the FRU parts. • Check if screws are in place. 4-34 Section 4-8 - Mechanical Function Checks
[Page 121] 4-8-2 LCD plastic filter Function Validation Procedure Check if LCD plastic filter is fastened so that it won't move. Figure 4-31 Check the LCD Plastic Filter 4-8-3 Air filter set Function Validation Procedure Check if the air filter is placed deep inside. Figure 4-32 Check the air filter Section 4-8 - Mechanical Function Checks 4-35
[Page 122] 4-8-4 TGC key assy/TGC Knob Set, Sub keyboard encoder Knob Set, Keycap set, Main Keyboard Encoder Knob set Function Validation Procedure • Check if the each button operates properly. • Check if encoder knobs are in the center. • Check if the keycap set can not be removed easily. Figure 4-33 Check the each button 4-36 Section 4-8 - Mechanical Function Checks
[Page 123] 4-8-5 Cup holder Function Validation Procedure Check if the cup holder can not be removed easily. Figure 4-34 Check the cup holder Section 4-8 - Mechanical Function Checks 4-37
[Page 124] 4-8-6 Front caster/Rear caster Function Validation Procedure • In case of Bi break caster, check all caster locks and caster swivel locks for proper operation. • In case of front caster, check caster locks for proper operation. • In case of rear caster, check caster's motion for proper operation. • Check if screws are in place. Figure 4-35 Check the caster 4-38 Section 4-8 - Mechanical Function Checks
[Page 125] 4-8-7 Probe holder Function Validation Procedure Check if the probe holders are assembled tightly by naked eye and hands. Check if the probe holder can not be removed easily. Figure 4-36 Check the probe holder Section 4-8 - Mechanical Function Checks 4-39
[Page 126] 4-8-8 Flexible LCD Arm Function Validation Procedure • Check if the flexible arm operates properly.(Up-down, rotation and tilting mechanism) • Check if the flexible arm cover parts can not be removed easily.Check if the lock operates properly. Figure 4-37 Check the Flexible LCD Arm 4-40 Section 4-8 - Mechanical Function Checks
[Page 127] Section 4-9Board Function Checks 4-9-1 CL1TRX Assy / BL1TRX Assy Function Validation Procedure WARNING WARNING When Service Login for FRU Diagnostic, scan mode must be B-mode. After Diagnostic is completed, the system should be rebooted. WARNING WARNING Diagnostics should be performed with probes which have 128 or more elements. 1.) Turn on the system and check the completion of Echoloader loading. 2.) Do the Service Login. Refer to the 5-10-2-2 "Service Login" on page 5-41. 3.) Select 'Diagnostics' => 'LOGIQ P5 Diagnostics' => 'FRU Test' => 'CL1TRX Assy / BL1TRX overall'. 4.) Execute the diagnostic test. 5.) 5)All diagnostic test item of CL1TRX Assy / BL1TRX should be passed. Figure 4-38 CL1TRX Diagnostic test 6.) Shut down the system. 7.) Restart the system 8.) Check the basic function of system's different modes. Refer to 4-3-4 "System B/M-Mode Checks" on page 4-8 and refer to 4-3-5 "System CFM and PWD Checks" on page 4-9. Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks 4-41
[Page 128] 4-9-2 ACWD Assy Function Validation Procedure 1.) Insert the Sector probe in probe port. 2.) Turn on the system. 3.) Press Virtual Convex button to enable Virtual Convex if not already enabled. Figure 4-39 Virtual Convex Enabled Figure 4-40 Virtual Convex 4-42 Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks
[Page 129] 4.) Press “CW” button to start CWD Mode. Figure 4-41 CW mode 5.) Scan in CWD mode (with Virtual Convex enabled). 6.) Press “B” button to scan in “B” mode. 7.) Press Virtual Convex button to disable Virtual Convex if not already disabled. Figure 4-42 Virtual Convex Disabled. 8.) Press “CW” button to start CWD Mode. 9.) Scan in CWD mode (with Virtual Convex disabled) 10.)Compare the CWD (with Virtual Convex enabled) sensitivity and CWD (with Virtual Convex disabled). 11.)Pass if two modes have the same sensitivity. 12.)Do the service login. Refer to 5-10-2-2 "Service Login" on page 5-41. 13.)Select “Diagnostics” => “LOGIQ P5 Diagnostics” => “FRU Test”. 14.)Select “ACWD” => “ACWD Overall” 15.)After All diagnostic function check of ACWD should be Passed. Refer to Table 7-5, “FRU Test, Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks 4-43
[Page 130] ACWD Diagnostics Menu,” on page 18.Reboot up the system. Figure 4-43 ACWD Diagnostic Test 16.)Reboot up the system. 17.)Insert Probe in Probe port (Sector or Pencil Probe). 18.)After system boot up, enter the CWD mode. 19.)Check the display Image. Refer to Section 10-5 "System Maintenance" on page 10-7 and 4-3-5 "System CFM and PWD Checks" on page 4-9. 4-44 Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks
[Page 131] 4-9-3 Probe Assessment Diagnostic Test Validation Procedure NOTE: This diagnostic test does not represent the result as Passed or Failed. 1.) Clean probe surface that you want to assess and connect the probe to the 1st probe slot of the system. 2.) Turn on the system and check the completion of Echoloader loading. 3.) Do the Service Login. 4.) Select 'Diagnostics' => 'LOGIQ P5 Diagnostics' => 'FRU Test' => 'Probe' => 'Probe Assesement'. 5.) Execute the diagnostic test. 6.) The test shows bar-graph designating the signal strength of each of the testing probe's elements including the probe code, name and the number of elements. Figure 4-44 Probe Assessment Diagnostic Test Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks 4-45
[Page 132] 4-9-3 Probe Assessment Diagnostic Test Validation Procedure (cont’d) 7.) If the test is executed without probe connection, the test shows the following result. Figure 4-45 Probe Assessment Diagnostic Test 8.) After finishing the test, shut down the system. 4-46 Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks
[Page 133] 4-9-4 SYSCONML Assy Function Validation Procedure 4-9-4-1 L1SYSCON diagnostic Test 1.) Turn on the system and check the completion of echoloader loading. 2.) Do the Service Login. Refer to 5-10-2-2 "Service Login" on page 5-41. 3.) Select 'Diagnostics' => 'LOGIQ P5 Diagnostics' => 'FRU test' => 'L1SYSCON' => 'L1SYSCON Overall'. 4.) Execute the diagnostic test. 5.) All diagnostic test item of L1SYSCON should be passed. Figure 4-46 L2SYSCON Diagnostic Test 6.) Shut down the system. 7.) Restart the system 8.) Check the basic function of system's different modes. Refer to 4-3-4 "System B/M-Mode Checks" on page 4-8 and refer to 4-3-5 "System CFM and PWD Checks" on page 4-9. 4-9-4-2 Peripheral Test Refer to Section 4-5 "Peripheral Checks" on page 4-26. Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks 4-47
[Page 134] 4-9-5 APS/APS Pro Assy PCB Function Validation Procedure NOTE: HVL+ and HVL- are not available for APS PRO. 2.) Do the Service Login. Refer to 5-10-2-2 "Service Login" on page 5-41. 3.) Select 'Diagnostics' => 'LOGIQ P5 Diagnostics' => 'FRU test' => 'APS' => 'APS Overall'. 4.) Execute the diagnostic test. 5.) All diagnostic test item of APS/APS Pro should be passed. Figure 4-47 APS/APS Pro Diagnostic Test 6.) Shut down the system. 7.) Restart the system 4-48 Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks
[Page 135] 4-9-6 P3RLY,P2RLY and P2RLY with Dummy Assy function check procedure 2.) After completion of echoloader loading, connect probe on port 1. Refer to 4-3-7-1 "Connecting a probe" on page 4-12. 3.) Log into “Service Login”. Refer to 5-10-2-2 "Service Login" on page 5-41. 4.) Click “Diagnostics” on top menu. 5.) On left folder window, select 'LOGIQ P5 Diagnostics' => 'FRU test' => 'P3RLY' 6.) Select 'P3RLY Overall' and execute test 7.) All diagnostic test items must be passed. Figure 4-48 P3RLY diagnostic test 8.) Shut down the system. 9.) Restart the system 10.)Activate probe. Refer to 4-3-7-2 "Activating the probe" on page 4-12. 11.)Check the system basic functions. Refer to 4-3-4 "System B/M-Mode Checks" on page 4-8 and refer to 4-3-5 "System CFM and PWD Checks" on page 4-9. - For LA5 system, omit CFM test 12.)Disconnect probe. Refer to 4-3-7-4 "Disconnecting the probe" on page 4-12. 13.)Connect probe on port 2 and repeat step 8) ~ 10) 14.)Connect probe on port 3 and repeat step 8) ~ 10) - For LA5 system, omit port 3 test 15.)All basic functions must show correct operation as described. Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks 4-49
[Page 136] 4-9-7 SOM Function Validation Procedure 2.) Press the 'del' key in A/N key within 3 sec. to enter BIOS setting mode. 3.) Set the system time and the system Date. 4.) Check the SOM version (HW version & BIOS version) 3.) 4.) BIOS version 4.)HW version Figure 4-49 Set the system time and the system Date and Check SOM version on BIOS setting mode 5.) Press the 'F10' key to save configuration changes and exit bios mode. The system will restart. 6.) Check the basic function of system's different modes. Refer to 4-3-4 "System B/M-Mode Checks" on page 4-8 and refer to 4-3-5 "System CFM and PWD Checks" on page 4-9. 4-9-8 ASIG Assy Function Validation Procedure 1.) Turn on the system 2.) Check the basic function of system's different modes. Refer to 4-3-4 "System B/M-Mode Checks" on page 4-8 and Refer to Section 10-5 "System Maintenance" on page 10-7. 4-50 Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks
[Page 137] 4-9-9 BackPlane Assy Function Validation Procedure 1.) Turn on the system 2.) All of attached ASSY should be tested. 3.) Refer to the 4-9-4 "SYSCONML Assy Function Validation Procedure" on page 4-47. 4.) Refer to the 4-9-7 "SOM Function Validation Procedure" on page 4-50. 5.) Refer to the 4-9-1 "CL1TRX Assy / BL1TRX Assy Function Validation Procedure" on page 4-41. 6.) Refer to the 4-9-6 "P3RLY,P2RLY and P2RLY with Dummy Assy function check procedure" on page 4-49. 7.) Refer to 4-9-5 "APS/APS Pro Assy PCB Function Validation Procedure" on page 4-48. 8.) Refer to 4-9-2 "ACWD Assy Function Validation Procedure" on page 4-42.(Optional) Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks 4-51
[Page 138] 4-9-10 Nest fan Function Validation Procedure 1.) After replace Nest fan assy, turn on the system. Refer to 3-5-1 "Power On/Boot Up" on page 3-11. 2.) Confirm the fan rotating with naked eye and check the fan operating by rotating sound. No strange sound should be heard. Figure 4-50 Checking Nest fan rotating NOTE: Do not close the right EMI bracket and right plastic cover before check the fan operation. 4-9-11 Transbox Function Validation Procedure 1.) Turn on the system. Refer to 3-5-1 "Power On/Boot Up" on page 3-11 for power up sequence to check Transbox Assy function. The system must show correct operation as described on sequence. 2.) Check the peripheral operation. Refer to Section 4-5 "Peripheral Checks" on page 4-26 to confirm the peripheral operation. All peripheral must work correctly as described Section 4-5. 4-9-12 ACPC Assy set Function Validation Procedure 1.) Turn on the system. Refer to 3-5-1 "Power On/Boot Up" on page 3-11 for power up sequence to check Transbox Assy function. The system must show correct operation as described on sequence. 2.) Check the peripheral operation. Refer to Section 4-5 "Peripheral Checks" on page 4-26 to confirm the peripheral operation. All peripheral must work correctly as described Section 4-5. 4-52 Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks
[Page 139] 4-9-13 Transbox Assy Function Validation Procedure 1.) Turn on the system. Refer to 3-5-1 "Power On/Boot Up" on page 3-11 for power up sequence to check AP950 Assy function. The system must show correct operation as described on sequence. 2)Check the peripheral operation. Refer to Section 4-5 "Peripheral Checks" on page 4-26 to confirm the peripheral operation. All peripheral must work correctly as described Section 4-5. 4-9-14 Fuse set Function Validation Procedure 1.) Turn on the system. Refer to 3-5-1 "Power On/Boot Up" on page 3-11 for power up sequence to check Transbox Assy function. The system must show correct operation as described on sequence. 2.) Check the peripheral operation. Refer to Section 4-5 "Peripheral Checks" on page 4-26 to confirm the peripheral operation. All peripheral must work correctly as described Section 4-5. 4-9-15 ARP Assy Function Validation Procedure 1.) ARP Assy function can be validated by the result of 'Peripheral Test'. Once ARP Assy is replaced, do peripheral test in order to confirm the successful installation. Refer to the Section 4-5 "Peripheral Checks" on page 4-26. 4-9-16 ASIG ASSY Function Validation Procedure 1.) Turn on the system. R 2.) Check the basic function of system's different modes. Refer to 4-3-4 "System B/M-Mode Checks" on page 4-8 and Refer to 10-5-2-1 "System Checks" on page 10-8. Section 4-9 - Board Function Checks 4-53
[Page 140] Section 4-10 Site Log Table 4-11 Site Log Date Service person Problem Comments 4-54 Section 4-10 - Site Log
[Page 141] Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) Section 5-1 Overview 5-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 5 This chapter explains system concepts, component arrangement, and subsystem function of LOGIQ™ P5 and LOGIQ™ A5. It also describes the Power Distribution System (PDS) and probes. Table 5-1 Contents in Chapter 5 Section Description Page Number 5-1 Overview 5-1 5-2 General Information 5-2 5-3 Block Diagram 5-3 5-4 Main Board Detail 5-9 5-5 Top Console 5-26 5-6 ARP (Rear Panel) 5-30 5-7 Power Diagrams 5-32 5-8 Cable Connection 5-35 5-9 Filters 5-39 5-10 Service Platform 5-40 5-11 RFS (Service For Request) 5-52 5-12 Machine RFS 5-56 5-13 Fast Polling 5-59 Section 5-1 - Overview 5-1
[Page 142] Section 5-2 General Information LOGIQ™ P5/A5/A5Pro is a phased and linear array ultrasound imaging scanner. It has provisions for analog input sources like ECG. A Doppler probe may also be connected and used. The LOGIQ™ P5 can be used for: - 2D Gray Scale and 2D Color Flow Imaging - M-Mode Gray Scale Imaging - Color M-Mode - Doppler - Different combinations of the above modes - 4D(Optional) And the LOGIQ™ A5 can be used for: - 2D Gray Scale Imaging - M-Mode Gray Scale Imaging - Doppler - Different combinations of the above modes - 2D Color Flow Imaging(Optional) LOGIQ™ P5 and LOGIQ™ A5 is a digital beamforming system. Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End Electronics, to the Back-End Processor, and finally displayed on the monitor and peripherals. System configuration is stored on the hard drive and all necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up. Monitor Speaker Keyboard DVD R Drive Figure 5-1 LOGIQ™ P5/A5/A5Pro Major Components 5-2 Section 5-2 - General Information
[Page 143] Section 5-3 Block Diagram 5-3-1 LOGIQ™ P5 Block Diagram AS AS AS IGASSY IGASSY IGASSY A A A P3R P3R P3R LYASSY LYASSY LYASSY C C C L1TRXASSY L1TRXASSY L1TRXASSY P P P robePort robePort robePort #1 #1 #1 ASIGC ASIGC ASIGC C C C TXASSY TXASSY TXASSY R R R H H H Vdriver Vdriver Vdriver X16 X16 X16 TPG TPG TPG 2 2 2 onnection onnection onnection E E E M M M P P P robePort robePort robePort #2 #2 #2 L L L U U U A A A X X X H H H Vdriver Vdriver Vdriver X16 X16 X16 TPG TPG TPG 2 2 2 Y Y Y P P P robePort robePort robePort #3 #3 #3 H H H Vdriver Vdriver Vdriver X16 X16 X16 TPG TPG TPG 2 2 2 R R R ELAYC ELAYC ELAYC ontrol ontrol ontrol H H H Vdriver Vdriver Vdriver X16 X16 X16 TPG TPG TPG 2 2 2 32chtoAC 32chtoAC 32chtoAC W W W D D D L1BFCA L1BFCA L1BFCA SSY SSY SSY PG PG PG CfromSY CfromSY CfromSY SC SC SC O O O N N N PM PM PM T T T R R R BC BC BC fpga fpga fpga LN LN LN A A A AD AD AD C10bits C10bits C10bits O O O Q Q Q X X X 2 2 2 R R R VC VC VC A A A SD SD SD R R R AM AM AM ASIGconnection ASIGconnection ASIGconnection LN LN LN A A A AD AD AD C10bits C10bits C10bits for for for R R R VC VC VC A A A O O O Q Q Q x2&TPG x2&TPG x2&TPG 2 2 2 LN LN LN A A A AD AD AD C10bits C10bits C10bits R R R VC VC VC A A A O O O Q Q Q X X X 2 2 2 LN LN LN A A A AD AD AD C10bits C10bits C10bits R R R VC VC VC A A A O O O Q Q Q X X X 2 2 2 LN LN LN A A A AD AD AD C10bits C10bits C10bits O O O Q Q Q X X X 2 2 2 R R R VC VC VC A A A R R R FD FD FD atatoSY atatoSY atatoSY SC SC SC O O O N N N PM PM PM FE FE FE BU BU BU SconnectedtoSY SconnectedtoSY SconnectedtoSY SC SC SC O O O N N N PM PM PM B B D D D CPO CPO CPO W W W ERfromAPS ERfromAPS ERfromAPS Figure 5-2 LOGIQ™ P5 System Block Diagram Section 5-3 - Block Diagram 5-3
[Page 144] 5-3-1 LOGIQ™ P5 Block Diagram (cont’d) A A A A A ASIGASSY ASIGASSY ASIGASSY ASIGASSY ASIGASSY ASIGASSY ASIGASSY FromTRANSBO FromTRANSBO FromTRANSBO FromTRANSBO FromTRANSBO FromTRANSBO FromTRANSBO X X X X X X X AR AR AR AR AR AR AR PASSY PASSY PASSY PASSY PASSY PASSY PASSY APSASSY APSASSY APSASSY APSASSY APSASSY APSASSY APSASSY D D D D D D D C C C C C C C W W W W W W W Dconn Dconn Dconn Dconn Dconn Dconn Dconn LANC LANC LANC LANC LANC LANC LANC onn onn onn onn onn onn onn (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) C C C C C C C ircuit Breaker ircuit Breaker ircuit Breaker ircuit Breaker ircuit Breaker ircuit Breaker ircuit Breaker I/F&C I/F&C I/F&C I/F&C I/F&C I/F&C I/F&C ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol for for for for for for for AC AC AC AC AC AC AC Video Video Video Video Video Video Video In/O In/O In/O In/O In/O In/O In/O ut ut ut ut ut ut ut LVblock LVblock LVblock LVblock LVblock LVblock LVblock H H H H H H H Vblock Vblock Vblock Vblock Vblock Vblock Vblock ACO ACO ACO ACO ACO ACO ACO utlet utlet utlet utlet utlet utlet utlet VG VG VG VG VG VG VG AConn AConn AConn AConn AConn AConn AConn D3.3 D3.3 D3.3 D3.3 D3.3 D3.3 D3.3 V V V V V V V U U U U U U U SBconnx SBconnx SBconnx SBconnx SBconnx SBconnx SBconnx 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 D5.0 D5.0 D5.0 D5.0 D5.0 D5.0 D5.0 V V V V V V V SHVP(+80) SHVP(+80) SHVP(+80) SHVP(+80) SHVP(+80) SHVP(+80) SHVP(+80) D D D D D D D 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 V V V V V V V SH SH SH SH SH SH SH VM VM VM VM VM VM VM ( ( ( ( ( ( ( - 80) - 80) - 80) - 80) - 80) - 80) - 80) SO SO SO SO SO SO SO U U U U U U U N N N N N N N DIn/O DIn/O DIn/O DIn/O DIn/O DIn/O DIn/O ut ut ut ut ut ut ut A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 P P P P P P P TH TH TH TH TH TH TH VH VH VH VH VH VH VH P(0~60) P(0~60) P(0~60) P(0~60) P(0~60) P(0~60) P(0~60) AC AC AC AC AC AC AC W W W W W W W DASSY DASSY DASSY DASSY DASSY DASSY DASSY A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 M M M M M M M THVHM THVHM THVHM THVHM THVHM THVHM THVHM ( ( ( ( ( ( ( -60~0) -60~0) -60~0) -60~0) -60~0) -60~0) -60~0) USBH USBH USBH USBH USBH USBH USBH U U U U U U U B B B B B B B (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) A12 A12 A12 A12 A12 A12 A12 P P P P P P P THVLP(0~60) THVLP(0~60) THVLP(0~60) THVLP(0~60) THVLP(0~60) THVLP(0~60) THVLP(0~60) S S S S S S S -video -video -video -video -video -video -video In/O In/O In/O In/O In/O In/O In/O ut ut ut ut ut ut ut A12 A12 A12 A12 A12 A12 A12 M M M M M M M TH TH TH TH TH TH TH VLM VLM VLM VLM VLM VLM VLM ( ( ( ( ( ( ( - 60~0) - 60~0) - 60~0) - 60~0) - 60~0) - 60~0) - 60~0) FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 Foot S Foot S Foot S Foot S Foot S Foot S Foot S Wconn Wconn Wconn Wconn Wconn Wconn Wconn H H H H H H H ost U ost U ost U ost U ost U ost U ost U SBconn SBconn SBconn SBconn SBconn SBconn SBconn Peripheral I/FB(Flat cable) Peripheral I/FB(Flat cable) Peripheral I/FB(Flat cable) Peripheral I/FB(Flat cable) Peripheral I/FB(Flat cable) Peripheral I/FB(Flat cable) Peripheral I/FB(Flat cable) SY SY SY SY SY SY SY SC SC SC SC SC SC SC O O O O O O O N N N N N N N PMASSY PMASSY PMASSY PMASSY PMASSY PMASSY PMASSY PC PC PC PC PC PC PC I I I I I I I BU BU BU BU BU BU BU S S S S S S S SD SD SD SD SD SD SD RAM RAM RAM RAM RAM RAM RAM D D D D D D D SP SP SP SP SP SP SP (32M (32M (32M (32M (32M (32M (32M x2) x2) x2) x2) x2) x2) x2) Video Video Video Video Video Video Video TM TM TM TM TM TM TM S320C S320C S320C S320C S320C S320C S320C 6415 6415 6415 6415 6415 6415 6415 D D D D D D D ecorder ecorder ecorder ecorder ecorder ecorder ecorder LCDI/F LCDI/F LCDI/F LCDI/F LCDI/F LCDI/F LCDI/F FEBC FEBC FEBC FEBC FEBC FEBC FEBC C C C C C C C PD PD PD PD PD PD PD I I I I I I I FPG FPG FPG FPG FPG FPG FPG A A A A A A A FPG FPG FPG FPG FPG FPG FPG A A A A A A A Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet SO SO SO SO SO SO SO MCPUm MCPUm MCPUm MCPUm MCPUm MCPUm MCPUm odule odule odule odule odule odule odule Intel PentiumMC Intel PentiumMC Intel PentiumMC Intel PentiumMC Intel PentiumMC Intel PentiumMC Intel PentiumMC PU PU PU PU PU PU PU Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio FEBU FEBU FEBU FEBU FEBU FEBU FEBU D D D D D D D R R R R R R R 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G BSD BSD BSD BSD BSD BSD BSD R R R R R R R AM AM AM AM AM AM AM w w w w w w w ith ith ith ith ith ith ith AM AM AM AM AM AM AM P P P P P P P oppler data oppler data oppler data oppler data oppler data oppler data oppler data Fdata Fdata Fdata Fdata Fdata Fdata Fdata Peripheral I/FA Peripheral I/FA Peripheral I/FA Peripheral I/FA Peripheral I/FA Peripheral I/FA Peripheral I/FA I/Ocontrol I/Ocontrol I/Ocontrol I/Ocontrol I/Ocontrol I/Ocontrol I/Ocontrol S S S S S S S VG VG VG VG VG VG VG A/Audio A/Audio A/Audio A/Audio A/Audio A/Audio A/Audio fromCL1TRXand fromCL1TRXand fromCL1TRXand fromCL1TRXand fromCL1TRXand fromCL1TRXand fromCL1TRXand CH CH CH CH CH CH CH AC AC AC AC AC AC AC O O O O O O O M M M M M M M ID ID ID ID ID ID ID EI/F EI/F EI/F EI/F EI/F EI/F EI/F fromAC fromAC fromAC fromAC fromAC fromAC fromAC 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 port port port port port port port W W W W W W W USB USB USB USB USB USB USB D(oprion) D(oprion) D(oprion) D(oprion) D(oprion) D(oprion) D(oprion) PG PG PG PG PG PG PG C C C C C C C APS APS APS APS APS APS APS APS APS Video Video Video Video Video Video Video G G G G G G G en. en. en. en. en. en. en. SD SD SD SD SD SD SD RAM RAM RAM RAM RAM RAM RAM C C C C C C C C C ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol encoder encoder encoder encoder encoder encoder encoder (64M (64M (64M (64M (64M (64M (64M x2) x2) x2) x2) x2) x2) x2) B B B B B Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane Assy Assy Assy Assy Assy Assy Assy C C C C C Figure 5-3 LOGIQ™ P5 System Block Diagram (cont’d) 5-4 Section 5-3 - Block Diagram
[Page 145] 5-3-1 LOGIQ™ P5 Block Diagram (cont’d) TRANSBOX TRANSBOX TRANSBOX TRANSBOX TRANSBOX TRANSBOX TRANSBOX ECG ECG ECG ECG ECG ECG ECG ECG ECG module module module module module module module module module (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) AC Inlet AC Inlet AC Inlet AC Inlet AC Inlet AC Inlet AC Inlet Core Filter Core Filter Core Filter Core Filter Core Filter Core Filter Core Filter Hard Disk Hard Disk Hard Disk Hard Disk Hard Disk Hard Disk Hard Disk Hard Disk Hard Disk AC Filter AC Filter AC Filter AC Filter AC Filter AC Filter AC Filter Module Module Module Module Module Module Module 100 V ~ 240V 100 V ~ 240V 100 V ~ 240V 100 V ~ 240V 100 V ~ 240V 100 V ~ 240V 100 V ~ 240V DVD RW DVD RW DVD RW DVD RW DVD RW DVD RW DVD RW DVD RW DVD RW AC TRANS AC TRANS AC TRANS AC TRANS AC TRANS AC TRANS AC TRANS To ARP To ARP To ARP To ARP To ARP To ARP To ARP 100 V ~ 240V or 100V ~ 120V 100 V ~ 240V or 100V ~ 120V 100 V ~ 240V or 100V ~ 120V 100 V ~ 240V or 100V ~ 120V 100 V ~ 240V or 100V ~ 120V 100 V ~ 240V or 100V ~ 120V 100 V ~ 240V or 100V ~ 120V APC ASSY APC ASSY APC ASSY APC ASSY APC ASSY APC ASSY APC ASSY 4D BOX 4D BOX 4D BOX 4D BOX 4D BOX 4D BOX 4D BOX 4D BOX 4D BOX (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 keybord keybord keybord keybord keybord keybord keybord ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY LP5 LCDMON ASSY LP5 LCDMON ASSY LP5 LCDMON ASSY LP5 LCDMON ASSY LP5 LCDMON ASSY LP5 LCDMON ASSY LP5 LCDMON ASSY LP5 Sub LP5 Sub LP5 Sub LP5 Sub LP5 Sub LP5 Sub LP5 Sub Keybord Keybord Keybord Keybord Keybord Keybord Keybord ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY LCD PANEL LCD PANEL LCD PANEL LCD PANEL LCD PANEL LCD PANEL LCD PANEL LP5 Main LP5 Main LP5 Main LP5 Main LP5 Main LP5 Main LP5 Main keybord keybord keybord keybord keybord keybord keybord ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY A/N KEY A/N KEY A/N KEY A/N KEY A/N KEY A/N KEY A/N KEY Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller TRACK TRACK TRACK TRACK TRACK TRACK TRACK Function Function Function Function Function Function Function TGC CTRL TGC CTRL TGC CTRL TGC CTRL TGC CTRL TGC CTRL TGC CTRL BALL BALL BALL BALL BALL BALL BALL KEYs KEYs KEYs KEYs KEYs KEYs KEYs From From From From From From From From From SYSCONPM SYSCONPM SYSCONPM SYSCONPM SYSCONPM SYSCONPM SYSCONPM SYSCONPM SYSCONPM Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane Assy Assy Assy Assy Assy Assy Assy Figure 5-4 LOGIQ™ P5 System Block Diagram (cont’d) Section 5-3 - Block Diagram 5-5
[Page 146] 5-3-2 LOGIQ™ A5 Block Diagram Differences between LOGIQ™ P5 and LOGIQ™ A5 are followings : - CPU Module : LOGIQ™ P5 is Pentium M and LOGIQ™ A5 Celeron M - Transmit pulse driver circuit : LOGIQ™ P5 is dual puse driver for CFM mode, but LOGIQ™ A5 is single pulse driver. So LOGIQ™ A5 circuit is more simple and cheap then LOGIQ™ P5. - Keyboard : LOGIQ™ A5 keyboard doesn’t have CFM and PDI, CWD button. A A A S S S IGA IGA IGA S S S SY SY SY P P P 2R 2R 2R LYA LYA LYA S S S SY SY SY B B B L1T L1T L1T R R R XA XA XA S S S SY SY SY P P P robeP robeP robeP ort ort ort #1 #1 #1 B B B TXA TXA TXA S S S SY SY SY R R R H H H Vdriver Vdriver Vdriver X16 X16 X16 T T T P P P G G G 2 2 2 E E E M M M P P P robeP robeP robeP ort ort ort #2 #2 #2 L L L U U U A A A X X X H H H Vdriver Vdriver Vdriver X16 X16 X16 T T T P P P G G G 2 2 2 Y Y Y P P robeP robeP ort ort #3 #3 (O (O ption) ption) H H H Vdriver Vdriver Vdriver X16 X16 X16 T T T P P P G G G 2 2 2 R R R E E E LAYC LAYC LAYC ontrol ontrol ontrol H H H Vdriver Vdriver Vdriver X16 X16 X16 T T T P P P G G G 2 2 2 L1B L1B L1B FCA FCA FCA S S S SY SY SY P P P G G G CfromSY CfromSY CfromSY S S S C C C O O O N N N CM CM CM T T T R R R B B B C C C fpga fpga fpga LN LN LN A A A A A A D D D C10bits C10bits C10bits O O O Q Q Q X X X 2 2 2 R R R V V V C C C A A A S S S D D D R R R A A A M M M A A A LN LN LN A A A A A A D D D C10bits C10bits C10bits for for for S S S IGconnection IGconnection IGconnection R R R V V V C C C A A A O O O Q Q Q x2&T x2&T x2&T P P P G G G 2 2 2 LN LN LN A A A A A A D D D C10bits C10bits C10bits R R R V V V C C C A A A O O O Q Q Q X X X 2 2 2 LN LN LN A A A A A A D D D C10bits C10bits C10bits R R R V V V C C C A A A O O O Q Q Q X X X 2 2 2 LN LN LN A A A A A A D D D C10bits C10bits C10bits O O O Q Q Q X X X 2 2 2 R R R V V V C C C A A A R R R FD FD FD atatoSY atatoSY atatoSY S S S C C C O O O N N N C C C M M M FE FE FE B B B U U U SconnectedtoSY SconnectedtoSY SconnectedtoSY S S S C C C O O O N N N C C C M M M B B B D D D CP CP CP O O O W W W E E E RfromA RfromA RfromA P P P S S S Figure 5-5 LOGIQ™ A5 System Block Diagram 5-6 Section 5-3 - Block Diagram
[Page 147] 5-3-2 LOGIQ™ A5 Block Diagram (cont’d) FromTR FromTR FromTR FromTR FromTR FromTR FromTR FromTR FromTR ANSBO ANSBO ANSBO ANSBO ANSBO ANSBO ANSBO ANSBO ANSBO X X X X X X X X X AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR AR PASSY PASSY PASSY PASSY PASSY PASSY PASSY PASSY PASSY APSASSY APSASSY APSASSY APSASSY APSASSY APSASSY APSASSY APSASSY APSASSY LANC LANC LANC LANC LANC LANC LANC LANC LANC onn onn onn onn onn onn onn onn onn C C C C C C C C C ircuit Breaker ircuit Breaker ircuit Breaker ircuit Breaker ircuit Breaker ircuit Breaker ircuit Breaker ircuit Breaker ircuit Breaker I/F&C I/F&C I/F&C I/F&C I/F&C I/F&C I/F&C I/F&C I/F&C ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol for for for for for for for for for AC AC AC AC AC AC AC AC AC Video Video Video Video Video Video Video Video Video In/O In/O In/O In/O In/O In/O In/O In/O In/O ut ut ut ut ut ut ut ut ut LVblock LVblock LVblock LVblock LVblock LVblock LVblock LVblock LVblock H H H H H H H H H Vblock Vblock Vblock Vblock Vblock Vblock Vblock Vblock Vblock ACO ACO ACO ACO ACO ACO ACO ACO ACO utlet utlet utlet utlet utlet utlet utlet utlet utlet VG VG VG VG VG VG VG VG VG AC AC AC AC AC AC AC AC AC onn onn onn onn onn onn onn onn onn D D D D D D D D D 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 V V V V V V V V V U U U U U U U U U SB conn x SB conn x SB conn x SB conn x SB conn x SB conn x SB conn x SB conn x SB conn x 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 D D D D D D D D D 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 V V V V V V V V V SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH SH VP(+80) VP(+80) VP(+80) VP(+80) VP(+80) VP(+80) VP(+80) VP(+80) VP(+80) D D D D D D D D D 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 V V V V V V V V V SHVM SHVM SHVM SHVM SHVM SHVM SHVM SHVM SHVM (- 80) (- 80) (- 80) (- 80) (- 80) (- 80) (- 80) (- 80) (- 80) SO SO SO SO SO SO SO SO SO U U U U U U U U U N N N N N N N N N D In/O D In/O D In/O D In/O D In/O D In/O D In/O D In/O D In/O ut ut ut ut ut ut ut ut ut A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 P P P P P P P P P TH TH TH TH TH TH TH TH TH VHP(0~60) VHP(0~60) VHP(0~60) VHP(0~60) VHP(0~60) VHP(0~60) VHP(0~60) VHP(0~60) VHP(0~60) A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 M M M M M M M M M TH TH TH TH TH TH TH TH TH VHM VHM VHM VHM VHM VHM VHM VHM VHM (- 60~0) (- 60~0) (- 60~0) (- 60~0) (- 60~0) (- 60~0) (- 60~0) (- 60~0) (- 60~0) U U U U U U U U U SBH SBH SBH SBH SBH SBH SBH SBH SBH UB UB UB UB UB UB UB UB UB A12 A12 A12 A12 A12 A12 A12 A12 A12 P P P P P P P P P TH TH TH TH TH TH TH TH TH VLP(0~60) VLP(0~60) VLP(0~60) VLP(0~60) VLP(0~60) VLP(0~60) VLP(0~60) VLP(0~60) VLP(0~60) S- video S- video S- video S- video S- video S- video S- video S- video S- video In/O In/O In/O In/O In/O In/O In/O In/O In/O ut ut ut ut ut ut ut ut ut A12 A12 A12 A12 A12 A12 A12 A12 A12 M M M M M M M M M TH TH TH TH TH TH TH TH TH VLM VLM VLM VLM VLM VLM VLM VLM VLM (- 60~0) (- 60~0) (- 60~0) (- 60~0) (- 60~0) (- 60~0) (- 60~0) (- 60~0) (- 60~0) FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 LP5 Foot S Foot S Foot S Foot S Foot S Foot S Foot S Foot S Foot S W conn W conn W conn W conn W conn W conn W conn W conn W conn H H H H H H H H H ost USB conn ost USB conn ost USB conn ost USB conn ost USB conn ost USB conn ost USB conn ost USB conn ost USB conn Peripheral I/FB(Flat cable) Peripheral I/FB(Flat cable) Peripheral I/FB(Flat cable) Peripheral I/FB(Flat cable) Peripheral I/FB(Flat cable) Peripheral I/FB(Flat cable) Peripheral I/FB(Flat cable) Peripheral I/FB(Flat cable) Peripheral I/FB(Flat cable) SY SY SY SY SY SY SY SY SY SC SC SC SC SC SC SC SC SC O O O O O O O O O N N N N N N N N N CMASSY CMASSY CMASSY CMASSY CMASSY CMASSY CMASSY CMASSY CMASSY PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC I I I I I I I I I BUS BUS BUS BUS BUS BUS BUS BUS BUS SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD R R R R R R R R R AM AM AM AM AM AM AM AM AM D D D D D D D D D SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP (32M (32M (32M (32M (32M (32M (32M (32M (32M x2) x2) x2) x2) x2) x2) x2) x2) x2) Video Video Video Video Video Video Video Video Video TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM TM S320C S320C S320C S320C S320C S320C S320C S320C S320C 6415 6415 6415 6415 6415 6415 6415 6415 6415 D D D D D D D D D ecorder ecorder ecorder ecorder ecorder ecorder ecorder ecorder ecorder LCDI/F LCDI/F LCDI/F LCDI/F LCDI/F LCDI/F LCDI/F LCDI/F LCDI/F FEBC FEBC FEBC FEBC FEBC FEBC FEBC FEBC FEBC CPD CPD CPD CPD CPD CPD CPD CPD CPD I I I I I I I I I FPG FPG FPG FPG FPG FPG FPG FPG FPG A A A A A A A A A FPG FPG FPG FPG FPG FPG FPG FPG FPG A A A A A A A A A Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet SO SO SO SO SO SO SO SO SO MC MC MC MC MC MC MC MC MC PU m PU m PU m PU m PU m PU m PU m PU m PU m odule odule odule odule odule odule odule odule odule Intel C Intel C Intel C Intel C Intel C Intel C Intel C Intel C Intel C eleron eleron eleron eleron eleron eleron eleron eleron eleron MC MC MC MC MC MC MC MC MC PU PU PU PU PU PU PU PU PU Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio FEBUS FEBUS FEBUS FEBUS FEBUS FEBUS FEBUS FEBUS FEBUS R R R R R R R R R 512M 512M 512M 512M 512M 512M 512M 512M 512M BSD BSD BSD BSD BSD BSD BSD BSD BSD R R R R R R R R R AM AM AM AM AM AM AM AM AM w w w w w w w w w ith ith ith ith ith ith ith ith ith AM AM AM AM AM AM AM AM AM P P P P P P P P P Fdata Fdata Fdata Fdata Fdata Fdata Fdata Fdata Fdata Peripheral I/FA Peripheral I/FA Peripheral I/FA Peripheral I/FA Peripheral I/FA Peripheral I/FA Peripheral I/FA Peripheral I/FA Peripheral I/FA I/Ocontrol I/Ocontrol I/Ocontrol I/Ocontrol I/Ocontrol I/Ocontrol I/Ocontrol I/Ocontrol I/Ocontrol VG VG VG VG VG VG VG VG VG A/Audio A/Audio A/Audio A/Audio A/Audio A/Audio A/Audio A/Audio A/Audio fromBL1TRXand fromBL1TRXand fromBL1TRXand fromBL1TRXand fromBL1TRXand fromBL1TRXand fromBL1TRXand fromBL1TRXand fromBL1TRXand C C C C C C C C C H H H H H H H H H AC AC AC AC AC AC AC AC AC O O O O O O O O O M M M M M M M M M ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID ID EI/F EI/F EI/F EI/F EI/F EI/F EI/F EI/F EI/F 4 port 4 port 4 port 4 port 4 port 4 port 4 port 4 port 4 port USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB USB PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG PG C C C C C C C C C APS APS APS APS APS APS APS APS APS Video Video Video Video Video Video Video Video Video G G G G G G G G G en. en. en. en. en. en. en. en. en. SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD R R R R R R R R R AM AM AM AM AM AM AM AM AM C C C C C C C C C ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol ontrol encoder encoder encoder encoder encoder encoder encoder encoder encoder (64M (64M (64M (64M (64M (64M (64M (64M (64M x2) x2) x2) x2) x2) x2) x2) x2) x2) B B B B B BackplaneASSY BackplaneASSY BackplaneASSY BackplaneASSY BackplaneASSY BackplaneASSY BackplaneASSY BackplaneASSY BackplaneASSY C C C C C Figure 5-6 LOGIQ™ A5 System Block Diagram Section 5-3 - Block Diagram 5-7
[Page 148] 5-3-2 LOGIQ™ A5 Block Diagram (cont’d) TRANSBOX TRANSBOX TRANSBOX TRANSBOX TRANSBOX TRANSBOX TRANSBOX ECG ECG ECG ECG ECG ECG ECG ECG ECG module module module module module module module module module (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) AC Inlet AC Inlet AC Inlet AC Inlet AC Inlet AC Inlet AC Inlet Core Filter Core Filter Core Filter Core Filter Core Filter Core Filter Core Filter Hard Disk Hard Disk Hard Disk Hard Disk Hard Disk Hard Disk Hard Disk Hard Disk Hard Disk AC Filter AC Filter AC Filter AC Filter AC Filter AC Filter AC Filter Module Module Module Module Module Module Module 100V ~ 240V 100V ~ 240V 100V ~ 240V 100V ~ 240V 100V ~ 240V 100V ~ 240V 100V ~ 240V DVD RW DVD RW DVD RW DVD RW DVD RW DVD RW DVD RW DVD RW DVD RW AC TRANS AC TRANS AC TRANS AC TRANS AC TRANS AC TRANS AC TRANS To ARP To ARP To ARP To ARP To ARP To ARP To ARP 100V ~ 240V or 100V ~ 120V 100V ~ 240V or 100V ~ 120V 100V ~ 240V or 100V ~ 120V 100V ~ 240V or 100V ~ 120V 100V ~ 240V or 100V ~ 120V 100V ~ 240V or 100V ~ 120V 100V ~ 240V or 100V ~ 120V APC ASSY APC ASSY APC ASSY APC ASSY APC ASSY APC ASSY APC ASSY D12V from D12V from D12V from D12V from D12V from APS & AC on APS & AC on APS & AC on APS & AC on APS & AC on control from control from control from control from control from SYSCONCM SYSCONCM SYSCONCM SYSCONCM SYSCONCM 4D BOX 4D BOX 4D BOX 4D BOX 4D BOX 4D BOX 4D BOX 4D BOX 4D BOX (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) (option) SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY from from from from from APS APS APS APS APS NESTFAN NESTFAN NESTFAN NESTFAN NESTFAN Assy Assy Assy Assy Assy LA5 keybord LA5 keybord LA5 keybord LA5 keybord LA5 keybord LA5 keybord LA5 keybord ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY LA5 LCDMON ASSY LA5 LCDMON ASSY LA5 LCDMON ASSY LA5 LCDMON ASSY LA5 LCDMON ASSY LA5 LCDMON ASSY LA5 LCDMON ASSY LA5 SubKeybordASSY LA5 SubKeybordASSY LA5 SubKeybordASSY LA5 SubKeybordASSY LA5 SubKeybordASSY LA5 SubKeybordASSY LA5 SubKeybordASSY LCD PANEL LCD PANEL LCD PANEL LCD PANEL LCD PANEL LCD PANEL LCD PANEL LA5 MainkeybordASSY LA5 MainkeybordASSY LA5 MainkeybordASSY LA5 MainkeybordASSY LA5 MainkeybordASSY LA5 MainkeybordASSY LA5 MainkeybordASSY A/N KEY A/N KEY A/N KEY A/N KEY A/N KEY A/N KEY A/N KEY Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller TRACK TRACK TRACK TRACK TRACK TRACK TRACK Function Function Function Function Function Function Function TGC CTRL TGC CTRL TGC CTRL TGC CTRL TGC CTRL TGC CTRL TGC CTRL BALL BALL BALL BALL BALL BALL BALL KEYs KEYs KEYs KEYs KEYs KEYs KEYs From From From From From From From From From SYSCONCM SYSCONCM SYSCONCM SYSCONCM SYSCONCM SYSCONCM SYSCONCM SYSCONCM SYSCONCM C C C C C Peripheral I/F A Peripheral I/F A Peripheral I/F A Peripheral I/F A Peripheral I/F A BACKPLANE ASSY BACKPLANE ASSY BACKPLANE ASSY BACKPLANE ASSY BACKPLANE ASSY BACKPLANE ASSY BACKPLANE ASSY Figure 5-7 LOGIQ™ A5 System Block Diagram 5-8 Section 5-3 - Block Diagram
[Page 149] Section 5-4 Main Board Detail r r r r r e e e e e w w w w w ls ls ls ls ls o o o o o a a a a a P P P P P P P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 R R R R R R R L L L L L L L Y Y Y Y Y Y Y A A A A A A A S S S S S S S S S S S S S S Y Y Y Y Y Y Y P P P P P n n n n n A A A A A d d d d d ig ig ig ig ig S S S S S n n n n n S S S S S IG IG IG IG IG a a a a a X X X X X t a t a t a t a t a R R R R R A A A A A B B B B B a a a a a F F F F F r r r r r o o o o o n n n n n tE tE tE tE tE n n n n n d d d d d d d d d d S S S S S C C C C C C C L L L L L L L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 T T T T T T T R R R R R R R X X X X X X X A A A A A A A S S S S S S S S S S S S S S Y Y Y Y Y Y Y A A A A A n n n n n S Y S Y S Y S Y S Y C C C C C lD lD lD lD lD a a a a a K K K K K it a it a it a it a it a X X X X X P P P P P T T T T T L L L L L ig ig ig ig ig A A A A A D D D D D A A A A A C C C C C W W W W W D D D D D A A A A A S S S S S S S S S S Y Y Y Y Y ( ( ( ( ( o o o o o p p p p p t t t t t io io io io io n n n n n ) ) ) ) ) N N N N N E E E E E A A A A A . . . . . S S S S S t c t c t c t c t c S S S S S e e e e e Y Y Y Y Y I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O o o o o o S S S S S Y Y Y Y Y S S S S S C C C C C O O O O O N N N N N P P P P P M M M M M A A A A A S S S S S S S S S S Y Y Y Y Y B B B B B a a a a a c c c c c k k k k k E E E E E n n n n n d d d d d e e e e e id id id id id ,V ,V ,V ,V ,V I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O A A A A A P P P P P S S S S S A A A A A S S S S S S S S S S Y Y Y Y Y io io io io io d d d d d u u u u u ,A ,A ,A ,A ,A B B B B B A A A A A R R R R R P P P P P A A A A A S S S S S S S S S S Y Y Y Y Y 4 4 4 4 4 D D D D D B B B B B O O O O O X X X X X A A A A A S S S S S S S S S S Y Y Y Y Y S S S S S U U U U U ( ( ( ( ( O O O O O p p p p p t t t t t io io io io io n n n n n ) ) ) ) ) Figure 5-8 LOGIQ™ P5 Main board Structure Figure 5-9 LOGIQ™ A5 Main board Structure The Front End generates the strong burst transmitted by the probes as ultrasound into the body. It also receives weak ultrasound echoes from blood cells and body structure, amplifies these signals and converts them to an digital signal. Section 5-4 - Main Board Detail 5-9
[Page 150] Section 5-4 Main Board Detail (cont’d) The digital representation of this signal is presented to the Mid Processor section. • P3RLY (Relay) : This P3RLY is for LOGIQ™ P5 or LOGIQ™ A5 with 3port upgrade kit. P3RLY Assy contains 3 connectors for probe interface and arrays of relays for switchable connection. High voltage multiplexer provide connection between 128 signal of probe and selectable 64 channels transmit/receive signals. • P2RLY(Relay) : This P2RLY is for LOGIQ™ A5. P2RLY Assy contains 2 connectors for probe interface and arrays of relays for switchable connection. High voltage multiplexer provide connection between 128 signal of probe and selectable 64 channels transmit/receive signals • CL1TRX (Color single acquisition Tx and Rx) : This board is for LOGIQ™ P5 and LOGIQ™ A5 with Color upgrade. This consists of two main board, L1BFC(Single acquisition Beam Forming Control) and CTX(Color TX) ASSY. L1BFC has transmit/receiving switch to isolate rx signal circuit from transmit pulse. The preamplifier on L1BFC amplifies 64 small echo signals. The amplified receiving signals are converted to digital and sent to the delayed summing block. CTX board has 64 channel Transmit pulse generator, bipolar pulse drivers and delay controller. • SYSCONPM (System Control board with Pentium M module): SYSCONPM is for LOGIQ™ P5 or LOGIQ™ A5 with color upgrade kit. SYSCONPM controls scan operation and transfer the scan parameters to other boards like P3RLY, CL1TRX, ACWD(option). Proper signal processing for tissue and Doppler are done in SYSCONPM. • SYSCONCM (System Control board with Celeron M module): SYSCONCM is for LOGIQ™ A5. SYSCONPM controls scan operation and transfer the scan parameters to other boards like P2RLY, BL1TRX. Proper signal processing for tissue and Doppler are done in SYSCONCM. • APS/APS Pro(Advanced Power Supply) : Includes Low voltage power and High voltage power in one module. It generates 3.3V, 5V, and 12V for digital parts and 6V, -6V, 12A, -12V for analog parts. Additionally, It generate THV(Transmit High Voltage) and SHV(Static High Voltage) for transmit pulse driver and High voltage MUX. • ASIG(Signal) : Transfers the TX pulse signals from CL1TRX(BL1TRX) to the probe port on P3RLY(P2RLY). Receives echo signals from P3RLY(P2RLY) are transfer to CL1TRX(BL1TRX) through this ASIG. For ACWD, the pre-amplified received signals go to the ACWD though ASIG. 5-10 Section 5-4 - Main Board Detail
[Page 151] 5-4-1 P3RLY and P2RLY R R E E L L A A Y Y S S H H V V S S H H V V R R E E L L A A Y Y P P O O R R T T A A 1 1 2 2 8 8 R R E E L L A A Y Y P P O O R R T T A A 1 1 2 2 8 8 T T o o C C L L 1 1 T T R R X X 1 1 2 2 8 8 H H V V M M U U X X T T o o C C L L 1 1 T T R R X X 1 1 2 2 8 8 6 6 4 4 P P O O R R T T B B H H V V M M U U X X 1 1 2 2 8 8 1 1 2 2 8 8 6 6 4 4 P P O O R R T T B B 1 1 2 2 8 8 P P O O R R T T C C 1 1 2 2 8 8 C C o o n n t t r r o o l l C C o o n n t t r r o o l l T T e e m m p p e e r r a a t t u u r r e e C C o o n n t t r r o o l l C C o o n n t t r r o o l l C C ir ir c c u u it it F F P P G G A A S S e e n n s s o o r r C C ir ir c c u u it it F F P P G G A A P P r r o o b b e e ID ID In In t t e e r r f f a a c c e e P P r r o o b b e e ID ID In In t t e e r r f f a a c c e e F F E E B B U U S S F F E E B B U U S S Figure 5-10 P3RLY & P2RLY Block Diagram P3RLY ASSY contains of 3 probe connectors and provides switchable connection between probes and 64ch transmitters/receivers. P2RLY contains 2 probe connector The main function of P3RLY ASSY and P2RLY ASSY is as follows. - 3-to-1 selectors with three probe ports for P3RLY board. - 2 to 1 selector with two probe ports for P2RLY board - Interface with FEBUS (control bus) - Supply/Cut control and failure detection of supply voltage for Mux circuit in a Probe. - Device: Mechanical Relay. 5-4-1-1 Interface to Probe • Probe Status detection - Detects whether or not a probe is connected.(POPEN) - Detects ID code of a connected probe.(PCODE) • Mux Interface - Transfers control data of Mux to a probe.(CONSYS,CONSTA) - Enables/Disables control of data. - Detects whether Mux data setting is finished or not. • Power Supply for Mux - Supply/Cut control: +5V and +12V on a connector are supplied while a probe is connected to the connector. +/-SHV are supplied only while a probe is selected. • LED Blinking - The LED in a probe blinks when the probe is selected. Section 5-4 - Main Board Detail 5-11
[Page 152] 5-4-2 CL1TRX and BL1TRX 5-4-2-1 Overview CL1TRX have two PWAs. Both are CTX PWA and L1BFC PWA. CTX generates the TX pulse and L1BFC receives the echo signal to amplify it and convert the amplified echo signal into digital signal. These RF digital signals delayed and summed by beam-forming in OQx2 ASICs. BL1TRX have also two PWAs, BTX PWA and L1BFC PWA. The difference between BTX and CTX is trasntmit pulse firver circuit. BTX have single pulse driver per each channel, but the CTX have dual pulse driver circuit per each channel for high performance in B/CFM mode The CL1TRX ASSY or BL1TRX ASSY is located in the Nest box 5-4-2-2 Limiter in CL1TRX and BL1TRX +V bias To P3RLY board From TX _Block To RX_Block Coupling Diode Isolation Diode -V bias Figure 5-11 LMT Block Diagram The main functions are as follows. • 64ch transmit/receiving switches protect a Pre-amp from a high voltage transmit pulse 5-12 Section 5-4 - Main Board Detail
[Page 153] 5-4-2-3 Preamp in CL1TRX/BL1TRX ch0 ch0 LN LN A A A A D D C10bits C10bits V V C C A A ch1 ch1 LN LN A A A A D D C10bits C10bits V V C C A A ch2 ch2 LN LN A A A A D D C10bits C10bits V V C C A A ch3 ch3 LN LN A A A A D D C10bits C10bits V V C C A A ch63 ch63 LN LN A A A A D D C10bits C10bits V V C C A A Figure 5-12 Pre Amp Block Diagram For a Channel The Pre-Amplifier receives and amplifies each 64 echo signals. Then, all 64 echo signals (from 0 to 63ch) are outputted to the Analog to Digital converter to delay and sum. Following 32 echo signals (from 32 to 63ch) are simultaneously outputted to the ACWD ASSY via the ASIG ASSY. The preamp module have main three blocks: Pre-amp and Gain Control and Mode control block. The preamp module amplifies the echo signals. The mode control block selects a maximum gain code via dedicated control signals from SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM). The analog signal provided by Gain Control block gives total amplified gain. The block diagram above of the preamp module for a received signal is given. Actually, there are 64 channels equivalent to figure above for a preamp module. The Pre-amp block consists of Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) and Variable Gain Amplifier (VGA). A received signal is amplified by LNA (fixed gain), then amplified by VGA (variable gain). Section 5-4 - Main Board Detail 5-13
[Page 154] 5-4-2-4 Delayed Sum Module C C l1TR l1TR X X A A D D C10bits C10bits O O Q Q X X 2 2 S S D D R R A A M M A A D D C10bits C10bits for for O O Q Q x2&TP x2&TP G G 2 2 A A D D C10bits C10bits O O Q Q X X 2 2 A A D D C10bits C10bits F F E E B B O O Q Q X X 2 2 U U S S A A D D C10bits C10bits O O Q Q X X 2 2 R R F F _S _S U U M M B B A A C C K K P P LA LA N N EA EA S S S S Y Y Figure 5-13 DELAYED SUM Block Diagram The Delayed Sum is the receive beam former and consist of 4 OQx2 ASICs. Each OQx2 ASIC has 16 receiving channels. The each digital beamforming output data of the OQx2 transferred to the next OQx2 and the output of final OQx2 transferred to the SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM)to make it into image data through some digital signal processing. Delay control data for receive beam forming are contained in SDRAM. Typically only 1 selected probe data are saved in SDRAM. If new probe is connected, additional probe data will be downloaded from HDD to SDRAM. Main items are • TRBC FPGA : Provide interfaces with SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM)through FE Bus. This FPGA control all OQx2 asic for receive beamforming. All of parameter information for ASIC operation are loaded into OQX2 ASIC from SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) through this FPGA. • OQX2 :Digital receive beamforming ASIC. Each OQX2 have capability of 16 channel receiving data inputs. Each input data can be 12 bits. Operation clock is 40 MHz. 4 OQX2 ASICs are used in a Delayed Sum module and each OQX2 summed output are cascaded to next OQX2 ASIC. So, the last summed output of the last OQX2 are transferred to SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) to make a meaningful image data. The receive beamforming control logic in OQX2 ASIC need delay information data for each channel's control logic. This delay information data are downloaded into ASIC from SDRAM by TRBC FPGA. • SDRAM(TD and RD Memory) : SDRAM keeps the receive delay data for OQX2 ASIC. During scan time, these data are downloaded into OQX2 ASIC by TRBC FPGA. Memory capacity is 32Mbytes for a probe. 5-14 Section 5-4 - Main Board Detail
[Page 155] 5-4-2-5 Transmit Pulse Generation Block T T P P G G 2 2 6 6 4 4 c c h h T T X X s s ig ig n n a a l l fo fo rH rH V V L L T T X X D D r r iv iv e e r r _ _ H H V V L L P P (C (C T T X X O O n n ly ly ) ) ro ro S S e e b b T T P P G G 2 2 le le eIn eIn c c tio tio te te nB nB rfa rfa c c u u eB eB ffe ffe 6 6 4 4 c c h h T T P P G G 2 2 r r T T X X s s ig ig n n a a l l o o a a fo fo rH rH V V H H rd rd T T X X D D r r iv iv e e r r _ _ H H V V H H T T P P G G 2 2 T T P P G G 2 2 B B u u ffe ffe re re n n a a b b les les ig ig n n a a l l C C o o n n tr tr o o lS lS ig ig n n a a l l tos tos e e le le c c tT tT X X D D r r iv iv e e r r Figure 5-14 Tx pulse Generation Block Diagram The CTX in CL1TRX generate bipolar transmit pulse and have dual driver for each scan mode, for example, low voltage driver for PWD or CFM and high voltage for B. This board has 64 channels transmit signal drivers, Transmit Pulse Generator ASIC, control FPGA and so on. Transmit pulse are generated by TPG2 ASIC. Each TPG2 ASIC makes 16 channels signals, so total 4 ASIC are used in CTX in CL1TRX. All of control informations for pulse generation, pulse width, time delay of each channel are come from SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) in real time via Backplane. The control FPGA, TRBC FPGA provide interface between SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) and TPG2 ASICs and control operation condition of CTX in CL1TRX Main items are • TPG2 ASIC: A TPG2 ASIC can generate 16 channels logic level transmit pulse signal. This ASIC use 2 phase 40MHz clocks for transmit delay control and pulse generation. 40Mhz operation clocks are come from L1SYSCON assy via Backplane. • Transmit Pulse Driver : TPG2 ASIC generated logic level signal for transmit pulse. So this signal need to be expanded to high voltage signal. Driver circuit make logic level signal to high voltage level signal. • THV Switch : LOGIQ™ P5 system use dual transmit high voltage for transmit driver because B mode and CFM mode use different voltage level of transmit pulse. So in duplex of triplex mode, B/ CFM or B/DOP, Low THV and High THV are switched in CTX in CL1TRX in real time. • TRBC FPGA : This FPGA is located on L1BFC board interfacing with SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) and updating the TPG data in real time. Section 5-4 - Main Board Detail 5-15
[Page 156] 5-4-3 SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) Figure 5-15 SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) Block Diagram 5-4-3-1 Overview SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) ASSY includes Mid processor and Back End Processor. DSP generate the scan control data and the FEBC FPGA adjust the time and manipulate the FEBUS to control Front End boards and APS/APS Pro. CPDI transfer the Image or Doppler data to the Image Ring buffer through DSP. Finally the data goes to the SOM module to make displaying image or sound. 5-4-3-2 SYSTEM ON MODULE(SOM) The SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) Assy has System On Module PC(SOM) and PWA which is able to dock SOM. In LOGIQ™ P5 system and LOGIQ™ P5 system, PWA is used the same one. But the System On Module, which computes received Scan data, and interfaces the external peripheral devices (ex. B/ W printer, Digital Video Recorder etc.) are divided high grade for LOGIQ™ P5 and low grade for LOGIQ™ A5 by it's CPU performance. 5-16 Section 5-4 - Main Board Detail
[Page 157] 5-4-3-3 PERIPHERAL BLOCK • IDE Interface : SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) Assy has SATA bus for HDD and PATA bus for DVD-R drive interface. - Primary Master SATA: HDD - Secondary Master PATA: DVD-R Drive • DISPLAY (VGA, DVI, TV input) BLOCK Basically SOM support 2 kinds of display output. One is LVDS level for Plat panel display, and other is analog RGB for CRT monitor. To obtain advanced and stable quality image, SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) Assy convert LVDS signal to Digital Video Interface (DVI) and transport TMDS signal to main display of system. • ETHERNET BLOCK SOM on the SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) has one integrated Ethernet port : Intel 82562 10/100 Mbps Fast Ethernet controller • SOM supply four USB 1.1/2.0 port. Each USB ports are used for the keyboard, BW digital printer, USB port for usb memory stick, etc. • VCR INPUT For Video play back, SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) has Video Decoder device. It support NTSC/ PAL mode both. It transfers encoded data to SOM through PCI bus. - Supports capture resolutions up to 768x576(Full PAL mode) - CCIR 656 Interface - S-Video & composite input interface 5-4-3-4 FPGA BLOCK • FEBC FPGA(FEBUS Control): A major function of FEBC is that generate FEBUS to control scan sequence, access register on the each other front end assy, and interface to DSP through EMIFB bus. Other roles are below - Generates a stable PGC curve for getting better image quality. - Gathers the diagnostic information: LV, HV, Probe temperature, Nest temperature. - Supervises the system safety - Manages the each ASSY information with IIC Bus: SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM), CL1TRX, P3RLY(P2RL), ACWD (option) and Probes - Controls HV Voltage output level: Transfer the voltage reference data from DSP to APS/APS Pro via IIC interface. • CPDI FPGA(CHACOM Processing Data Interface): The major function of CPDI is that transfer mid processed data from CHACOM to DSP local process. CPDI has 2EA 8x1024 Dual port as one scan line image data buffer. Address sequencer indicates to DSP that buffered data is full one scan line. then DSP can transfer a scan line data to one's SDRAM. For debugging, CPDI generate test pattern image data. It will be able to check CHACOM run normally. 5-4-3-5 CLOCK DISTRIBUTION BLOCK Each operation clock is divided from 160MHz. Also ECL logic is used to remove clock skew for all clock distribution. Required clocks is following: • 40MHz In-phase and 40MHz Quad-phase for ACWD, CL1TRX assy • 40MHz In-phase for P3RLY assy Section 5-4 - Main Board Detail 5-17
[Page 158] 5-4-3-6 POWER CONTROL BLOCK ON/OFF power sequence control is needed to prevent system to boot up abnormally, and protect to loose important diagnostic information of patient from unexpected power failure. • Live power : Whenever main AC power is supplied, Microprocessor on the SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) must live always by live power supplied by APS/APS Pro Assy. • System boot-up sequence Peripheral power -> LV power -> SOM (Main PC) on the SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM). • Software shut down sequence Because not ATX power, Main Operation System (Windows XP) have to inform about time to shutdown to DSP by interrupt. So DSP can allow FPGA to assert shutdown signal to MICOM. • Abnormal shut down sequence SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) can force to shutdown system abnormally by pressing power button during 15 second. But live power for MICOM has to alive. 5-4-3-7 CHACOM BLOCK This ASIC have two main function. One is the CHAF, which have functions of coded excitation decorder and 2nd harmonic filter. The other is COMSO, which has functions of detector, B/M mode edge enhance, Log compression, and dynamic range control. 5-4-3-8 PGC and TEST SIGNAL GENERATION BLOCK SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) generate Power Gain Control signal in order to get better quality scan image from CL1TRX. This signal goes into a preamp on the CL1TRX(BL1TRX) Assy. Additionally, SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) generate test signal used to test analog path of CL1TRX(BL1TRX) Assy. These signals are converted to analog from 8bit digital data from FEBC FPGA, and DSP could update digital PGC and Test data table whenever needed. 5-18 Section 5-4 - Main Board Detail
[Page 159] 5-4-4 SOM Module The SOM means System On Module which integrates the PC motherboard and CPU and memory and peripheral device for BEP (Back End Process) functionality into a small size PWA. There are 2 kinds of SOM module for LOGIQ™ P5 and LOGIQ™ A5. One is PM SOM Assy with high performance Pentium M CPU and the other is CM SOM Assy with lower performance Celeron M CPU. PM SOM PWA include moble Pentium M CPU and 915GM chipset and 1G DDR2 memory on small size form factor PCB(3.75 inch x 4.5 inch). CM SOM PWA include mobile Celeron M CPU 915GM chipset and 512MB DDR2 memory. This SOM module is attached on the SYSCON PWA. So SYSCONPM Assy include PM SOM module and SYSCONCM Assy include CM SOM module. Figure 5-16 PM SOM and CM SOM Block Diagram Section 5-4 - Main Board Detail 5-19
[Page 160] 5-4-4-1 PM SOM and CM SOM The difference on both module is BIOS boot screen and label on the module. The label include FRU number. • PM SOM FRU number is 5178410 and CM SOM FRU number is 5178834 Figure 5-17 Different Label on PM SOM and CM SOM • BIOS display screen are different. The BIOS boot screen come up when power on the system. The number on the screen is FRU number of each SOM assy. The system with PM SOM assy show 5178410 and the system with CM SOM assy shows 5178834. Figure 5-18 BIOS Boot Screen of PM SOM and CM SOM 5-20 Section 5-4 - Main Board Detail
[Page 161] 5-4-4-2 BIOS Content • To login to Bios mode, press “Del” key in AN keyboard when bios boot screen comes up after system power on. • The password for bios login is “arirang” • PM SOM and CM SOM both has same BIOS contents. Only difference is CPU description in main bios screen and CPU configuration menu in advanced menu. • PM SOM BIOS screen shows the Pentium M CPU configuration. But the CM SOM BIOS screen shows the Celeron M CPU configuration. Main Advanced Boot Security Power Exit Main Advanced Boot Security Power Exit System Time [HH:MM:SS] System Time [HH:MM:SS] System Date [xxx MM:DD:YYYY] System Date [xxx MM:DD:YYYY] BIOS ID : P915RXXX BIOS ID : P915RXXX OEM Version : GEUKXXXX OEM Version : GEUKXXXX Processor : Intel® Pentium® M Processor 1.8 Processor : Intel® Celeron® M Processor 1.5 CPU Frequency : 1800MHz CPU Frequency : 150MHz System Memory : 1016MB System Memory : 508MB Board Information Board Information Product Revision : x.x Product Revision : x.x Serical Number : xxxxx Serical Number : xxxxx BC Firmware Rev : xxx BC Firmware Rev : xxx Boot Counter : xxx Boot Counter : xxx Running Time : xxxh Running Time : xxxh Figure 5-19 Main BIOS Screen of PM SOM and CM SOM Section 5-4 - Main Board Detail 5-21
[Page 162] Advanced Advanced ACPI Settings Advanced PCI/PnP Settings ACPI Aware O/S [Yes] Plug & Play OS [No] ACPI 2.0 Feature [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Suspend Mode [S1 (POS)] Allocate IRQ to SMBUS HC [Yes] USB Device Wakeup from S3/S4 [Disabled] Active Cooling Trip Point [Disabled] PCI IRQ Resource Exclusion Passive Cooling Trip Point [90 ℃ ] Critical Trip Point [110] PCI Interrupt Routing Watchdog ACPI Event [Shutdown] GPE1 Function [No Function] GPE2 Function [No Function] Advanced Advanced Graphics Configuration Configure advanced CPU settings Module Version : xxx Primary Video Device [Internal VGA] Internal VGA Mode Select [Enabled, 8MB] Manufacturer : Intel Aperture Size Select [256MB] Brand String : Intel® Pentium® M Processor 1.8 DVMT Mode Select [DVMT Mode] Frequency : 1.80GHz DVMT/FIXED Memory [128MB] FSB Speed : 400MHz Boot Display Device [CRT + LFP] Boot Display Preference [LEP SDVO-B SDVO-C] Cache L1 : 32KB Local Flat Type [Customized EDID] Cache L2 : 2048KB Local Flat Type Scaling [Expand Text & Grap] SDVO Port B Device [None] Intel® Speedstep ™ tech [Automatic] SDVO Port C Device [None] Max. CPU Frequency [1800Mhz] Backlight Control [100%] TV Standard [VBIOS-Default] Advanced Advanced Advanced Chipset Settings I/O Interface Configuration Memory Hole [Disabled] Onboard Audio Controller [AC97] IOAPC [Enabled] Onboard Ethernet Controller [Enabled] APIC ACPI SCI IRQ [Disabled] Onboard Floppy Controller [Disabled] C4 on C3 [Disabled] Floppy A [Disabled] DMI Power Management [Disabled] Serial Port 1 Configuration [Disabled] Serial Port 2 Configuration [Disabled] PCI Express Configuration Parallel Port Address [Disabled] PCI Express Port 1 [Disabled] PCI Express Port 2 [Disabled] PCI Express Port 3 [Disabled] PCI Express Port 4 [Disabled] VC1 for Azlia & Root Ports [Disabled] Figure 5-20 Advanced menu in BIOS 5-22 Section 5-4 - Main Board Detail
[Page 163] Advanced Advanced IDE Configuration USB Configuration ATA/IDE Configuration [Compatible] USB Devices Enabled : Legacy IDE Channels [SATA Pri, PATA Sec] 1 Keyboard Primary IDE Master [Hard Disk] USB Functions [6 USB ports] Primary IDE Slave [Not Detected] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] Secondary IDE Master [ATAPI CDROM] Legacy USB Support [Enabled] Secondary IDE Slave [Not Detected] USB Keyboard Legacy Support [Enabled] Third IDE Master [Not Detected] USB Mouse Legacy Support [Enabled] Third IDE Slave [Not Detected] USB Storage Device Support [Enabled] Fourth IDE Master [Not Detected] Port 64/60 Emulation [Disabled] Fourth IDE Slave [Not Detected] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [FullSpeed] Hard Disk Write Protect [Disabled] BIOS EHCI Hand-off [Enabled] IDE Defect Time Out (Sec) [35] USB Beep Message [Enabled] ATA(PI) 80Pin Cable Detection [Host & Device] USB Stick Default Emulation [Hard Disk] USB Mass Storage Reset Delay [20 sec] Advanced Advanced Keyboard/Mouse Configuration Configure Remote Access type and parameters Boot up Num-Lock [On] Remote Access [Disabled] Typematic Rate [Fast] Serial Port BIOS Update [Disabled] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Advanced Advanced Hardware Health Configuration Configure Watchdog Parameters H/W Health Function [Enabled] POST Watchdog [Disabled] Hardware Health Event Monitoring Board Temperature : xx/xxx Runtime Watchdog [Disabled] CPU Temperature : xx/xxx VcoreA : 1.3xxV VcoreB : 1.0xxV +3.3 In : 3.3xxV +5 VIn : 4.8 ~ 5V Vbat : 3.3xxV Figure 5-21 Advanced Menu in BIOS(cont’d) Section 5-4 - Main Board Detail 5-23
[Page 164] BIOS SET UP UTILITY Main Advanced Boot Security Power Exit Boot Device Priority Boot Priority Selection [Type Based] ST 1 Boot Device [USB CDROM] nd 2 Boot Device [Primary Master] rd 3 Boot Device [Disabled] th 4 Boot Device [Disabled] th 5 Boot Device [Disabled] th 6 Boot Device [Disabled] th 7 Boot Device [Disabled] th 8 Boot Device [Disabled] Boot Settings Configuration Quick Boot [Enabled] Quiet Boot [Enabled] Boot Display [Clear] Automatic Boot List Retry [Disabled] AddOn ROM Display Mode [Keep Current] Halt On Error [Disabled] Ht "Del" Message Display [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] PXE Boot to LAN [Disabled] Power Loss Control [Remain off] Figure 5-22 Boot menu in BIOS BIOS SET UP UTILITY Main Advanced Boot Security Power Exit Security Seetings Supervisor Password : Installed User Password : not Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [No Access] Change User Password Password Check [Setup] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Hard Disk Security Hard Disk Security User Passwords Hard Disk Security Master Passwords BIOS Update & Write Protection [Disabled] END-KEY Loads CMOS Default [Yes] Figure 5-23 Security Menu in BIOS 5-24 Section 5-4 - Main Board Detail
[Page 165] BIOS SET UP UTILITY Main Advanced Boot Security Power Exit Configure power management and control Power management/APM [Enabled] Suspend Time Out [Disabled] Video power Down Mode [Disabled] Hard Disk Power Down Mode [Disabled] Keyboard & PS/2 Mouse [Monitor] FDC/LPT/COM Ports [Monitor] Primary Master IDE [Monitor] Primary Slave IDE [Monitor] Secondary Master IDE [Monitor] Secondary Slave IDE [Monitor] Resume On Ring [Disabled] Resume On PME# [Disabled] Resume On RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Figure 5-24 Power Menu in BIOS Section 5-4 - Main Board Detail 5-25
[Page 166] Section 5-5 Top Console 5-5-1 Keyboard M M a a inK inK e e yb yb o o a a rd rd R R A A M M E E E E P P R R O O M M (3 (3 2 2 K K ) ) (3 (3 2 2 K K ) ) A A /NK /NK e e y y M M a a trix trix U U U T T ra ra c c kB kB a a ll ll S S S B B B U U S S B B C C P P L L D D M M ic ic ro ro c c o o n n tro tro lle lle r r M M o o d d eK eK e e y y P P P O O O E E n n c c o o d d e e rs rs W W W E E E R R R T T G G CS CS lid lid e e M M IC IC O O M M L L ig ig h h tin tin gL gL E E D D S S S u u u bke bke bke yb yb yb o o o a a a rd rd rd 4A 4A 4A rro rro rro w w w P P P O O O W W W E E E R R R E E E n n n c c c o o o d d d e e e rs rs rs K K K e e e ys ys ys B B B u u u tto tto tto n n n Figure 5-25 Keyboard Block Diagram LOGIQ™ P5 and LOGIQ™ A5 Keyboard assy consist of 2 assy, one is main keyboard assy and the other is sub keyboard assy. • Main keyboard : Has alpha numeric key, Trackball, Encoders, Mode key, TGC controller and lighting components. • Sub keyboard: Have five encoder with push function and 4 arrow keys. These keys are used for operation menu selection normally. • Difference between LOGIQ™ P5 keyboard and LOGIQ™ A5 keyboard is that the LOGIQ™ A5 keyboard doesn’t have the CFM key, CWD key, PDI key since the LOGIQ™ A5 doesn’t support CFM,CWD,PDI mode. But if the LOGIQ™ A5 has been upgrade with Color Upgrade kit, LOGIQ™ A5 should have same keyboard as LOGIQ™ P5. 5-26 Section 5-5 - Top Console
[Page 167] 5-5-1-1 KEYBOARD Signal I/O Main keyboard assy have two main external I/O connectors. One is for USB connection to scan system for main control signal interface, the other is for 5V power supply and momentary switch of scan system with hard drive operation indicator. (a)Sub keyboard CON1 USB (b)Main Keyboard Figure 5-26 Main Keyboard and Sub Keyboard connection to system Table 5-1 CON1 Connector Signal I/O Pin Number Pin Name Signal Path 1 HDD- L1SYSCON > Backplane > Main Keyboard> Sub Keyboard 2 HDD+ L1SYSCON > Backplane > Main Keyboard> Sub Keyboard 3 Momentary S/W L1SYSCON > Backplane > Main Keyboard> Sub Keyboard 4 GND 10 GND 11 GND 12 GND 13 KBD PWR APS/APS Pro > Backplane > Main Keyboard > Sub Keyboard 14 KBD PWR APS/APS Pro > Backplane > Main Keyboard> Sub Keyboard Section 5-5 - Top Console 5-27
[Page 168] 5-5-2 LOGIQ™ P5 Monitor II and LOGIQ™ A5 Monitor II LOGIQ™ P5 and LOGIQ™ A5 system has 15 inch LCD monitor with DVI-I interface. Monitor have also task lamp to light up the A/N key on keyboard assy. Both monitor of LOGIQ™ P5 and LOGIQ™ A5 have completely same function and same hardware assembly. Difference is front bezel color. LOGIQ™ P5 bezel color is dar steel blue, and LOGIQ™ A5 bezel color is white gray color. Figure 5-27 LOGIQ™ P5 Monitor and LOGIQ™ A5 Monitor 5-5-2-1 MONITOR Signal I/O Monitor assy has two main I/O connectors, One is for DVI-I connection to scan system to display the scan image, the other is for 110V/220V power supply. PWR DVI Figure 5-28 LCDMON connection in system 5-28 Section 5-5 - Top Console
[Page 169] 5-5-2-2 LCDMON control button function LCDMON assy has four control buttons; Lamp Power button, Left button, Menu button, Right button. 1 2 3 4 Figure 5-29 LCDMON control buttons Table 5-2 main functions of control key buttons No Name Main Functions 1 LAMP POWER Turns ON/OFF the Task Lamp in located bottom of LCDMON - Moves the highlight icon UP to the function that wants 2 LEFT - Increases the adjustment of the selected function - When the OSD menu is off, press once : Performs “Contrast-adjustment” function - When the OSD menu is off, press twice : Performs “Brightness-adjustment” function - When the OSD menu is off, press thee times 3 MENU : Performs “Dim-Brightness-adjustment” function - When the OSD menu is off, press more than 5 seconds : Performs “OSD-adjustment” function - When the OSD menu is on : Selects the function that user wants - Moves the highlight icon Down to the function that wants 4 RIGHT - Decreases the adjustment of the selected function Push “Menu” button to select the mode between Contrast, Brightness, and Dim Brightness mode. Then hold down “Left” and “Right” button until the value you want is set. The default values are 80% for the contrast, 80% for the Brightness, and 50% for the Dim-Brightness. Figure 5-30 Contrast, Brightness and Dim-Brightness adjustment Section 5-5 - Top Console 5-29
[Page 170] Section 5-6 ARP (Rear Panel) The LOGIQ™ P5 and LOGIQ™ A5 system has the I/O interfaces for peripherals in rear panel. ARP (Arirang Rear Panel) assy has connectors for peripheral. Composite in/out and S-VHS in/out is for the analog video interface for recording and playback of the VCR or DVD recorder. Audio in/out is for audio interface for audio recording and audio playback of the VCR or DVD recorder. The ARP assy also has a USB hub device for expending the USB ports which provide additional USB ports. The analog VGA signal also provide display interface for external VGA monitor. Figure 5-31 AEXP Block Diagram 5-30 Section 5-6 - ARP (Rear Panel)
[Page 171] 5-6-1 Input/Output Signals for peripheral Table 5-3 Input and Output signals for peripherals Signal Name Description Connection from/via/to Ethernet Standard TCP/IP Ethernet Syscon -> ARP -> 7P LAN Connector Syscon -> ARP -> LG Connector -> 15P DSUB External VGA VGA signal output for external VGA monitor Connector Foot Switch is mechanical switch that Foot Switch Foot Switch connector -> ARP(USB HUB) connect a signal to ground Composite out for DVD Recorder Compositor video signal output for DVDR Syscon -> ARP -> BNC Connector Composite in for DVD Recorder Compositor input from DVDR BNC Connector -> ARP -> Syscon S-VHS out for DVD Recorder S-VHS output signal for DVDR Recording Syscon -> ARP -> S-VHS Connector S-VHS in for DVD Recorder S-VHS input signal for DVDR playback S-VHS Connector -> ARP -> Syscon Audio out L/R for DVD Recorder Stereo audio output for DVDR Recording Syscon -> ARP -> RCA Jack Stereo audio input from DVDR for DVDR Audio In L/R for DVD Recorder RCA Jack -> ARP -> Syscon playback Syscon -> Backplane -> USB Connector(dual USB Port for BW Printer USB Port for BW Printer R_A type) -> Front/BW Printer ARP(USB HUB) -> USB Connector(R_A type) USB Port for ECG USB Port for ECG -> ECG ARP(USB HUB) -> USB Connector(R_B type) USB Port for 4D USB Port for 4D -> 4D ARP(USB HUB) -> USB Connector(S_A type) - USB Port for Digital Color Printer USB Port for Color Printer > Color Printer ARP(USB HUB) -> USB Connector(S_A type) - USB Port for DMC USB Port for DMC > DMC ARP(USB HUB) -> USB Connector(S_A type) - USB Port for USB Device USB Port for USB Device > USB Device USB Port for remote control of VCR/DVD ARP(USB HUB) -> USB Connector(S_A type) - USB Port for Remote Recorder > VCR Section 5-6 - ARP (Rear Panel) 5-31
[Page 172] Section 5-7 Power Diagrams 5-7-1 Overview The AC Power assy's main tasks are to supply powers the various internal subsystems and to isolate electrically the scanner from the on site Mains Power System. The voltage to peripherals can be confederated to either 110 VAC or 220 VAC. Internal circuit for AC power have the free voltage capability basically but, we should separate the group using of low voltage (100V~127V), high voltage (200V~240V), and mixed voltage (100V~120V for peripheral and 200V ~ 240V for system). 5-7-2 TRANSBOX(AC Power) Figure 5-32 AC Power Assy Block Diagram The mains cord has plugs in one side end. A male plug connects to the mains outlet on site. The mains voltage is routed to the Main Circuit Breaker, located on the rear side of the system. The Main Circuit Breaker is of the auto fuse type, if for some reason the current grows to high, the switch will automatically break the power. From the Main Circuit Breaker, the AC power is routed via the Mains Transformer and the Inrush Current Limiter to internal outlet connector for AC distribution. The Transformer is the galvanic barrier between the rest of the scanner and the on site AC Mains. Input voltage to the transformer can be either 220 VAC or 110 VAC. AC output of transformer is supplied to the APS/APS Pro through Inrush Current Limiter without additional control. AC output of transformer for LCDMON, 4D BOX(option), and peripheral controlled by the L1SYSCON according to the On/Off status of the system. 5-32 Section 5-7 - Power Diagrams
[Page 173] 5-7-3 APS/APS Pro (LV Power & HV Power) NOTE: HVL+ and HVL- are not available for APS PRO. DC Powers are supplied by APS and source of all assys in nest and nest fan, etc. To turn on the APS, the live power is needed as a standby power. This live power is generated from APS when the APS receive the AC input from the TRANSBOX. When the LP(live power) is supplied to the L1SYSCON and system momentary switch is pushed on, L1SYSCON make the LV_ON signal level into low to turn on the APS. After turning on the APS, the ACPC in TRANSBOX assy change the relay path on itself to supply stable AC power by using of D12V from APS. DC Output Capacity: • +D5VLP, 0.42A rms • +D5V, 6.5A rms • +D3.3V, 6.48A rms • +D12V, 3.36A rms • +D12VFAN, 0.94A rms • +A6V, 7.92A rms • -A6V, 1.52A rms • +A12V, 1.26A rms • -A12V, 0.6A rms APS supplies High Voltage power to activate high voltage transmit pulse and static supply bias voltage on high voltage mux and probe. When L1SYSCON makes the HV_STOP signal to low, the APS generates the HV module in APS. The SHV supplies +/-80V to the system constantly and the THVH and THVL supplies 0~+/- 60V individually. SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) control the level of THVH and THVL through the IIC interface. HV Output Capacity: • +SHV, +80V, 0.05A rms • - SHV, -80V, 0.05A rms • +THVH, 0V~+60V, 0.5A rms • - THVH, -60V~0V, 0.5A rms • +THVL, 0V~+60V, 0.5A rms • - THVL, -60V~0V, 0.5A rms Section 5-7 - Power Diagrams 5-33
[Page 174] 5-7-4 AC Power Outlet for Peripheral The ARP CONN ASSY and ARP CONN 220V ASSY are the ARP assemblies which interconnect external signal and power with the LOGIQ™ P5 system. Both of the assemblies are the same except the circuit breaker's current ratings depending on voltage of the system power source (See 'Safety' described below). 5-7-4-1 Safety • Circuit Breaker Table 5-4 Circuit Breaker Specification Power Voltage Peripheral Current Assembly Trip Time Reset Time Rating (V) Rating (A) 1 hour max. @ ARP CONN 110 4.0 110 second 5.4A, 25 degreeC 1hour max. @ ARP CONN 220V 220 2.0 180 second 3.5A, 25 degreeC • Electrical Isolation The ARP's Insite interface is electrically isolated from the system's internal circuit. The isolator's dielectric strength should be 500VAC RMS or higher within 1 minute (in compliance with IEC60601-1- 1). 5-34 Section 5-7 - Power Diagrams
[Page 175] Section 5-8 Cable Connection 5-8-1 Overview The cable connection can be separated to two group, internal harness and external cable connection for peripheral equipment. 5-8-2 Internal Cable Figure 5-33 Cable Connection - Internal The black box with white character is the label of the connector and the adjacent same label connector means that the two connectors should be connected each other. The dotted line means optional connection when the customer uses that option. Section 5-8 - Cable Connection 5-35
[Page 176] 5-8-3 Peripherals and Cable connection A DVD recorder, a Black & White Video Printer and a Color Printer may be installed onboard the scanner. These devices are connected to the External I/O (Rear Panel) or Front Panel in the case of B/ W Printer. LOGIQ™ P5 do not support analog printer but digital printer. 5-8-3-1 Cable Connection - BW printer Connect the Power cable and USB cable as shown in Figure 5-34. Figure 5-34 Cable Connection - Digital BW Printer 5-36 Section 5-8 - Cable Connection
[Page 177] 5-8-3-2 Cable Connection - Color Printer Connect USB cable listed below between the compatible Color Printer like SONY UP-D21MD and the console. Figure 5-35 Cable Connection - Digital Color Printer Section 5-8 - Cable Connection 5-37
[Page 178] 5-8-3-3 Cable Connection - DVD Recorder Connect the cable listed below between the SONY DVDR and the console. Audio cable with RCA Jack S-Video Cable S-Video Cable Audio cable with RCA Jack Figure 5-36 Cable Connection - DVD Recorder 5-38 Section 5-8 - Cable Connection
[Page 179] Section 5-9Filters 5-9-1 Filters The scanner contains the two filters located at a.) Right side of TRANSBOX to protect TRANSBOX and NEST from dust. b.) Left side of TRANSBOX to protect TRANSBOX and NEST from dust. (a) (b) Figure 5-37 Location of Air Filter 5-9-2 Fans The scanner contains the 5 fans at the following positions for producing an air flow. a.) One fan : On the surface of heat sink for SOM heat. b.) Two fans : At the top of the APS/APS Pro for APS/APS Pro heat. c.) Two fans : At the top of the NEST for NEST Assy and AC Power assy. (a) Cooling Fan on SYSCOMPM(SYSCONCM) (b) Cooling Fans on APS (c) Cooling FAN Assy for NEST Cooling Figure 5-38 Location of Fans Section 5-9 - Filters 5-39
[Page 180] Section 5-10 Service Platform 5-10-1 Introduction The Service Platform contains a set of software modules that are common to all ultrasound and cardiology systems containing a PC backend. This web-enabled technology provides linkage to e- Services, e-Commerce, and the iCenter, making GE’s scanners more e-enabled than ever. The Service Platform will increase service productivity and reduce training and service costs. 5-40 Section 5-10 - Service Platform
[Page 181] 5-10-2 Global Service User Interface (GSUI) 5-10-2-1 Internationalization The user interface provided by the service platform is designed for GE personnel and as such is in English only. There is no multi-lingual capability built into the Service Interface. 5-10-2-2 Service Login 1.) Touch Utility > Service . It will take about 1p seconds for activations. 2.) Make sure that CAPS is OFF for password entry performed later. 3.) The Service Login window for Service Platform will be shown on the monitor display. Figure 5-39 Login Screen for Global Service User Interface 5-10-2-3 Access / Security The service interface has different access and security user levels. Each user is only granted access to the tools that are authorized for their use. NOTE: A Service Dongle is necessary for use by GE Service when performing proprietary level diagnostics. OnLine Center access to the scanner requires the password and they must have ‘ Disruptive ’ permission and customer input to run diagnostics. Table 5-5 Service Login User Levels User Level Access Authorization Password Operator uls Authorized access to specified diagnostics, error logs and utilities. Same Administrator uls acquisition diagnostic tests as GE Service. External Service gogems Knowledge of a service level password. rotating security GE Service A physical Service Key (Dongle) required password NOTE: For a GE Field Engineer, the password changes at specific intervals. Access with the password is tied to the service key. Every access request, whether successful or not, will be logged into a service access log that is viewable to authorized users. Section 5-10 - Service Platform 5-41
[Page 182] 5-10-3 Service Home Page When the Service Interface is started, the Service Home Page appears. The Home Page contains the software revision along with the hardware inventory and the results of the latest System Health Information. The navigation bar at the top of the screen allows the user to select from several tools and utilities. Figure 5-40 GE Service Home Page 5-42 Section 5-10 - Service Platform
[Page 183] 5-10-4 Error Logs Tab From the Error Logs Tab the Log Viewer displays four categories with pull-down sub-menus and an Exit selection. The Service Interface allows scanner logs to be viewed by all service users. The Filter Error log is keyed to GE Service login access permissions and is not available to customer level analysis. The log entries are color-coded to identify the error level severity at a glance. Table 5-6 Log Entry Key Severity Error Level Color Code 1 Information Green 2 Warning Blue 3 Error Red The Service Interface supports the transfer of these logs to local destinations such as the MOD, and CD-ROM drive. Figure 5-41 Log Viewer / Logs / Log Entries Section 5-10 - Service Platform 5-43
[Page 184] 5-10-4-1 Logs The seven sub-menus of the Logs category are System, Infomatics, Temperature, Probe, Board, and DICOM. NOTE: Figure 5-41 provides a graphical example of the log entries for the System Logs . Log table headings for the different logs are as follows: • System Log entry headings include Time Stamp; Error Level; Package; and Error Message. • Infomatics Log entry headings include TimeStamp, Revision, PtID, PtDOB, PtSex, PtWeight, PtHeight, ExamID, Exam Category, ExamCurDate, and ExamStartTime. • Temperature Log entry headings include Time Stamp; Error Level; Package; L1SYSCON temperature sensor. • Probe Log entry headings include Time Stamp; Error Level; Package; Error Message; Severity; Revision; and three (3) new labels that have not yet been named. • DICOM Log entry headings include Time Stamp; Error Level; Package; and Error Message. 5-10-4-2 Exit The sub-menu, Exit Log Viewer , returns the user to the Service Desktop home page. Figure 5-42 Exit Log Sub-Menu 5-44 Section 5-10 - Service Platform
[Page 185] 5-10-5 Diagnostics NOTE: When Service Login for FRU Diagnostic, scan mode must be B-mode. WARNING WARNING Diagnostics should be performed with probes which have 128 or more elements. Detailed Diagnostic information is found in Diagnostics/Troubleshooting. Figure 5-43 GE Service Diagnostic Page NOTE: After finishing Diagnostic test, the system should be rebooted. 5-10-5-1 Diagnostics Execution Diagnostic tests are executable by both local and remote users. The Service Platform provides top-level diagnostic selection based on the user’s level and login access permissions. Remote access will require disruptive diagnostic permissions to run Acquisition diagnostics. 5-10-5-2 Diagnostic Reports Diagnostic tests return a report to the Service Platform. The platform retains the report and allows for future viewing of the diagnostic logs. 5-10-5-3 Proactive Diagnostics A system of self-monitoring is largely supported with the integration of iLinq . The scheduler, executive, user interfaces, and some of the proactive diagnostic functions are provided by iLinq . Other tasks should be provided by the product team. Section 5-10 - Service Platform 5-45
[Page 186] 5-10-6 Image Quality The Image Quality page is intended to contain tools for troubleshooting image quality issues. Figure 5-44 Image Quality Page 5-10-7 Calibration The Calibration page is intended to contain the tools used to calibrate the system. Figure 5-45 Calibration Page 5-46 Section 5-10 - Service Platform
[Page 187] 5-10-8 Configuration The Configuration page is intended to be used to setup various configuration files on the system. The Service Platform is the access and authorization control for remote access to the configuration subsystem. The enable/disable of software options can be done from this Configuration page. Figure 5-46 Configuration Page Section 5-10 - Service Platform 5-47
[Page 188] 5-10-8-1 Questra Agent Configuration These feature that allow the customer to register the system to the GE OnLine Center are available for Warranty and Contract customers only. 5-10-8-1-1 Device Information Device name and CRM No. are displayed by default. 5-10-8-1-2 Advanced Configuration Select Enterprise Server to check out to 5-10-8-1-3 Proxy Configuration. If Proxy is used in the site, it should be filled proper Proxy Server Address and Proxy Server Port. And Press “Submit Changes” button to finish check out process Figure 5-47 Proxy Configuration NOTE: The system is needed to reboot to apply settings. 5-48 Section 5-10 - Service Platform
[Page 189] 5-10-9 Utilities The Utilities page contains several miscellaneous tools. Figure 5-48 GE Service Utilities Page Figure 5-49 Customer Utilities Page Section 5-10 - Service Platform 5-49
[Page 190] 5-10-10 Replacement The Replacement page is intended to contain the tools used to track replacement parts used in the system. Figure 5-50 Part Replacement Page 5-10-11 PM The PM page is intended to contain the tools used in periodic maintenance of the system. Figure 5-51 Planned Maintenance Page 5-50 Section 5-10 - Service Platform
[Page 191] 5-10-12 Remote Software/Option Installation and Updates The Service Platform provides for remote software downloads. Any file transferred to the scanner will be in the form of an installation package. The actual content of the installation package is dependent on each product. Software installation is simple and automated with a Graphic User Interface (GUI), where applicable. Supports software upload via remote transmission Supports software upload via Service Platform Options can be activated permanently Options can be activated for a timed period Options can be limited to a number of uses Options that expire must give notice to the user that the option has expired 5-10-12-1 Remote System Shutdown and Restart The Service Platform provides the ability to restart the system as per standard shutdown/startup procedures. Remote shutdown will only be provided if a software-controlled shutdown exists on the scanner. Scanner system restart is always accessible from the OLC. 5-10-12-2 File and/or Image Transfer The Service Platform supports file transfers and archived image transfers to the OnLine Center. The Service Platform provides interfaces of the displayed images for transfer to the OLC. Section 5-10 - Service Platform 5-51
[Page 192] Section 5-11RFS (Service For Request) 5-11-1 General This describes general RFS functionality. 1.) RFS function is a call for service to be used by customer or FE directly from the system instead of calling GE Cares. 5-11-2 System Checkout Procedure If the system is checked out already, skip 5-8-2) System Checkout Procedure and proceed from 5-8- 3) Sending RFS Procedure . 1.) Check if the system is connected to the network. 2.) Go to “Utility” 3.) Press “Service” 4.) Log on to the Service Platform with a password. 5.) Press “Configuration” 6.) Press “InSite ExC Agent Configuration” Figure 5-52 Agent Configuration 5-52 Section 5-11 - RFS (Service For Request)
[Page 193] 5-11-2 System Checkout Procedure (cont’d) All bold fields should be filled 7.) Device Name and CRM No are pre-populated and can not be changed. 8.) Verify that “Send” button is enabled. 9.) Select Continent and Country 10.)Put City, State, and Institution 11.)Select “Product” for the Enterprise. 12.)If Proxy needs to be configured, select “Enable” for the Proxy filed and input IP address and Port number. 13.)Press “Submit Changes”. “Please Wait” message is displayed while the system is checking out. Figure 5-53 Figure 5-53 Please Wait 14.)Wait until following screen displays. (Figure 5-54) Figure 5-54 Configuration done 15.)Configuration is complete. 16.)Close the Service Platform. Section 5-11 - RFS (Service For Request) 5-53
[Page 194] 5-11-3 Sending RFS Procedure Service Platform should be turned off in order to open RFS window. System must be connected to network, configured and checked out to be able to send the RFS 1.) Right Click on “Connect to GE” icon. Figure 5-55 Contact GE Icon All the fields that are marked with asterisk * are mandatory and should be filled in order to send the RFS request to On Line Center . 2.) Fill out the Last name, First name, and Phone number. (Figure 5-56) 3.) Extension, E-mail, and Other system ID fields are optional. 4.) Select Problem Type. If Problem is about “No Boot”, “No Image”, “Error message”, “Lock up”, “Probe”, “Peripherals”, select “ Service ” for the Problem Type. If Problem is about “Presets”, “Reports”, “Measurements”, or “Probe not recognized”, select “ Applications ” for the Problem Type. 5.) Select the Problem Area. 6.) Write the detailed problem description in the Problem Description field. Figure 5-56 RFS window 5-54 Section 5-11 - RFS (Service For Request)
[Page 195] 5-11-3 Sending RFS Procedure (cont’d) 7.) Then the “Send” button is enabled. Figure 5-57 RFS send enabled 8.) Click “Send” button and wait for confirmation window with reference number on the screen. 9.) Verify that “confirmation message” pops up in the screen. 10.)RFS request is completed. 11.)On Line Center will contact the customer shortly by phone. Section 5-11 - RFS (Service For Request) 5-55
[Page 196] Section 5-12Machine RFS 5-12-1 General This describes general MRFS (Machine RFS) functionality. 1.) MRFS function is an automatic call for service from the system to the OLC when system detects high temperature or high or low voltage. 5-12-2 Enabling MRFS NOTE: In order to enable MRFS, System must be connected to network and should be checked out to a product server. Default MRFS user should also be set. 1.) If a system is not already checked out, the system should be checked out to a product server. Refer to 5-11-2 - System Checkout Procedure. 2.) MRFS function is an automatic call for service from the system to the OLC when system detects high temperature or high or low voltage. 3.) Right Click on “Connect to GE” icon. Figure 5-58 Contact GE Icon 4.) When RFS window pops up, click on “Users” tab. Figure 5-59 User tab 5-56 Section 5-12 - Machine RFS
[Page 197] 5-12-2 Enabling MRFS (cont’d) 5.) Press “Add User”. Figure 5-60 Add User All the fields that are marked with asterisk * are mandatory and should be filled 6.) When fields with asterisk are filled, “Add User” button is enabled. Figure 5-61 Add User 7.) Press “Add User” button. Section 5-12 - Machine RFS 5-57
[Page 198] 5-12-2 Enabling MRFS (cont’d) 8.) check the checkbox next to the name to set to the default contact. Then Press “Set Default Machine Contact” button, Figure 5-62 Set Default Machine Contact 9.) Now the MRFS is enabled. 10.)When system detects high temperature or abnormal voltage, the system will send the RFS to the OLC automatically. 5-58 Section 5-12 - Machine RFS
[Page 199] Section 5-13Fast Polling 5-13-1 General This describes Fast Polling feature that will change the polling rate to 15 seconds for 10 minutes. 5-13-2 Enabling Fast Polling 1.) Right Click on “Connect to GE” icon. Figure 5-63 2.) Pressing “OK” will change the polling rate to 15 seconds for 10 minutes. Figure 5-64 Agent Configuration Section 5-13 - Fast Polling 5-59
[Page 200] This page was intentionally left blank. 5-60 Section 5-13 - Fast Polling
[Page 201] Chapter 6 Service Adjustments Section 6-1 Overview 6-1-1 Purpose of this chapter 6 This section describes how to test and adjust the scanner. These tests are optional. You may use them to check the system for errors. Table 6-1 Contents in chapter Section Description Page Number 6-1 Overview 6-1 6-2 Regulatory 6-1 6-3 Monitor Adjustments 6-2 Section 6-2 Regulatory Verify, where applicable, that any regulatory information or tests required by national law are present and accounted for, and any regulatory tests required by national law are performed and documented. Section 6-1 - Overview 6-1
[Page 202] Section 6-3 Monitor Adjustments 6-3-1 Rotate and tilt the monitor The monitor position can be adjusted for easy viewing. - The monitor can be rotated around its central pivot point. - The monitor can be tilted for the optimum viewing angle. - the monitor can be flipped up and down. NOTE: When moving the system, flip down the monitor to its lowest possible position to improve stability. Figure 6-1 LCD monitor Flip up and down 6-2 Section 6-3 - Monitor Adjustments
[Page 203] 6-3-2 Brightness and Contrast Adjusting the monitor's contrast and brightness is one of the most important factors for proper image quality. If these controls are set incorrectly, the Gain, TGC, Dynamic Range and even Power Output may have to be changed more often than necessary to compensate. The proper setup displays a complete gray scale. The lowest level of black should just disappear into the background and the highest white should be bright, but not saturated. To adjust the contrast: 1.) Press the Toggle button on the display monitor once. 2.) Press the Adjustment (+) button to increase contrast. Press the Adjustment (-) button to decrease contrast. 3.) The amount of contrast is shown on a slide bar on the screen. To adjust the brightness: 4.) Press the Toggle button on the display monitor twice. 5.) Press the Adjustment (+) button to increase brightness. Press the Adjustment (-) button to decrease brightness. 6.) The amount of brightness is shown on a slide bar on the screen. Figure 6-2 Brightness and Contrast 1. Contrast Indicator 2. Brightness Indicator 3. Dim Brightness Indicator 4. Light Button 5. Adjustment (-) Button 6. Toggle Button 7. Adjustment (+) Button Record any changes to the final brightness and contrast settings and leave this information with the system. Generally speaking, do not change the controls once they have been set. Once set, the display then becomes the reference for the hard copy device(s). NOTE: After readjusting the monitor's Contrast and Brightness, readjust all preset and peripheral settings. Section 6-3 - Monitor Adjustments 6-3
[Page 204] 6-3-3 LCD Plastic filter 6-3-3-1 Tools • Common Phillips screwdrivers • Stubby screwdriver (Flat tip and Cross tip) 6-3-3-2 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the Monitor cover set. Refer to the 8-2-2 "Monitor cover set" on page 8-5 and the figure below. 2.) Remove the LCD Plastic filter. Figure 6-3 Removing the LCD plastic filter 3.) Put the LCD plastic filter on the LCD monitor after detaching the tape of the LCD plastic filter. Figure 6-4 Putting the LCD plastic filter on the LCD monitor 6-4 Section 6-3 - Monitor Adjustments
[Page 205] 6-3-3-2 Removal procedure (cont’d) 4.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 6-2 Functional Tests 4-3-1 Power On/Boot Up 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown “Service Manual, Direction LCD plastic filter Function Validation 5394141, Rev 2+, 6-3-3. Equipment passed all 4-8-2 Procedure required tests and is ready for use. “ 10-5-5 Physical Inspection 6-3-3-3 Mounting Procedure 1.) Install the LCD monitor cover parts in the reverse order of removal procedure. Refer to the 8-2-2 "Monitor cover set" on page 8-5. 2.) Put the label on the rear of the LCD monitor. Figure 6-5 Putting the label on the rear of the LCD monitor Section 6-3 - Monitor Adjustments 6-5
[Page 206] 6-3-4 Flexible LCD arm - locking mechanism Flexible LCD arm’s rotation movement can be adjusted by using the LCD arm’s locking mechanism. To unlock the LCD arm: 1.) Pull the LCD arm toggle knob and turn clockwise to unlock the LCD arm. Figure 6-6 Unlocking the Flexible LCD arm To lock the LCD arm : 1.) Turn counter clockwise and push the LCD arm toggle knob and to lock the LCD arm. Figure 6-7 Locking the Flexible LCD arm 6-6 Section 6-3 - Monitor Adjustments
[Page 207] Section 6-4 Trackball Cleaning The trackball on the keyboard need to be cleaning periodically. 1.) Open the trackball Figure 6-8 Open Trackball Remove dust inside of bucket Figure 6-9 Trackball Hole Section 6-4 - Trackball Cleaning 6-7
[Page 208] This page was intentionally left blank. 6-8 Section 6-4 - Trackball Cleaning
[Page 209] Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting Section 7-1 Overview 7-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 7 This section describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help maintain image quality and system operation. Basic host, system, and board level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied. Some Service Tools may be run at the application level. NOTE: Be sure to disable ECG function before performing Diagnostic function. NOTE: Make sure that convex or linear probe is connected before the system starts. (sector probe is not applicable for the service diagnostics) Table 7-1 Contents in Chapter 7 Section Description Page Number 7-1 Overview 7-1 7-2 Gathering Trouble Data 7-2 7-3 Screen Captures 7-4 7-4 Diagnostics 7-8 7-5 Common Diagnostics 7-9 7-6 LED Descriptions 7-20 7-7 Trouble Shooting Tree 7-22 Section 7-1 - Overview 7-1
[Page 210] Section 7-2 Gathering Trouble Data 7-2-1 Overview There may be a time when it would be advantageous to capture trouble images and system data (logs) for acquisition through remote diagnostics (InSite) or to be sent back to the manufacturer for analysis. There are different options to acquire this data that would give different results. 7-2-2 Collect Vital System Information The following information is necessary in order to properly analyze data or images being reported as a malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer: - Product Name = LOGIQ™ P5 From the Utility>System>About screen: Applications Software - Software Version - Software Part Number System Image Software - Image Part Number - Image Date 7-2 Section 7-2 - Gathering Trouble Data
[Page 211] 7-2-3 Collect a Trouble Image with Logs If the system should malfunction, press the Alt-D keys simultaneously. This will collect a screen capture of the image monitor, system presets and the following logs: - Keyboard Shadow Log - Error Logs - Crash Log - Power Supply - Temperature NOTE: Power Supply and Temperature logs are not currently being updated by the LOGIQ™ P5. This Alt-D function is available at all times. Figure 7-1 ALT-D Dialog Box When Alt-D is pressed, a menu box appears that allows for: - A place to enter a description of the problem - A choice to store to a pre-formatted CD-R/DVD, USB or Network storage. The subsequent file is compressed and time stamped. The screen capture is a bitmap which eliminates the possibility of artifacts from compression. Section 7-2 - Gathering Trouble Data 7-3
[Page 212] Section 7-3 Screen Captures There may be times when the customer or field engineer will want to capture a presentation on the screen so it may be recovered by the OnLine Center through InSite. This is accomplished by first saving the image(s) to the clipboard using a Print Key. The P2 key is the factory default print key to accomplish a secondary screen capture. However, the default is for the video area only or the customer may have customized the P2 Key function. Therefore, screen capture should involve the following steps: 1.) Check and record any custom settings for the Print2 button. 2.) Set the Print2 button to Whole Screen, Secondary Capture. 3.) Capture the required screens to the Hard Drive or CD-R / DVD-R. 4.) Restore the Print2 button to it’s original settings. 7-3-1 Check and Record the P2 Key Function Check the function of the Print2 Key in the event that the customer may have made some custom settings. 1.) Select Utilit y from the FrontPanel. 2.) Select Connectivity from the Menu. 3.) Select the Buttons tab on the Connectivity screen. 4.) In the Button field, select Print2. The Connectivity/Buttons Screen will be displayed like the one shown in Figure 7-2. Figure 7-2 Buttons Set Up Screen P2 is the factory default Screen Capture Key. If it is not set to Whole Screen or Screen Capture, as shown in Figure 7-2, proceed to step 5 to record the customer’s custom settings. 7-4 Section 7-3 - Screen Captures
[Page 213] 7-3-1 Check and Record the P2 Key Function (cont’d) 5.) In the “Physical Print Buttons”box, record the followings. * Format * Image Frames * Capture Area * Compression 6.) In the “Printflow View”, record the print flow associated with the Print2 Button. 7-3-2 Setting the P2 Key to Screen Capture If the P2 Key is not set to screen capture: 1.) While on the Connectivity screen, with the Buttons tab displayed, go to the drop down selection menu in the Destinations section. 2.) Ensure that Capture Area is set to Whole Screen, secondary Capture and None Image Compression. 3.) The P2 Key should now be set up for whole screen capture, sending the screens to the image buffer (clipboard). Section 7-3 - Screen Captures 7-5
[Page 214] 7-3-3 Capturing a Screen The following is a generic process to capture any screen from the scanner: 1.) Navigate to and display the image/screen to be captured. 2.) Press P2 . This will place a snapshot of the screen on the “clipboard” displayed at the bottom of the scan image display. Clipboard Thumbnails Menu Figure 7-3 Select Image to Capture 3.) Highlight the snapshot to be stored to the system hard drive or CD-R / DVD-R. 4.) Select Menu on the right side of the image screen, then highlight and select SAVE AS. Save As Figure 7-4 Menu > Save As 7-6 Section 7-3 - Screen Captures
[Page 215] 7-3-3 Capturing a Screen (cont’d) Figure 7-5 Save Dialog Box 5.) A Save dialog box will be opened. Choose the destination as the archive location to save the image on the CD-R/DVD-R, USB or network storage. 7-3-4 Reset the P2 Key to Customer’s Functionality If the customer had programmed the P2 Key to a function other than screen capture, restore that functionality recorded in section 7-3-1 on page 4. refer to Figure 7-2. 1.) Select Utilit y from the Keyboard. 2.) Select Connectivity from the Menu. 3.) Select the Buttons tab on the Connectivity screen. 4.) In the Button field, select Print2. 5.) In the “Physical Print Buttons”box, select the options recorded in step 5, Section 7-3-1. : * Format * Image Frames * Capture Area * Compression Section 7-3 - Screen Captures 7-7
[Page 216] Section 7-4 Diagnostics As described in - Components and Functions (Theory), the service platform uses a web-based user interface (UI) to provide access to common service components. The Diagnostic home page displays a listing of test categories consisting of Common Diagnostics, and LOGIQ™ P5 Diagnostics. Expand the desired main category to select groups or individual tests. Figure 7-6 Global Service User Interface Diagnostic Screen 7-8 Section 7-4 - Diagnostics
[Page 217] Section 7-5 Common Diagnostics Common Diagnostics is the first main heading under the GSUI heading of Diagnostics. Figure 7-7 shows the top level menu choices under Common Diagnostics. The subheadings and their respective diagnostic/troubleshooting menu choices are called out and described in the sections below. Figure 7-7 Common Diagnostics 7-5-1 Utilities Provides two selections: 7-5-1-1 Disruptive Mode Allows you to enable or disable disruptive mode troubleshooting. If you are accessing through InSite, this can only be enabled with the customer/operator confirmation. 7-5-1-2 System Shutdown Allows for system shutdown from the diagnostic menu. Select to retain Disruptive Mode or Not. After submitting to or shutdown a confirmation screen gives one last chance to confirm or cancel the request. Section 7-5 - Common Diagnostics 7-9
[Page 218] 7-5-2 PC Diagnostics (Non-Interactive Tests) 7-5-2-1 CPU Tests • CPU Test (All) - This diagnostic performs a battery of tests on your CPU to ensure it is working properly. The following tests are a complete list of the tests performed on the PC's CPU. • CPU: Registers - The CPU registers are tested using the default test patterns defined above. On 32 bit CPUs, the extended registers are also checked. If errors are detected, the failed registers are listed. • CPU: Arithimetics - Tests the proper function of arithmetic commands ADC, ADD, DEC, DIV, IDIV, IMUL, INC, MUL, SBB and SUB with 16 and 32-bit operands. If errors are detected, the failed commands and operands are listed. • CPU: String Operations - Tests the proper operation of string commands LODS, MOVS, SCAS and STOS with 8, 16 and 32-bit operands. If errors are detected, the failed commands and operands are listed. • CPU: Logical Operations - Tests the proper operation of logical operations AND, NOT, OR and XOR with 16 and 32-bit operands. If errors are detected, the failed operands are listed. • CPU: Math Registers - Tests coprocessor register stack, pointers and commands FLDLZ, FLDPI, FLDLN2, FLDLG2, FLDL2T, FLDL2E and FLD1. If errors are detected, the failed steps and commands are listed. • CPU: Math Commands - Tests coprocessor commands FBLD/FBSTP, FLD/FST, FXCH, FCOM, FICOM, FTST, FXAM and FUCOM. If errors are detected, the failed instructions are listed. • CPU: Math Arithimetics - • CPU: Transcendental - Tests coprocessor transcendental commands F2XM1, FPATAN, FPTAN, FYL2X, FYL2XP1, FCOS, FSIN and FSINCOS. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed. • CPU: MMX Arithmetic - Tests MMX commands PADD, PSUB, PMUL and PMADD. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed. • CPU: MMX Logical - Tests MMX commands PAND, PANDN, POR and PXOR. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed. • CPU: MMX Shift - Tests MMX commands PSLL and PSRL. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed. • CPU: MMX Data Transfer - Tests MMX commands MOVD and MOVQ. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed. • CPU: MMX Misc. - Tests MMX commands PCMPEQ, PCMPGT, PACKSS, PACKUS, PUNPCK and PUNPCK. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed. 7-10 Section 7-5 - Common Diagnostics
[Page 219] 7-5-2-2 Hard Drive Tests • Hard Drive Test (All) - The Hard Drive test examines your hard disk drive using a series of tests to ensure that your drive can perform its functions. The following tests are performed on your hard drive to ensure the hard disk controller and the drive mechanism are working correctly. The disk surface itself is also checked. NOTE: The hard drive test can take over ten minutes. • Hard Drive: Linear Seek - Hard disk drive heads are moved from track 0 to the maximum track one track at a time. • Hard Drive: Random Seek - Hard disk drive heads are moved randomly several hundred times. • Hard Drive: Funnel Seek - Hard disk drive heads are moved in a funnel fashion, i.e., from the first track on the drive to the last, then to the second track, then to the second to last track, then to the third track, and so on. • Hard Drive: Surface Scan - This test scans for surface defects on the hard disk drive. 7-5-2-3 Memory Tests • Memory Test (All) - Eighteen test patterns are used to test memory locations. If errors are detected, the address of the block the error was detected in is shown. During testing, these diagnostics will also look out for parity errors and other exceptions. These will be added to the Test Log as errors if encountered. • Memory: Pattern Test - PC-Doctor uses several test patterns to test as much memory as possible. • Memory: Parity Test - This test checks for parity errors on the memory bus during intensive string transfer operations. If an error is detected, the address of the failed block is displayed. Section 7-5 - Common Diagnostics 7-11
[Page 220] 7-5-2-4 CD/DVD Drive Test NOTE: Although the global aspect of the diagnostics allow for DVD testing, the LOGIQ™ P5 does not have a DVD drive.(Option) • DVD/CD-ROM Test (All) - The CD-ROM/DVD test examines the CD-ROM/DVD drive to make sure it is working properly. You may use either a data CD-ROM disk or a DVD disk for these tests. You cannot use an audio CD, such as a regular commercial music CD, with this test. NOTE: The PC is sometimes slow in recognizing a newly inserted CD-ROM/DVD disk. It is best to wait a few seconds after inserting a disk into the drive before you run any tests. There are two types of CD-ROM/DVD tests: 1.) Seek Tests: Ensures the drive can access all locations on a disk, and 2.) Read Tests: Ensures the drive can read all the data. • DVD/CD-ROM: Linear Seek - Tests that all locations can be accessed on a CD-ROM or DVD disk in a linear fashion, starting from the first to the last. • DVD/CD-ROM: Random Seek - Tests that all locations can be accessed on a CD-ROM or DVD disk randomly. • DVD/CD-ROM: Funnel Seek - Tests that all locations can be accessed on a CD-ROM or DVD disk in a funnel fashion, starting from the first then moving to the last, then, at the next pass starting from the second location then moving to the next to the last, and so on • DVD/CD-ROM: Linear Read - Reads the data on the CD-ROM or DVD in a linear fashion, starting from the start to the end. • DVD/CD-ROM: Random Read - Reads the data on the CD-ROM or DVD randomly. 7-5-2-5 Video Test • Video Test (All) - This diagnostic tests your system's video capabilities. This involves testing the video memory with 18 patterns, testing your graphics acceleration, and text output. You will see these tests being performed on your monitor. You can cancel this test at any time by hitting the Escape (Esc) key. The following tests are performed on your monitor: • Video: Memory - Video memory is tested by filling the video buffer with 18 test patterns, one pattern at a time. The tests will fill the entire screen with a single color. • Video: Data Transfer - This tests the graphics acceleration part of your video controller. These tests will appear on your screen as black and white concentric squares and rectangles of various sizes and colors. If errors are detected, the locations of the problems are displayed. • Video: Text Output - This test prints a text string in random sizes and colors to tests your video device driver and video controller. 7-12 Section 7-5 - Common Diagnostics
[Page 221] 7-5-2-6 USB Test (Not yet supported) • USB Test (All) • USB Configuration Test • USB Devices Test 7-5-2-7 PCI Board Configuration Test A bus is a set of circuits, wires or connectors which connect the various components of your system. A PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus is a fast standard bus which is common in Pentium systems. Various tests are run on the PCI bus in order to ensure it is working up to speed. The motherboard is scanned to verify the configuration space and to make sure the diagnostics can communicate with the board. 7-5-2-8 Network Test Section 7-5 - Common Diagnostics 7-13
[Page 222] 7-5-3 PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests) 7-5-3-1 Keyboard Test 1.) Click Keyboard Test from the PC Diagnostics interactive tests menu. 2.) Click the Test button. A keyboard layout is displayed on which you can see the keys of your keyboard. 3.) Press each key on your keyboard once and make sure that the corresponding keys on-screen are removed from view. If a key on-screen is not removed, that key may be damaged and you may have to have your keyboard repaired or replaced. 4.) To reset the keyboard, click the Reset Keys button. 5.) To exit the test, click Close. 7-5-3-2 Audio Test 1.) Click Audio Test from the PC Diagnostic interactive tests menu. 2.) To test the WAV sound reproduction click Left Channel, Right Channel, or Both Channels to test your speakers. You should hear a guitar chord. 3.) To test MIDI sound reproduction click the button under MIDI. You should hear a few seconds of recorded music. 4.) Click on the Beep button. You should hear a low “beep” from your PC. If no sound is produced in these tests, choose the More Info button in the Audio Test dialog box for information about possible causes and solutions. 7-14 Section 7-5 - Common Diagnostics
[Page 223] 7-5-3-3 Mouse Test 1.) Click Mouse Test from the PC Diagnostic interactive tests menu. The Mouse test dialog box presents you like Figure 7-8. Figure 7-8 Mouse Test 2.) The Mouse coordinates are displayed when the trackball is moved. 3.) Press the right Button (Set B/Pause Button) on the front panel, the Mouse which is turned to Yellow on the right side is shown on the monitor. Figure 7-9 Section 7-5 - Common Diagnostics 7-15
[Page 224] 4.) Left Button is the same as above. 7-16 Section 7-5 - Common Diagnostics
[Page 225] 7-5-4 FRU Test 7-5-4-1 SYSCONPM/SYSCONCM These programs are provided for testing the SYSCONPM/SYSCONCM board. Table 7-2 FRU Test, SYSCONPM/SYSCONCM Diagnostics Menu Full Test Performs all of the L1 SYSCON board tests listed below All None Assy Revision Test Send test pattern to write to EEPROM and read All None Displays the board revision of the SYSCONPM/SYSCONCM board The CL1TRX, P3RLY, optional ACWD boards are connected to the SYSCONPM/ SYSCONCM via the USC bus. USC I/F Test All None The DSP in SYSCONPM/SYSCONCM accesses the boards above to check if the USC bus is connected properly to each board. Checks if The DSP in SYSCONPM/SYSCONCM accessed the boards, CL1TRX/ FEBUS Test All None BL1TRX and ACWD, via the FEBUS. TRIG Test Check the trigger max, min and ever interval All None PCI I/F Test Sends the command to the DSP to check the SDRAM in SYSCONPM/SYSCONCM All None DSP Memory Test Sends the command to the DSP to check the internal DSP memory All None Board Temperature Read SYSCON Board Temperature. All None GE FE CHACOM I/F Test Sends the command to read / write data from DSP to CHACOM None Only Section 7-5 - Common Diagnostics 7-17
[Page 226] 7-5-4-2 CL1TRX/BL1TRX These programs are provided for testing the CL1TRX /BL1TRZboard. Table 7-3 FRU Test, CL1TRX/BL1TRX Diagnostics Menu Performs all of the CL1TRX/BL1TRX board tests listed below Full Test All None Assy Revision Send test pattern to write to EEPROM and read All None Test Displays the board revision of the CL1TRX/BL1TRX board Checks if the DSP in SYSCONPM/SYSCONCM can access the CL1TRX/BL1TRX USC I/F Test All None boards via USB bus. Checks if the DSP in SYSCONPM/SYSCONCM can access the CL1TRX/BL1TRX FEBUS Test All None board via FE bus. HV Test Read HV Power All None Sends the test data High, Mid, Low level to PGC Register, then CL1TRX/BL1TRX PGC Test All None read result data and verify it. Sends the test data High, Mid, Low level to Test wave Register, then CL1TRX/ TEST Wave Test All None BL1TRX read result data and verify it. TRX Data Send the command to read / write to TRX data memory. All None Memory Test The DSP in L1SYSCON reads and writes the OQCARD registers in CL1TRX/BL1TRX OQX2 Test All None via FE bus. The DSP in L1SYSCON reads and writes the TPG2 registers in CL1TRX/BL1TRX via TPG2 Test FE bus. Send test wave pattern to the input stage of preamp on CL1TRX/BL1TRX, perform 64 RX Channel Test channel scanning, Read raw data, and analyze it. Send test wave pattern to the CL1TRX/BL1TRX, read returned small signal, Read the TX Channel Test data and analyze it. Note: APS/APS Pro HV test is required prior to the TRX TX channel test. 7-18 Section 7-5 - Common Diagnostics
[Page 227] 7-5-4-3 P3RLY/P2RLY These programs are provided for testing the P3RLY/P2RLY board. NOTE: A Convex Probe is needed for RLY Channel Test. Table 7-4 FRU Test, P3RLY Diagnostics Menu GE FE Full Test Performs all of the P3RLY/P2RLY board tests listed below None Only Assy Revision Send test pattern to write to EEPROM and readDisplays the board revision of the All None Test P3RLY/P2RLY board Checks if the DSP in SYSCONPM/SYSCONCM can access the P3RLY/P2RLY board GE FE FEBUS Test None via FE bus. Only GE FE SHV Test Send the command to SHV resister in P3RLY/P2RLY board to read SHV status. None Only GE FE OPEN Test Checks whether probe connected or not on P3RLY/P2RLY. Probe Only Checks if the 8 bits of the Probe Code in the probe connector is properly connected. PROBE CODE If connected probe is available, display code and Probe name. 7-5-4-4 ACWD These programs are provided for testing the ACWD board. Table 7-5 FRU Test, ACWD Diagnostics Menu Full Test Performs all of the ACWD board test listed below All None Assy Revision Test EEPROM.Send test pattern to write to EEPROM and readDisplays the board All None TEst revision of the ACWD board USC Interface Checks if the DSP in SYSCONPM/SYSCNCM can access the ACWD boards via USB All None Test bus. Allows SYSCONPM/SYSCNCM to access FE bus interface in the ACWD in order to FEBUS Test check if FE bus line is normal. Send the command to perform CW scanning, read IQ data from assigned memory, IQ Data Read analyze the data with FFT algorithm. Probe Checks whether ACWD probe connected or not. Connection Generate test pattern, perform 32 channel scanning in ACWD, read the data and Channel Test analyze it. Section 7-5 - Common Diagnostics 7-19
[Page 228] 7-5-4-5 APS/APS Pro These programs are provided for testing the APS board. Table 7-6 FRU Test, APS Diagnostics Menu Full Test Performs all of the APS test listed below All None HV voltage Read HV voltage and display HV values. All None stability LV voltage Read HV voltage and display LV values. All None stability 7-5-4-6 FRONT PANEL These programs are provided for testing the Front panel. Table 7-7 FRU Test, ACWD Diagnostics Menu FRONT PANEL Performs all of the Front Panel tests listed below All None Overall FRONT PANEL Test EEPROM.Send test pattern to write to EEPROM and read.Displays the board All None Revision revision of the Front Panel. ROM Makes a check of internal ROM check sum. All None Writes / reads data over all address of RAM and also makes a check of control RAM All None program. EEPROM Writes / reads data over all address of EEPROM All None SWITCH Test switch in Front Panel. All None Rotate or depress any key, Verify that it is displayed on the CRT monitor. To finish the Echoback All None test, press “Abort” key and wait until complete message appears. NOTE: For the EchoBack test, it is highly recommended to press a button less than two times per a second. NOTE: When Abort button is pressed to finish EchoBack test, you have to wait until “Completed.” message is displayed to proceed other tests. 7-20 Section 7-5 - Common Diagnostics
[Page 229] Section 7-6 LED Descriptions 7-6-1 CL1TRX/BL1TRX Assy The CL1TRX/BL1TRX Assy is located at the No.1 slot in the NEST Assy. Table 7-8 LEDs on CL1TRX/BL1TRX Assy LED Descriptions Normal State DS1 FPGA configuration OK status Indicator Normally Blinking 7-6-2 P3RLY/P2RLY Assy The P3RLY Assy is located at the front of the NEST Assy. Table 7-9 LEDs on P3RLY/P2RLY Assy LED Descriptions Normal State D1 MUX embedded Probe Recognition Indicator Normally On D2 Selected probe connector position number bit 0 Depend on live probe position D3 Selected probe connector position number bit 1 Depend on live probe position D4 FPGA Configuration OK status indicator Normally On 7-6-3 SYSCONPM/SYSCONCM Assy The SYSCONPM/SYSCONCM Assy is located at the No.3 slot of the NEST Assy. Table 7-10 LEDs on L1SYSCON Assy LED Descriptions Normal State DS1 CPDI FPGA configuration OK indicator Normally On DS2 Frame Start signal. Scan running status indicator Normally blinking on scanning DS3 FEBC FPGA configuration OK indicator Normally On DS4 DSP operation OK indicator Normally blinking Section 7-6 - LED Descriptions 7-21
[Page 230] 7-6-4 APS/APS Pro Assy NOTE: HVL+ and HVL- are not available for APS PRO. The APS/APS Pro Assy is located at the No. 4 slot of the NEST Assy. Table 7-11 LEDs on APS/APS Pro Assy LED Descriptions Normal State DP5 (Top) Digital 5V output indicator Normally On LP5 Live Power 5V output indicator Normally On AP6 Analog 6V output indicator Normally On DP33 Digital 3.3V output indicator Normally On SHV+ SHV+ output indicator status indicator Normally On HVL+ HVL+ level indicator Normally On in CFM mode or PW mode HVH+ (Bottom) HVH+ level indicator Normally On in B mode 7-22 Section 7-6 - LED Descriptions
[Page 231] Section 7-7Trouble Shooting Tree 7-7-1 System Does Not Power On / Boot Up Is the scanner NO plugged in? Make sure the scanner is not plugged into Yes emergency power (red outlet); Is the AC at the NO Check if wall power is alive wall outlet? Yes Is the circuit NO breaker ON? Yes Check if the standby 5V od APS is alive Make sure AC power connector and con- Press the on/off switch to trol signal connector is plugged properly boot the system. Is the NO on/off switch illuminated with an green color and can you listen fan sound of inside? Yes If HDD indicator is blinking after power NO Does the scanner on, check the monitor cable boot up? Check BIOS or replace PM SOM module Yes Scanner is ON and ready for use. Figure 7-10 Power On / Boot Up Flowchart Section 7-7 - Trouble Shooting Tree 7-23
[Page 232] 7-7-2 System Does Not Boot System doesn’t boot! Is the AC power cable NO seated to the Scanner and to the wall power outlet? Connect the AC power cable between the Scanner and the wall power outlet in right way. Is the main breaker turned NO ON? Turn ON the main breaker of YES the Scanner. Has the ON/OFF NO key on the Control Panel been pressed once? Press the ON/OFF button on the Control Panel. Go on to the next page. Figure 7-11 System does not Boot 7-24 Section 7-7 - Trouble Shooting Tree
[Page 233] 7-7-2 System Does Not Boot (cont’d) System doesn’t boot! (cont’d) NO Do the fans start to run? Check; YES 1.) AC Power 2.) AC Transformer NO Is the SOM module starting Check/replace the PM SOM/CM to display start-up screens SOM module. on the monitor? NO Is the LOGIQ starting display shown on the monitor? Turn off the power, wait a few seconds, and try to turn on the power again. Go on to the next page. Figure 7-12 System does not Boot (contd.) Section 7-7 - Trouble Shooting Tree 7-25
[Page 234] 7-7-2 System Does Not Boot (cont’d) System doesn’t boot! (cont’d) Are the Control Panel NO keys lit? 1.) Check the Control Panel cable connection. 2.) Check/replace Control Panel. END Is regular scan display NO shown on the monitor? Press and hold the main switch for YES five (5) seconds to reboot the system. Go to Scan Procedure section. Figure 7-13 System does not Boot (contd.) 7-26 Section 7-7 - Trouble Shooting Tree
[Page 235] 7-7-3 Noise in Image Noise is shown in Image. Is there any electrical YES devices that affect the Scanner? Keep the Scanner away from those NO electrical devices. Check probes. Figure 7-14 Noise in Image Section 7-7 - Trouble Shooting Tree 7-27
[Page 236] 7-7-4 Unable to Scan Unable to scan! Are probes connected in NO right way? Check the probe connection. END Are other operations possible? NO Check the HV power supply unit. Restart the scanner. Figure 7-15 Unable to Scan 7-28 Section 7-7 - Trouble Shooting Tree
[Page 237] 7-7-5 Trackball The trackball is low sensitive! Does the trackball move at YES all? NO Remove the ball from the Trackball, and clean it. Replace the trackball unit. Figure 7-16 Trackball Troubleshooting Section 7-7 - Trouble Shooting Tree 7-29
[Page 238] 7-7-6 Monitor Troubleshooting NOTE: Reset the monitor settings to the factory defaults prior to troubleshooting the monitor. NOTICE Comments to remember about the 15” monitor. The monitor is the diagnostic monitor and is connected to AC 110/220 VAC. The monitor powers down with the console. Power output from AC Power assy via AC distributor in AC Transbox assy: When the monitor is not connected to the AC power there is a leakage current which when measured with a DVM can indicate high voltage. When a load is applied, the voltage collapses to low voltage if the monitor is not switched on. 7-30 Section 7-7 - Trouble Shooting Tree
[Page 239] 7-7-6 Monitor Troubleshooting (cont’d) Press once the on/off switch. Press and hold on/off switch until Is the shutdown dialog NO system shut down. box displayed? Yes Shutdown the scanner from a software screen or depress the ON/OFF switch Depress and hold the ON/OFF switch on the scanner for approximately 5 seconds. If the scanner fails to Shut Off, follow the step below. Did the scanner NO Shut off? Check cable connection refer 7-10-5 If the scanner still does not Shut off, Switch the circuit breaker to the OFF Yes position. Switch the breaker to the OFF position.to completely Power Down the scanner. Figure 7-17 Monitor Troubleshooting • Monitor does not work - Check AC circuit breaker - Verify power is present at monitor outlet - Check if video is present at backplane • Prints do not match monitor - Verify factory default settings. Chapter 18 in the User Manual calls out suggested settings for various exam and lighting conditions. • Video test patterns are not clear, bright, parallel or square - Replace the monitor Section 7-7 - Trouble Shooting Tree 7-31
[Page 240] 7-7-7 Unable to Record to VCR Unable to record to VCR! Is the VCR properly NO connected? YES Check that all signal, and power supply cable connections to the VCR unit are OK. Is the VCR tape put into NO the device? Put the tape into the device and rewind it. Is recording unable even NO by manual operation? - Check the signal cable connections between VCR and Internal I/O. - Check the cables between BEP and Internal I/O Replace VCR. Figure 7-18 VCR Troubleshooting 7-32 Section 7-7 - Trouble Shooting Tree
[Page 241] 7-7-8 Printer Troubleshooting Unable to use Printer(s)! Is the printer(s) properly NO connected? YES Check that all signal, and power supply cable connections between Printer and Scanner are OK. NO Are there print papers left? Insert the printer papers. Is proper configuration for NO the Print key(s) set? Configure the Print key(s). See next page. Figure 7-19 Printer Troubleshooting Section 7-7 - Trouble Shooting Tree 7-33
[Page 242] 7-7-8 Printer Troubleshooting (cont’d) Still unable to use the Printer(s)! Is printing unavailable NO even by manual operation? YES Check the USB cables Between backplane and usb port. Is there an error message on the monitor display? NO Replace SOM module. Replace the Printer. Figure 7-20 Printer Troubleshooting (contd.) 7-34 Section 7-7 - Trouble Shooting Tree
[Page 243] 7-7-9 DVD-RW Troubleshooting Unable to record to CD-R or DVD -R! Is a new, unused CD-R NO disc inserted to the drive? Insert a new, un-used CD-R disc. Are CD-Rs rated at the proper write NO speed? Acquire CD-Rs rated at the proper write speed. Replace SOM Module. Figure 7-21 CD-RW Troubleshooting Section 7-7 - Trouble Shooting Tree 7-35
[Page 244] 7-7-10 Network Troubleshooting 7-7-10-1 No Connection to the Network at All 1.) Check that the network cable between the scanner and the wall network is connected and well seated in both ends. 2.) Try a network cable that is known to be OK. 3.) Check the cable between the SYSCONPM(SYSCOMCM) and Rear Panel. 4.) Connect a Crossed network cable between the Scanner and your PC. Try to ping from the scanner to the IP address on the PC. If OK, the hardware connection inside the scanner is OK. 7-7-10-2 No Contact With Server, But Connection to Network is OK Check Network setup on the scanner. 7-36 Section 7-7 - Trouble Shooting Tree
[Page 245] 7-7-10 Network Troubleshooting (cont’d) No Connection to the Network Is the TCP/IP Cable between NO LOGIQ™ P5 and network outlet connected and well seated? Connect the cable and verify that it is well seated in both ends. Try a network cable that is known to be OK Is the connection OK now? NO Replace the AEXP cable between SYSCON and Rear panel. Is the cable between SYSCON NO and Rear Panel OK? Replace the Rear Panel. Connect a Crossed Network Cable between the Scanner and your PC/ Laptop. Try to ping from the PC/Laptop to LOGIQ™ P5. If OK, the hardware connection inside LOGIQ™ P5 is OK. Figure 7-22 Network Troubleshooting Section 7-7 - Trouble Shooting Tree 7-37
[Page 246] This page was intentionally left blank. 7-38 Section 7-7 - Trouble Shooting Tree
[Page 247] Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures Section 8-1 Overview 8-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 8 This chapter describes replacement procedures for the following modules and subsystems. Section Description Page Number 8-1 Overview 8-1 8-2 DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-2 8-3 Software Loading Procedure 8-117 8-4 Software Installation 8-129 8-5 Full Backup/Restore Procedure 8-160 8-6 Software Reloading 8-164 8-7 Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-174 Table 8-1 Contents in Chapter 8 Section 8-1 - Overview 8-1
[Page 248] Section 8-2 DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY WARNING WARNING ONLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL SHOULD REMOVE ANY COVERS OR PANELS. ELECTRICAL HAZARDS EXISTS AT SEVERAL POINTS INSIDE. BECOME THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH ALL HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES AND HIGH CURRENT LEVELS TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL CONTACT CAUTION Do not wear the ESD wrist strap when you remove a part of power supply unit. Turn OFF power and unplug the power cord before removing a part of power supply unit. However be sure to turn off power and wear the strap before you remove a circuit boards. WARNING WARNING DO NOT SERVICE OR DISASSEMBLE PARTS UNDER FRU UNIT LEVEL AT ANY CIRCUMSTANCES. NOTE: If the LOGIQ P5/A5/A5pro needs to be sent for repair, ensure that any patient information is erased from the storage device, or that the storage device is removed from the LOGIQ P5/A5/ A5pro before shipping. In case that any patient information is still residing on the LOGIQ P5/ A5/A5pro, GE will contact the customer and request for urgent collection of that patient information. GE will keep this patient information in a secure environment for a maximum period of 1 month. All patient information will be permanently deleted at that point. If PHI (Patient Healthcare Information) data needs to be sent to GE employees for service purposes, GE will ascertain agreement from the customer. The patient information shall only be transferred by approved service processes, tools and devices restricting access, protecting or encrypting data where required, and providing traceability in the form of paper or electronic documents at each stage of the procedure while maintaining compliance with cross-border restrictions of patient information 8-2 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 249] 8-2-1 LCD Plastic filter 8-2-1-1 Tools • Common Phillips screwdrivers • Stubby screwdriver (Flat tip and Cross tip) 8-2-1-2 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the LP5 Monitor cover set. Refer to the 8-2-2 "Monitor cover set" on page 8-5. 2.) Remove the LCD Plastic filter. Figure 8-1 Removing the LCD plastic filter 3.) Put the LCD plastic filter on the LCD monitor after detaching the tape of the LCD plastic filter. Figure 8-2 Putting the LCD plastic filter on the LCD monitor Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-3
[Page 250] 8-2-1-2 Removal procedure (cont’d) 4.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-2 Functional Tests LCD plastic filter Function Validation 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-1. Equipment Section 4-8-2 Procedure passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-1-3 Mounting Procedure 1.) Install the LCD monitor cover parts in the reverse order of removal procedure. Refer to the 8-2-2 "Monitor cover set" on page 8-5. 2.) Put the label on the rear of the LCD monitor. Figure 8-3 Putting the label on the rear of the LCD monitor 8-4 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 251] 8-2-2 Monitor cover set 8-2-2-1 Tools • Stubby screwdriver (Flat tip and Cross tip) 8-2-2-2 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the LCD cable cover. Figure 8-4 Removing the LCD cable cover 2.) Unscrew 1 screw (2306565, BH M4x16 WHT) to remove the power cord bracket assembled under the LCD cable cover. Figure 8-5 Removing the power cord bracket Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-5
[Page 252] 3.) Disconnect power cable and DVI cable. Figure 8-6 Disconnecting power cable and DVI cable 4.) Unscrew 2 screws(5177684, HSH M5x20 WHT) to separate LCD monitor. Figure 8-7 Separating the LCD monitor 5.) Unscrew 4 screws to remove the LCD rear cover. Figure 8-8 Removing the LCD rear cover 8-6 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 253] 6.) Unscrew 4 screws to remove the OSD key assy and disconnect the connect. Figure 8-9 Separating the OSD key assy 7.) Separate the LCD tact knob and LCD lamp window from the OSD key assy. Figure 8-10 Separating the LCD tact knob and LCD lamp window 8.) Unscrew 5 screws to remove LCD front cover. Figure 8-11 Removing the LCD front cover Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-7
[Page 254] 9.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-3 Functional Tests LCD plastic filter Function Validation 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-2. Equipment Section 4-8-2 Procedure passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-2-3 Mounting Procedure Install the each of the new part in the reverse order of removal procedure. 8-8 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 255] 8-2-3 OSD button and lamp set, LCD Plastic Filter 8-2-3-1 Tools 8-2-3-2 Preparations 8-2-3-3 Removal procedure 1.) Unscrew 4 screws (1-4) from the LCD front cover. (1) (2) (3) (4) Figure 8-12 Unscrews 4 screws Table 8-4 Functional Tests 15" OSD Key Assy Function Validation 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-3. Equipment Section 4-6-2 Procedure passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-3-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-9
[Page 256] 8-2-4 LCD Std Arm with Cover 8-2-4-1 Tools 8-2-4-2 Preparations 8-2-4-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the Power Cable, DVI Cable. POWER CABLE DVI CABLE Figure 8-13 Removing the Cable 2.) Unscrew 1 screw to remove the LCD arm cover. Figure 8-14 Unscrews 1 screw 8-10 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 257] 8-2-4-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) Table 8-5 Functional Tests Flexible LCD Arm Function Validation 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-4. Equipment Section 4-8-8 Procedure passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-4-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-11
[Page 258] 8-2-5 Monitor Assy 8-2-5-1 Tools 8-2-5-2 Preparations 8-2-5-3 Removal procedure 1.) Detach the monitor assy from arm. - Open monitor cable cover - Unscrew a screw of the power connector fixture bracket - Unplug the power plug and DVI connector - Flip down the monitor - Unscrew the 2 hexa screw of the monitor hinge Figure 8-15 Disassemble Monitor from STD arm While unscrew the hinge hexa screw from the arm, keep hold the monitor to prevent drop down. Table 8-6 Functional Tests 15" LCDMON II Assy & LCD Panel with filter 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-5. Equipment Section 4-6-1 Function Validation Procedure passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-5-4 Mounting Procedure Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal 8-12 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 259] 8-2-6 Flexible LCD Arm Removal Procedure 8-2-6-1 Tools • Stubby screwdriver (Flat tip and Cross tip) 8-2-6-2 Preparations 8-2-6-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the LCD cable cover. Figure 8-16 Removing the LCD cable cover 2.) Unscrew 1 screw (2306565, BH M4x16 WHT) to remove the power cord bracket assembled under the LCD cable cover. Figure 8-17 Removing the power cord bracket Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-13
[Page 260] 3.) Disconnect power cable and DVI cable. Figure 8-18 Disconnecting power cable and DVI cable 4.) Unscrew 1 screw (2329677, TAP M4X16) to remove the Fold cover. Figure 8-19 Removing the Fold cover 5.) Unscrew 2 screws (2159634, BH M4x10 WHT) to remove the Cable clamp. Figure 8-20 Removing the Cable clamp 8-14 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 261] 6.) Unscrew 2 screws (5177684, HSH M5x20 WHT) to separate the LCD MONITOR and 1 screw (2159625, PH M4x8 W/SP) to remove the Cable bracket. NOTE: While unscrewing the hinge hexa screw from the arm, keep hold of the monitor to prevent dropping down. Figure 8-21 Separating the LCD monitor & Removing the Cable bracket. 7.) Unscrew 2 screws (2337572, FH M3x6 WHT) to remove the Arm cover L & R. Figure 8-22 Removing the Arm cover L & Arm cover R 8.) Unscrew 2 screws (2159632, BH M4x6 WHT) to remove the Cam cover L & R. Figure 8-23 Removing the Cam cover L & Cam cover R Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-15
[Page 262] 9.) Unscrew 4 screws (2159634, BH M4x10 WHT) to remove the Arm bottom cover. Figure 8-24 Removing the Arm bottom cover 10.)Unscrew 1 screw (2329677, TAP M4X16) to remove the Lock cover. Figure 8-25 Removing the Lock cover 11.) Unscrew 2 screws (2159625, PH M4x8 W/SP) to remove the Lower arm guide bracket. Figure 8-26 Removing the Lower arm guide bracket 8-16 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 263] 12.)Unscrew 2 screws (2159626, PH M4X20) to remove the Arm stopper. Figure 8-27 Removing the Arm stopper 13.) Pull out power cable & DVI cable. Make sure flexible arm not to rotate. Figure 8-28 Pulling out power cable & DVI cable 14.) Unscrew 4 screws (2159625, PH M4x8 W/SP) to remove the Lower arm cable bracket and pull out power cable & DVI cable. Figure 8-29 Unscrewing 4 screws Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-17
[Page 264] 15.)Unscrew 3 screws (2159634, BH M4x10 WHT) after removing the rubber caps to remove neck front cover, neck rear cover. Figure 8-30 Unscrewing 3 screws and removing the neck front cover & neck rear cover 16.)Unscrew 3 screws(5327646, HSH M6X16 WHT) to separate the flexible arm neck pipe. Figure 8-31 Separating the neck pipe 8-18 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 265] 17.)Unscrew 1 screw (2159625, PH M4x8 W/SP) to remove the OP bracket. Figure 8-32 Removing OP bracket 18.) Unscrew 3 screws (2373562, FH M4x10 YEL) to separate the Flexible arm stopper (A+B). Figure 8-33 Separating the flexible arm stopper Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-19
[Page 266] 19.)Pull out power cable & DVI cable and remove the oilless bush after separating the neck pipe. Figure 8-34 Pulling out power cable & DVI cable and removing the stopper 8-20 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 267] 20.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-7 Functional Tests Flexible LCD Arm Function Validation 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-6. Equipment Section 4-8-8 Procedure passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-21
[Page 268] 8-2-6-4 Assembly procedure First, remove LP5/LA5 Main K/B Assy and LP5/LA5 Sub K/B Assy 1.) Change the MON PWR CONN LONG cable and remove the cable tie of the DVI cable for flexible arm. MON PWR CONN LONG cable Figure 8-35 Changing the MON PWR CONN LONG cable 8-22 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 269] 2.) Assemble the LCD locking mechanism. a.) Put the stopper pin inside the spring and then put them inside the spring holder. Fix it with spring pin. Figure 8-36 Assembling the spring holder Assy b.) Put lock tite 290 on the M16 tap of the spring holder Assy and screw it. Figure 8-37 Screwing the spring holder Assy Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-23
[Page 270] b-1) Mold die of AL neck frame modified as seen in the figure below does not need a nut. Figure 8-38 Screwing the spring holder Assy c.) Insert holder grip as seen the picture below and fix it with 2set screws(2327580, M2.6X4). Figure 8-39 Assembling the holder grip 8-24 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 271] 3.) Insert two of the flexible arm stoppers (A+B) to the Power Cable and DVI cable in the Order illustrated on the figure below. Make sure that chamfered shape of the flexible Arm stopper should face inside. Flexible Arm Stopper Figure 8-40 Inserting cables to the flexible arm stopper 4.) Insert oilless bush into the flexible arm neck pipe and insert two cables into the flexible arm neck pipe. Figure 8-41 Inserting the oilless bush 5.) Insert the flexible arm into the flexible arm neck pipe. Figure 8-42 Inserting the flexible arm Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-25
[Page 272] 6.) Screw 3 screws (2373562, FH M4X10 YEL) to fix the flexible arm stopper after adjusting the holes. Figure 8-43 Fixing the flexible arm stopper 7.) Screw 1 screw (2159625, PH M4X8 W/SP) to install OP bracket. Figure 8-44 Installing OP Bracket 8.) Screw 3 screws (5327646, HSH M6X16 WHT) to install the arm neck pipe. Make sure place DVI cable be on the right side, power cable on the left side. Figure 8-45 Assembling the arm neck pipe 8-26 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 273] 9.) Screw 2 screws (5177684, HSH M5X20 WHT) to assemble the LCD monitor with flexible arm Top part. Figure 8-46 Screwing 2 screws 10.)Insert the two cables inside the Flexible arm and Screw 4 screws (2159625, PH M4X8 W/SP) to assemble the Lower arm cable bracket. Figure 8-47 Screwing 4 screws 11.)Put in the two cables. Make sure place DVI cable be on the right side, power cable on the left side. Figure 8-48 Putting in the cables Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-27
[Page 274] 12.)Screw 2 screws (2159626, PH M4X20) to assemble the Arm stopper. Figure 8-49 Installing the Arm stopper 13.)Screw 2 screws (2159625, PH M4X8 W/SP) to assemble the Lower arm guide bracket. Figure 8-50 Assembling the Lower arm guide bracket 14.)Tie the Cables with Cable tie. Figure 8-51 Tying the cables 8-28 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 275] 15.)Place the cables inside the slot and connect power cable and DVI cable. Figure 8-52 Placing the Cables 16.)Assemble the Cable bracket with 1 Screw (2159625, PH M4X8 W/SP) Figure 8-53 Assembling the Cable bracket 17.)Screw 2 screws (2159634, BH M4X10 WHT) to assemble the Cable clamp. Figure 8-54 Assembling the Cable clamp Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-29
[Page 276] 18.)Place the cables like the figure below. Figure 8-55 Placing the cables 19.)Screw 1 screw (2306565, BH M4X16 WHT) to fix the Power cable. Figure 8-56 Assembling the power cord bracket 8-30 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 277] 20.)Assemble the LCD cable cover. Figure 8-57 Assembling the LCD cable cover Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-31
[Page 278] 21.)Screw 3 screws (2159634, BH M4x10 WHT) after placing the neck front cover and neck Rear cover. Figure 8-58 Assembling the neck front cover and the neck rear cover 22.)Screw 1 screw (2159625, PH M4X8 W/SP) to assemble the Lock Knob. Figure 8-59 Assembling the Lock Knob 8-32 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 279] 23.)Screw 1 screw (2329677, TAP M4X16) to assemble the Lock Cover. Figure 8-60 Assembling the Lock Cover Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-33
[Page 280] 24.)Screw 2 screws (2159632, BH M4X6 WHT) to assemble the Cam Cover L & R. Figure 8-61 Assembling the Cam Cover L & R 25.)Screw 1 screw (2329677, TAP M4X16) to assemble the Fold Cover. Figure 8-62 Assembling the Fold Cover 8-34 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 281] 26.)Screw 2 screws (2337572, FH M3X6 WHT) to assemble the Arm cover L & R. Figure 8-63 Assembling the Arm Cover L & R 27.)Screw 4 screws (2159634, BH M4X10 WHT) to assemble the Arm bottom Cover. Figure 8-64 Assembling the Arm bottom cover Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-35
[Page 282] 28.)Attach LCD Arm Caution Label, LCD Arm Rotation Label, LCD Lock Caution Label. LCD Arm Caution Label LCD Arm Rotation Label LCD Lock Caution Label Figure 8-65 Flexible Arm 8-36 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 283] 8-2-7 Main Keyboard Assy 8-2-7-1 Tools 8-2-7-2 Preparations 8-2-7-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the 3 Probe holders & Cup holder from the keyboard. Figure 8-66 Removing holders 2.) Unscrew 4 screws from the bottom front of the keyboard. (2) (3) (1) (4) Figure 8-67 Unscrews 4 screws Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-37
[Page 284] 8-2-7-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 3.) Unscrew 2 screws from the rear side of the keyboard. (1) (2) Figure 8-68 Unscrews 2 screws 4.) Lift the top cover of the keyboard and disconnect 4 cables from the keyboard. Figure 8-69 Lifting the top cover & Disconnecting 5 Cables 8-38 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 285] 8-2-7-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 5.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-8 Functional Tests Main Keyboard Assy Function Validation Section 4-7-1 “Service Manual, Direction Procedure 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-7. Equipment Section 4-3-4 System B/M-Mode Checks passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-7-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-39
[Page 286] 8-2-8 Sub Keyboard Assy 8-2-8-1 Tools 8-2-8-2 Preparations 8-2-8-3 Removal procedure 2.) Unscrew 4 screws (1-4). 2 screws(1-2) are back side or the speaker and 2 screws(3-4) are bottom of sub keyboard. (1) (2) (3) (4) Figure 8-70 4 Screw Sub Keyboard Assy Table 8-9 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-8. Equipment Sub Keyboard Assy Function Validation passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ Section 4-7-2 Procedure 8-40 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 287] 8-2-8-4 Mounting Procedure 1.) The product emblem is attached on the sub keyboard, so proper elblem should be attached on the sub keyboard when replace the sub keyboard. The sub keyboard FRU include 4 kinds of emblem which are LOGIQ P5, LOGIQ P5 Ob, LOGIQ A5, LOGIQ A5 pro. Figure 8-71 Emblems 2.) Attache proper product emblem as same as install base system before assemble the sub keyboard assy. Figure 8-72 Emblem on Sub Keyboard 3.) Refer Install the new parts in the reverse order of removal. Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-41
[Page 288] 8-2-9 Trackball Assy 8-2-9-1 Tools 8-2-9-2 Preparations 8-2-9-3 Removal procedure 2.) Unscrew 4 screws (1-4) and disconnect the cable. connector 4 screws Figure 8-73 Screws and connector for Trackball Table 8-10 Functional Tests Section 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-9. Equipment Section 4-7-3 Trackball Assy validation 8-2-9-4 Mounting Procedure 8-42 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 289] 8-2-10 English, Greek, Russian, Swedish, Norwegian A/N Key assy 8-2-10-1 Tools 8-2-10-2 Preparations 8-2-10-3 Removal procedure Figure 8-74 A/N Key in keyboard 2.) Remove USB PCB by unscrewing 6 screws (1-6) and disconnecting the 6 cables. Connectors 1 ~ 3 Connector 3 4~ 6 Figure 8-75 USB PCB Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-43
[Page 290] 8-2-10-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 3.) Unscrew 6 screws from the back side of the A/N key assy. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Figure 8-76 Screws on the A/N Key 4.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-11 Functional Tests Section 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-10. Equipment Section 4-7-4 A/N Key assy validation 8-2-10-4 Mounting Procedure 8-44 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 291] 8-2-11 Freeze key assy 8-2-11-1 Tools 8-2-11-2 Preparations 8-2-11-3 Removal procedure Figure 8-77 Freeze Key in the main keyboard 2.) Remove the 3 screws (1-3) and disconnect 1 cable. connector Figure 8-78 Freeze Key connector Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-45
[Page 292] 8-2-11-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) Table 8-12 Functional Tests Section 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-11. Equipment Section 4-7-5 Freeze key validation 8-2-11-4 Mounting Procedure 8-46 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 293] 8-2-12 TGC key assy / TGC Knob Set 8-2-12-1 Tools 8-2-12-2 Preparations 8-2-12-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the CFUNCKEY Assy. Refer to the 8-2-7 "Main Keyboard Assy" on page 8-37. 2.) Remove the TGC Knobs. Figure 8-79 8 TGC Knobs 3.) Unscrew 4 screws (1-4). 1 2 3 4 Figure 8-80 TGC PCB Assy in Keyboard Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-47
[Page 294] 8-2-12-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 4.) Disconnect 1 connector from the PCB. Figure 8-81 TGC Key Connector 5.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-13 Functional Tests Section 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-12. Equipment Section 4-7-6 TGC key assay / TGC Knob Set validation 8-2-12-4 Mounting Procedure 8-48 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 295] 8-2-13 Sub Keyboard Encoder Knob Set 8-2-13-1 Tools 8-2-13-2 Preparations 8-2-13-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove all the Encoder Knobs from the keyboard. Figure 8-82 Knob in Sub Keyboard Table 8-14 Functional Tests Section 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-13. Equipment Section 4-7-7 Sub Keyboard Encoder Knob Set validation 8-2-13-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-49
[Page 296] 8-2-14 Keycap set, Main Keyboard Encoder Knob set 8-2-14-1 Tools 8-2-14-2 Preparations 8-2-14-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove key caps from the keyboard. Figure 8-83 Key Caps Table 8-15 Functional Tests TGC key assy/TGC Knob Set, Sub keyboard encoder Knob Set, Keycap set, Main Keyboard 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-14. Equipment Section 4-8-4 Encoder Knob set Function Validation passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ Procedure 8-2-14-4 Mounting Procedure 8-50 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 297] 8-2-15 Side Left Cover 8-2-15-1 Tools 8-2-15-2 Preparations 8-2-15-3 Removal procedure 1.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2). Figure 8-84 2 screw on Side left cover 2.) Remove the left cover. Figure 8-85 Open Side left cover Table 8-16 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-15. Equipment Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-51
[Page 298] 8-2-15-4 Mounting Procedure 8-52 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 299] 8-2-16 Side Right Cover 8-2-16-1 Tools 8-2-16-2 Preparations 8-2-16-3 Removal procedure 1.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2). Figure 8-86 2 screw on side right cover 2.) Remove the Right cover. Figure 8-87 Open side right cover Table 8-17 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-16. Equipment 8-2-16-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-53
[Page 300] 8-2-17 Front Cover 8-2-17-1 Tools 8-2-17-2 Preparations 8-2-17-3 Removal procedure 2-16 "Side Right Cover" on page 8-52. 2.) Remove the dummy left and right covers. Refer to the Figure 8-88. 3.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2) from the left side of the front cover. Figure 8-88 Screws of Dummy Cover 4.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2) from the right side of the Front cover. Figure 8-89 Screws of the front cover 8-54 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 301] 8-2-17-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 5.) Remove the front cover. Figure 8-90 Removal of front cover 6.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-18 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-17. Equipment 8-2-17-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-55
[Page 302] 8-2-18 Rear Cover 8-2-18-1 Tools 8-2-18-2 Preparations 8-2-18-3 Removal procedure 2-16 "Side Right Cover" on page 8-52. 2.) Remove 4 rubber caps from the rear cover of the system. Figure 8-91 4 rubber caps on Rear Cover 3.) Unscrew 4 screws (1-4) from the rear cover. (1) (2) (3) (4) Figure 8-92 4 screws on rear cover 4.) Remove the Rear Cover. 8-56 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 303] 8-2-18-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 5.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-19 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-18. Equipment 8-2-18-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-57
[Page 304] 8-2-19 Middle Cover 8-2-19-1 Tools • Stubby screwdriver (Flat tip and Cross tip) 8-2-19-2 Preparations 8-2-19-3 Removal procedure 2-16 "Side Right Cover" on page 8-52. And Remove the Rear Cover. Refer to the 8-2-18 "Rear Cover" on page 8-55. 2.) Remove 2 rubber caps (1-2) from the middle cover of the system. 1 2 Figure 8-93 2 rubber cap of middle cover 3.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2) from the middle cover. 1 2 Figure 8-94 2 screws of middle cover 8-58 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 305] 8-2-19-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 4.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-20 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-19. Equipment 8-2-19-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-59
[Page 306] 8-2-20 Top Cover 8-2-20-1 Tools 8-2-20-2 Preparations 8-2-20-3 Removal procedure 2.) Remove the Top Bottom Cover. Refer to the 8-2-21 "Top Bottom Cover" on page 8-60. 3.) Remove 2 rubber caps (1-2) from the top cover of the system and unscrew 2 screws (1-2). (1) (2) Figure 8-95 2 rubber caps of top cover 4.) Unscrew 5 screws (1-5) from the bottom of the top cover. 5.) Remove the Top Cover. 6.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-21 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-20. Equipment 8-2-20-4 Mounting Procedure 8-60 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 307] 8-2-21 Top Bottom Cover 8-2-21-1 Tools • Stubby screwdriver (Flat tip and Cross tip) 8-2-21-2 Preparations 8-2-21-3 Removal procedure 2.) Unscrew 7 screws (1-7) from the bottom of the top cover. Figure 8-96 Top bottom cover 3.) Remove the Top Bottom Cover. 4.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-22 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-21. Equipment 8-2-21-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-61
[Page 308] 8-2-22 Pole Cover 8-2-22-1 Tools 8-2-22-2 Preparations 8-2-22-3 Removal procedure 2.) Remove the Top Bottom Cover. Refer to the 8-2-21 "Top Bottom Cover" on page 8-60. 3.) Remove the Top Cover. Refer to the 8-2-20 "Top Cover" on page 8-59. 4.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2). (1) (2) Figure 8-97 Pole Cover 5.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-23 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-22. Equipment 8-2-22-4 Mounting Procedure 8-62 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 309] 8-2-23 Neck Front 8-2-23-1 Tools 8-2-23-2 Preparations 8-2-23-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove 1 rubber cap. Figure 8-98 rubber cap of neck front cover 2.) Unscrew 1 screw and remove the Neck Front. Figure 8-99 Open neck front cover Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-63
[Page 310] 8-2-23-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) Table 8-24 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-23. Equipment 8-2-23-4 Mounting Procedure 8-64 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 311] 8-2-24 Neck Rear 8-2-24-1 Tools 8-2-24-2 Preparations 8-2-24-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove 2 rubber caps (1-2). (1) (2) Figure 8-100 rubber cap of neck rear cover 2.) Unscrew 2 screws and remove the Neck Rear. Figure 8-101 Open neck rear cover Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-65
[Page 312] 8-2-24-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) Table 8-25 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-24. Equipment 8-2-24-4 Mounting Procedure 8-66 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 313] 8-2-25 Dummy Cover L / R 8-2-25-1 Tools 8-2-25-2 Preparations 8-2-25-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove 2 rubber caps (1-2). Figure 8-102 rubber cap of dummy cover 2.) Unscrew 2 screws and remove the dummy cover L. Figure 8-103 screws of dummy cover 3.) Same process is applied for dummy cover R. Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-67
[Page 314] 8-2-25-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 4.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-26 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-25. Equipment 8-2-25-4 Mounting Procedure 8-68 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 315] 8-2-26 EMI Cover L 8-2-26-1 Tools 8-2-26-2 Preparations 8-2-26-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the Side Left Cover. Refer to the 8-2-15 "Side Left Cover" on page 8-51. 2.) Unscrew 6 screws (1-6). Figure 8-104 EMI Cover L Table 8-27 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-26. Equipment 8-2-26-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-69
[Page 316] 8-2-27 EMI Cover R 8-2-27-1 Tools 8-2-27-2 Preparations 8-2-27-3 Removal procedure 2.) Unscrew 9 screws (1-9). Figure 8-105 EMI Cover R Table 8-28 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-27. Equipment 8-2-27-4 Mounting Procedure 8-70 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 317] 8-2-28 APS/APS Pro Assy NOTE: APS Power Supply can not be adjusted. 8-2-28-1 Tools • Nipper 8-2-28-2 Preparations 8-2-28-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the Side Left Cover. Refer to the 8-2-15 "Side Left Cover" on page 8-51. 2.) Remove the EMI Cover L. Refer to the 8-2-26 "EMI Cover L" on page 8-68. 3.) Remove Hard Disk assy to unplug the APS/APS Pro connectors on backplane easily. - Unplug the HDD power connector on the HDD and the SATA connector from the bottom side of the backplane. Pull out the connector. 4.) Unscrew 4 screws of the HDD bracket. HDD Connector SATA Connector Figure 8-106 Remove HDD 5.) Unplug the DC power connector from DVD RW drive. 6.) The APS/APS Pro assy have 5 connectors, 3 connectors are pluged on backplane and 1 connector is connected to nest cooling fan power and 1 connector is AC power connector. Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-71
[Page 318] 8-2-28-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 7.) Unplug 3 connectors from the backplane and disconnect the 3P AC connector near bottom of the backplane and disconnect the 2P connector near the nest cooling fan. Cut the tie wrap ODD Power Connector ODD SATA Connector Figure 8-107 APS/APS Pro Connectors of backplane 8.) Remove the Side Right Cover. Refer to the 8-2-16 "Side Right Cover" on page 8-52. 9.) Remove the EMI Cover R. Refer to the 8-2-27 "EMI Cover R" on page 8-69. 10.)Unplug the J14 connector and unscrew 2 screws (1-2). Pull out the APS/APS Pro assy carefully. During take out the APS/APS Pro assy, the power connector on the backplane side should be passed through the square hole on the backplane. Figure 8-108 Pull out the APS/APS Pro Assy 8-72 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 319] 8-2-28-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 11.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-29 Functional Tests APS/APS Pro Assy PCB Function Validation Section 4-9-5 Procedure 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-28. Equipment 8-2-28-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-73
[Page 320] 8-2-29 CL1TRX Assy / BL1TRX Assy 8-2-29-1 Tools 8-2-29-2 Preparations 8-2-29-3 Removal procedure 3.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2) and eject the PCB. Figure 8-109 Eject ASIG Assy 4.) The CL1TRX(BL1TRX) board is located on the most left slot in the nest box. 8-74 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 321] 8-2-29-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 5.) Pull the CL1TRX Assy out. Figure 8-110 Eject the CL1TRX(BL1TRX) Board 6.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-30 Functional Tests CL1TRX Assy / BL1TRX Assy Function Section 4-9-1 “Service Manual, Direction Validation Procedure 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-29. Equipment Section 4-3-4 System B/M-Mode Checks passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-29-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-75
[Page 322] 8-2-30 P3RLY / P2RLY Assy & P2RLY with Dummy 8-2-30-1 Tools 8-2-30-2 Preparations 8-2-30-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the side right cover. Refer to the 8-2-16 "Side Right Cover" on page 8-52. 2.) Remove the side left cover. Refer to the 8-2-15 "Side Left Cover" on page 8-51. 3.) Remove the Front Cover. Refer to the 8-2-17 "Front Cover" on page 8-53. 4.) Remove the ASIG Board. Refer to the 8-2-35 "ASIG Assy" on page 8-86. 5.) Unscrew 8 screws (1-8) and remove the metal cover. (1) (8) (7) (2) (3) (6) (4) (5) Figure 8-111 RLY Cover 6.) Unscrew 6 screws (1-6) and remove the PCB. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Figure 8-112 Screws of the RLY board 8-76 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 323] 8-2-30-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 7.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-31 Functional Tests P3RLY,P2RLY and P2RLY with Dummy Assy Section 4-9-6 function check procedure Section 4-3-4 System B/M-Mode Checks 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-30. Equipment Section 10-5-7 Probe Maintenance 8-2-30-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-77
[Page 324] 8-2-31 Backplane Assy 8-2-31-1 Tools 8-2-31-2 Preparations 8-2-31-3 Removal procedure 1.) To detached the backplane, all pwas in the cardcage should be removed from cardcage. 2.) Open the Side Left Cover and Side Right Cover. Refer to the 8-2-15 "Side Left Cover" on page 8- 51 and 8-2-16 "Side Right Cover" on page 8-52. 3.) Open the EMI Cover L and EMI Cover R. Refer to the 8-2-26 "EMI Cover L" on page 8-68 and 8-2- 27 "EMI Cover R" on page 8-69. 4.) Remove all pwas from the nest box. Figure 8-113 PWAs in the nest box 5.) Open the front cover. Refer to the 8-2-17 "Front Cover" on page 8-53. 6.) Remove the P3RLY / P2RLY Board. Refer to the 8-2-30 "P3RLY / P2RLY Assy & P2RLY with Dummy" on page 8-75. 7.) Remove the DVD, HDD. Refer to the 8-2-44 "DVD R/W Drive" on page 8-98 and 8-2-47 "SATA HDD Assy" on page 8-104. 8.) Unplug all the cable connectors all in Backplane Assy. 8-78 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 325] 8-2-31-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 9.) Unscrew 16 screws from the Backplane Assy. Figure 8-114 Backplane 10.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-32 Functional Tests BackPlane Assy Function Validation Section 4-9-9 “Service Manual, Direction Procedure 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-31. Equipment Section 4-3-4 System B/M-Mode Checks passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-31-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-79
[Page 326] 8-2-32 ACWD Assy 8-2-32-1 Tools 8-2-32-2 Preparations 8-2-32-3 Removal procedure 3.) Remove the ASIG Board. Refer to the 8-2-35 "ASIG Assy" on page 8-86. 4.) Pull the ACWD assy out from Nest box. The ACWD assy is located in slot #2. Figure 8-115 PWAs in Nest Box 8-80 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 327] 8-2-32-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 5.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-33 Functional Tests Section 4-9-9 ACWD Assy Function Validation Procedure “Service Manual, Direction 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-32. Equipment System CFM and PWD Checks Section 4-3-5 passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-32-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-81
[Page 328] 8-2-33 SYSCON PM Assy/SYSCON CM Assy 8-2-33-1 Tools 8-2-33-2 Preparations 8-2-33-3 Removal procedure 3.) Remove the SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) assy in slot #3 in the nest box. Figure 8-116 PWAs in Nest Box 4.) Eject one ASIR ROM from old SYSCONML with regular screw driver. 8-82 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 329] Separate ASIR ROM form new SYSCONML as same procedure. Figure 8-117 ASIR location Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-83
[Page 330] 8-2-33-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) Figure 8-118 Separation of ASIR ROM 5.) Mount ASIR ROM to new SYSCONML Assy. Refer to the Figure 8-119. 6.) Confirm mounting direction and pin number. Figure 8-119 ASIR ROM mounting direction NOTE: It is important to swap ASIR ROM(U23). Because it contains the serial Number and option the system. 8-84 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 331] 8-2-33-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 7.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-34 Functional Tests SYSCONML Assy Function Validation Section 4-9-4 Procedure Section 4-3-5 System CFM and PWD Checks 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-33. Equipment 8-2-33-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-85
[Page 332] 8-2-34 PM SOM Assy with 1G/ CM SOM Assy with 512M 8-2-34-1 Tools 8-2-34-2 Preparations 8-2-34-3 Removal procedure 3.) Remove the SYSCOM PM / CM Assy. Refer to the 8-2-33 "SYSCON PM Assy/SYSCON CM Assy" on page 8-81. 4.) Unscrews 4 screws. Figure 8-120 4 screws for SOM on SYSCON 5.) Remove the SOM Assy. Figure 8-121 Detached the SOM from SYSCON PWA 8-86 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 333] 8-2-34-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 6.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-35 Functional Tests Section 4-9-7 SOM Function Validation Procedure Section 4-3-5 System CFM and PWD Checks 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-34. Equipment 8-2-34-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-87
[Page 334] 8-2-35 ASIG Assy 8-2-35-1 Tools 8-2-35-2 Preparations 8-2-35-3 Removal procedure 3.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2) and eject the PCB. (1) (2) Figure 8-122 Eject the ASIG 4.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-36 Functional Tests Section 4-9-16 ASIG ASSY Function Validation Procedure “Service Manual, Direction 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-35. Equipment Section 4-3-4 System B/M-Mode Checks passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-35-4 Mounting Procedure 8-88 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 335] 8-2-36 Battery on SYSCONPM/CM Assy NOTE: If the battery on SYSCONPM/CM Assy runs out, the system date will be reset. Then can not exit to maintenance mode. NOTE: The Battery is UL critical component. So must use the battery approved. The recommended one is CR2450 manufactured by TOSHIBA. 8-2-36-1 Tools • Option strings 8-2-36-2 Preparations 8-2-36-3 Removal procedure 3.) Unplug the J13 connector. Refer to the Figure 8-123. 4.) Remove the SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) assy in slot #3 in the nest box. Unplug the J13 Connector Figure 8-123 Pull out the SYSCONPM(SYSCONCM) Assy Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-89
[Page 336] 8-2-36-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 5.) Remove the battery. Figure 8-124 Pull out the battery from SYSCON PWA 6.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-37 Functional Tests SYSCONML Assy Function Validation Section 4-9-4 Procedure Section 4-3-5 System CFM and PWD Checks 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-36. Equipment 8-2-36-4 Mounting Procedure 8-90 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 337] 8-2-37 Front Caster / Rear Caster NOTE: Both Front Casters and Rear Casters are swivel type in LOGIQ™ A5 but in LOGIQ™ A5, only Front Casters are swivel type (Rear Casters are “Fixed” type). 8-2-37-1 Tools 8-2-37-2 Preparations 8-2-37-3 Removal procedure 1.) Unscrew 8 screws (1A-8A) to remove the front caster. 2.) Unscrew 8 screws (1-8) to remove the rear caster. Figure 8-125 Casters Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-91
[Page 338] 8-2-37-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) Table 8-38 Functional Tests Front caster/Rear caster Function Validation 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-37. Equipment Section 4-8-6 Procedure passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-37-4 Mounting Procedure 8-92 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 339] 8-2-38 Rear Handle 8-2-38-1 Tools 8-2-38-2 Preparations 8-2-38-3 Removal procedure 1.) Unscrew 1 screw. Remove the Handle Dummy brkt. Figure 8-126 Handle Dummy Bracket 2.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2) from the back of the rear handle. (1) (2) Figure 8-127 Rear Handle Table 8-39 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-38. Equipment 8-2-38-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-93
[Page 340] 8-2-39 Rear Hook 8-2-39-1 Tools 8-2-39-2 Preparations 8-2-39-3 Removal procedure 1.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2) and remove Rear hook. Figure 8-128 Screws on rear hook 2.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2) and remove. Figure 8-129 Screws on the rear hook fix brkt 8-94 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 341] 8-2-39-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) Table 8-40 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-39. Equipment 8-2-39-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-95
[Page 342] 8-2-40 Probe Holder 8-2-40-1 Tools 8-2-40-2 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the probe holders from the Keyboard. Figure 8-130 Probe Holders Table 8-41 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-40. Equipment Section 4-8-7 Probe holder Function Validation Procedure passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-40-3 Mounting Procedure 8-96 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 343] 8-2-41 Cup Holder 8-2-41-1 Tools 8-2-41-2 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the cup holder. Figure 8-131 Cup holder Table 8-42 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-41. Equipment 8-2-41-3 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-97
[Page 344] 8-2-42 ECG Cable Hook 8-2-42-1 Tools 8-2-42-2 Removal procedure 1.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2) to remove the ECG Cable Hook. (1) (2) Figure 8-132 Screws of cable hook Table 8-43 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-42. Equipment 8-2-42-3 Mounting Procedure 8-98 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 345] 8-2-43 Air Filter Set 8-2-43-1 Tools 8-2-43-2 Preparations 8-2-43-3 Removal procedure 1.) Pull out the 2 Air filters from the bottom left and right side of the system (1-2). (1) (2) Figure 8-133 Air filters Table 8-44 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-43. Equipment Air filter set Function Validation Procedure Section 4-8-3 passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-43-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-99
[Page 346] 8-2-44 DVD R/W Drive 8-2-44-1 Tools 8-2-44-2 Preparations 8-2-44-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the side left cover. Refer to the 8-2-15 "Side Left Cover" on page 8-51. 2.) Remove EMI L Cover. Refer to the 8-2-26 "EMI Cover L" on page 8-68. 3.) .) Remove the HDD assy. Refer to the 8-2-47 "SATA HDD Assy" on page 8-104. 4.) Disconnect the HDD power cable and unscrew 4 screws of the HDD fixture bracket. SATA Cable ODD SATA Power CAble Figure 8-134 ODD SATA Power Cable and SATA cable of DVD Drive 5.) Remove the Front Cover. Refer to the 8-2-17 "Front Cover" on page 8-53. 8-100 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 347] 8-2-44-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 6.) Unscrew the 4 screws on the front of the DVD drive and remove the DVD Assy. Figure 8-135 Unscrew 4screws and remove the DVD Assy 7.) Unscrew 8 screws to remove the bracket from the DVD Assy. Figure 8-136 Unscrew 8screws and remove the DVD Drive from the bracket 8.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-45 Functional Tests Section 4-3-1 Power On/Boot Up “Service Manual, Direction 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-44. Equipment Section 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-44-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-101
[Page 348] 8-2-45 Nest Fan Assy 8-2-45-1 Tools 8-2-45-2 Preparations 8-2-45-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the Left Cover. Refer to the 8-2-15 "Side Left Cover" on page 8-51. 2.) Remove the EMI Cover Left. Refer to the 8-2-26 "EMI Cover L" on page 8-68. 3.) Unplug the Connection. Figure 8-137 Power connector of Nest fan 4.) Remove the Right Cover. Refer to the 8-2-16 "Side Right Cover" on page 8-52. 5.) Remove the EMI Cover Right. Refer to the 8-2-27 "EMI Cover R" on page 8-69. 6.) Unscrews 2 screws. Figure 8-138 2 screws on the Nest Fan 8-102 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 349] 8-2-45-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 7.) Remove the Nest fan assy. Figure 8-139 Pull out the nest fan 8.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-46 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-45. Equipment Section 4-9-10 Nest fan Function Validation Procedure passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-45-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-103
[Page 350] 8-2-46 ARP Assy 110V/220V 8-2-46-1 Tools 8-2-46-2 Preparations 8-2-46-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove side right cover and EMI cover. Refer to the 8-2-16 "Side Right Cover" on page 8-52 and 8-2-27 "EMI Cover R" on page 8-69. 2.) Remove the Rear Cover. Refer to the 8-2-18 "Rear Cover" on page 8-55. 3.) Unscrew 4 screws (1-4). (1) (2) (3) (4) Figure 8-140 Screws of the rear panel 4.) Disconnect J15 connector. Figure 8-141 AEXP Cable of rear panel 8-104 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 351] 8-2-46-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 5.) Disconnect three (3) USB connectors or 5 USB connectors from the rear panel and 2 AC power connector. The 4D controller USB and ECG USB connector also connect to this rear panel PWA. Figure 8-142 Open Rear Panel 6.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-47 Functional Tests Section 4-9-15 ARP Assy Function Validation Procedure 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-46. Equipment Peripheral/Option Checks passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ Section 10-5-2-2 Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Section 10-6-3 Canada 8-2-46-4 Mounting Procedure Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-105
[Page 352] 8-2-47 SATA HDD Assy 8-2-47-1 Tools 8-2-47-2 Preparations 8-2-47-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the side left cover. Refer to the 8-2-15 "Side Left Cover" on page 8-51. 2.) Remove EMI L Cover. Refer to the 8-2-26 "EMI Cover L" on page 8-68. 3.) Disconnect the HDD power cable and unscrew 4 screws of the HDD fixture bracket. HDD Power Cable Figure 8-143 HDD in System 8-106 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 353] 8-2-47-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 4.) Unplug the SATA cable from the backplane on the bottom of backplane. Figure 8-144 Unplug the SATA Cable 5.) Disconnect the SATA Power Cable and SATA Cable from HDD Assy after removing 2ea cable ties. And unscrew 4screws to remove the HDD Fixture bracket. Cable Tie Figure 8-145 Separate HDD and HDD Fixture Bracket Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-107
[Page 354] 8-2-47-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 6.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-48 Functional Tests Section 4-3-1 Power On/Boot Up “Service Manual, Direction 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-47. Equipment Section 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-47-4 Mounting Procedure 8-108 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 355] 8-2-48 ACPC Assy 8-2-48-1 Tools • Stubby screwdriver (Flat tip and Cross tip) 8-2-48-2 Preparations 8-2-48-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the AC Input Box Assy. Refer to the 8-2-49 "Transbox Assy 110V/220V" on page 8-109. 2.) Disconnect 5 connectors. Figure 8-146 ACPC in Transbox 3.) Unscrew 5 screws to remove the ACPC Assy. Figure 8-147 Screws of ACPC assy Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-109
[Page 356] 8-2-48-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 4.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-49 Functional Tests Section 4-9-12 ACPC Assy set Function Validation Procedure Section 10-6-2 GEMS Leakage Current Limits Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Section 10-6-3 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-48. Equipment Canada Section 10-6-4 Grounding Continuity Section 10-6-5 Chassis Leakage Current Test Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead Section 10-6-6 to Ground Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead Section 10-6-7 to Lead Section 10-6-9 Probe Leakage Current Test 8-2-48-4 Mounting Procedure 8-110 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 357] 8-2-49 Transbox Assy 110V/220V 8-2-49-1 Tools 8-2-49-2 Preparations 8-2-49-3 Removal procedure • To detached the AC Power assy, All open 4 pcs console cover that are left, right, front, rear cover 1.) Remove side left cover and right side cover. Refer to the 8-2-15 "Side Left Cover" on page 8-51 and 8-2-16 "Side Right Cover" on page 8-52. 2.) Remove rear side cover and front cover. Refer to the 8-2-17 "Front Cover" on page 8-53 and 8-2- 18 "Rear Cover" on page 8-55. 3.) Unscrew 2 pcs M4 screw and 2 pcs hexa screw on the front of AC trans box. And unscrew 4 pcs screw and 2pcs hexa screw on the rear side of Transbox assy and open inlet panel. 2 hexa Screws Figure 8-148 4 screw on the front of the AC transbox assy 4.) Unplug 4 connectors inside of AC transbox and pull out the transbox assy. 5.) Pull out the transbox assy. Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-111
[Page 358] 8-2-49-3 Removal procedure (cont’d) 6.) Unplug 4 connectors inside of AC transbox and pull out the transbox assy. Figure 8-149 Pull out the Transbox assy 7.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-50 Functional Tests Section 4-9-11 Transbox Function Validation Procedure Section 10-5-3 Input Power Section 10-6-2 GEMS Leakage Current Limits “Service Manual, Direction 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-2-49. Equipment Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Section 10-6-3 passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ Canada Section 10-6-4 Grounding Continuity Section 10-6-5 Chassis Leakage Current Test Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead Section 10-6-6 to Ground Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead Section 10-6-7 to Lead Section 10-6-9 Probe Leakage Current Test 8-112 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 359] 8-2-49-4 Mounting Procedure When installing the Transbox assy, the transbox chassis should be inserted into the guide rail which is under the frame chassis. Figure 8-150 Insert the Transbox assy Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-113
[Page 360] 8-2-50 Fuse Set 8-2-50-1 Tools • Stubby screwdriver (Flat tip and Cross tip) 8-2-50-2 Preparations 8-2-50-3 Removal procedure 1.) Remove the AC Transbox assy. Refer to the 8-2-49 "Transbox Assy 110V/220V" on page 8-109. 2.) Replace the 2 fuses located on the ACPC assy in the transbox assy. Figure 8-151 FUSE in Transbox assy Table 8-51 Functional Tests 5394141, Rev 2+, Section 8-2-50. Equipment Fuse set Function Validation Procedure Section 4-9-14 passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ 8-2-50-4 Mounting Procedure 8-114 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 361] 8-2-51 Read and Write Serial Info 8-2-51-1 How to start serial no read/write program 1.) Plug the service dongle on the usb port on rear panel. 2.) Turn on the system. 3.) When the Start Application dialog box appears, press [F2] before it automatically starts Echoloader.) Figure 8-152 Start Application Dialog Box 4.) When the Maintenance Access dialog box pops up, type in the service password. Figure 8-153 Maintenance Access Dialog Box Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-115
[Page 362] 8-2-51-1 How to start serial no read/write program (cont’d) 5.) If the win XP screen appears, run the window explorer. Move the cursor to bottom of the screen. If the task bas appear, click the explorer icon. Figure 8-154 Windows Explorer 6.) Run the “asn.exe” by double click. This execution file is in “C:\Arirang\target\bin” directory Figure 8-155 “asn.exe” 8-116 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 363] 8-2-51-1 How to start serial no read/write program (cont’d) 7.) When asn.exe starts running, Logon windows pops up. Type in maintenance password to start asn.exe. Figure 8-156 Execute the “ASN.EXE” Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY 8-117
[Page 364] 8-2-51-2 How to read Serial No 1.) Check checkboxes of system boards you want to read or System Serial No checkbox. NOTE: You can read System Serial No, L1SYSCON board, CL1TRX board, P3RLY board, and ACWD board information. Figure 8-157 Reading System Info 8-2-51-3 How to write info on the system 1.) Check checkboxes of system boards you want to write or System Serial No checkbox. 2.) Put the Serial No, Part No, or Rev on the blank box. 3.) Press “Write” Button. 8-118 Section 8-2 - DISASSEMBLY/RE-ASSEMBLY
[Page 365] Section 8-3 Software Loading Procedure 8-3-1 General This describes a full system software loading (Base Software Load Image + Arirang Application Load Image) procedure. Use this instruction when: - Performing the HDD with new one (Base Software Load Image + Arirang Application Load Image) - Performing the system revision-up (Application) 8-3-2 Parts Required LOGIQ™ P5 Base Software DVD LOGIQ™ P5 Application Software CD Blank CD-Rs (for patient image backup) or DVDs Service Dongle NOTE: Patient Image Data will be deleted when all the drives are ghosted. Back up them on the CD- R or DVD before starting software loading NOTE: Insert the service dongle into this service port located at the rear panel before installing the Base System Software Load image 8-3-3 TimeRequired Approximately 2hours Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure 8-119
[Page 366] 8-3-4 Software Loading Steering Guide Figure 8-158 Flow Chart - Installation of Base and Application CD 8-120 Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure
[Page 367] 8-3-5 Before Starting Software Loading 8-3-5-1 Saving Connectivity Before starting upgrade, write down the Connectivity Setting for back-up. 1.) Go to Utility > Connectivity and click the Tcpip tab. 2.) Write down the following parameters:. Parameters Descriptions (Entry for Stand-Alone System) Computer Name Enable DHCP IP-Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Note : For a stand-alone system, preset values of IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway, shown above, must entered. Figure 8-159 Connectivity Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure 8-121
[Page 368] 8-3-5-2 Image Management Guide NOTE: Before upgrade to R4.X.X software, perform recommended image backup procedure. Export/Import Data/Images Between Systems - Use this to copy both patient data and images for specified patient(s) from one system to another. To move exams from one Ultrasound system to another, you need to export/import exam information. NOTE: Both database information and images are exported. No data is deleted from the local archive when exporting data. Exporting Data To export an exam(s) to a compatible Ultrasound system: 1.) Format the removable media (DVD or CD-ROM). Label the removable media. Answer Yes/OK to the messages.Press Patient. Deselect any selected patient(s) in the search portion of the Patient screen. Press Data Transfer (located at the upper, right-hand corner of the Patient menu). Figure 8-160 Exam Data Transfer 2.) Select Export task Button. Figure 8-161 Task button 3.) The [From] combo box is not active. It displays Local Archive. The [To] combo box is active. Select the type of removable media CD/DVD. Then please wait until the patient list is visible. Figure 8-162 To Combo Box 8-122 Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure
[Page 369] 8-3-5-2 Image Management Guide (cont’d) 4.) In the patient list at the top of the Patient menu, select the patient(s) you want to export. You can use Windows commands to select more than one patient. To select a consecutive list of patients, click the cursor on the first name, move the cursor to the last name, then press and hold down the Shift+right Set key to select all the names.To select a non-consecutive list of patients, click the cursor at the first name, move the cursor to the next name, then press and hold down the Ctrl+right Set key, move the cursor to the next name, then press and hold down the Ctrl+right Set key again, etc.You can also search for patients via the Search key and string. Or, Select All Button from the Patient Menu: Figure 8-163 Source Section NOTE: You need to use your best judgment when moving patients' images. If there are lots of images or loops, then only move a few patients at a time. 5.) Once you have selected all of the patients to export, press Transfer Button as shown in Figure 8-163 on page 8-121 from the Patient Menu. 6.) The progress bar appears as the copy is taking place. Once transfer completed, the exported patient list will be shown as Figure 8-164. Figure 8-164 Destination Section of Patient Screen 7.) Press F3 to eject the media. Specify that you want to finalize the CD-ROM or DVD. Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure 8-123
[Page 370] 8-3-5-2 Image Management Guide (cont’d) Importing Data To import an exam(s) to another Ultrasound system: 1.) At the other Ultrasound system, insert the CD-ROM/DVD. 2.) Press Patient. Press Exam Data Transfer (located at the upper, left-hand corner of the Patient menu). Figure 8-165 Exam Data Transfer 3.) Select Import task Button. Figure 8-166 Task button 4.) The [TO] combo box is not active. It displays Local Archive. The [FROM] combo box is active. Select the type of removable media CD/DVD Rom. Then please wait until the patient list is visible. Figure 8-167 From 5.) The Patient menu just shows the patients available for import from the removable media you just loaded onto the system. 6.) Select the patients to be imported. 7.) Once you have selected all of the patients to import, press Transfer Button. 8.) Please wait for the patient information to be copied to this Ultrasound system. Progress bar appears while the import is taking place. 8-124 Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure
[Page 371] 8-3-5-3 Printer setting Back-up Before starting upgrade, write down, print out or save the printer setting for back-up. NOTE: All the customized image setting of digital printer will be lost after software loading. Take the back up and restore all the digital printers setting at software loading. NOTE: This printer setting is for only digital printers, not analog printers. 1.) Insert the CD or removable media and Format. 2.) Go to Utility -> System -> Peripherals and click the Printers. Figure 8-168 Printer set backup 3.) Press the left button of the trackball on the printer which need to be backup -> Click “properties”. Figure 8-169 Printer set backup Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure 8-125
[Page 372] 4.) Select “Printing Preferences”. Figure 8-170 Printer set backup 5.) If Sony D897 is used, Click “Write”. Figure 8-171 Printer set backup 8-126 Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure
[Page 373] 6.) Select removable disk or other media. Figure 8-172 Printer set backup 7.) Click the “Save” to write the printer configuration. Figure 8-173 Printer set backup Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure 8-127
[Page 374] 8.) Click the “OK” until all printer windows are closed. Figure 8-174 Printer set backup 9.) If Sony D895 is used, repeat the step1 to setp4 and write down the Orientation set. Figure 8-175 Printer set backup 8-128 Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure
[Page 375] 10.) Click the “Advanced”, then writhe down the Paper size and scaling parameters. Figure 8-176 Printer set backup Parameters Descriptions Orientation Portrait or Landscape Paper size Paper size Scaling Rate of length and width Table 8-52 Parameters 11.)Click “Properties” of the “Density Adjust”. Figure 8-177 Printer set backup Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure 8-129
[Page 376] 12.)Click “Save” -> select a removable disk or other media -> save the printer configuration. Figure 8-178 Printer set backup 13.)Click the “OK” until all printer windows are closed. 14.)If the printer does not support the configuration save or write option, write down or print out the following parameters. Parameters Descriptions Orientation Portrait or Landscape Paper size Paper size Scaling Rate of length and width Density AdjustGamma curve Table 8-53 Parameters NOTE: The parameters depend on printers, so the above parameters are shown to another names and more parameters setting could be needed. 8-130 Section 8-3 - Software Loading Procedure
[Page 377] Section 8-4Software Installation 8-4-1 Installing Base Image Software NOTE: While we do not believe it is necessary, It would not hurt to disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers. NOTE: All digital peripherals, reporting systems connected via the USB ports should be either power off or disconnected prior to the software installation 1.) Power ON the scanner. 2.) Tap gently the DEL key until the following screen appears.Enter “ arirang” as a password if the system request a password, then press the Enter key. Figure 8-179 Enter Current Password 3.) Move to Advanced and select IDE Configuration . Figure 8-180 IDE Configuration Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8-131
[Page 378] 4.) If the BIOS setting value in Primary IDE Slave is ATAPI CDROM , the 1st Boot Device in Boot menu should be Primary Slave . If the 1st Boot Device is not Primary Slave, please change the setting value using Enter key and Arrow key. Figure 8-181 Boot Device Priority 5.) If the BIOS setting value in Secondary IDE Master is ATAPI CDROM , the 1st Boot Device in Boot menu should be Secondary Master . If the 1st Boot Device is not Secondary Master, please change the setting value using Enter key and Arrow key. Figure 8-182 IDE Configuration 8-132 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 379] Figure 8-183 Boot Device Priority 6.) Insert the BT11 Base Image Software Disk into the CD/DVD ROM drive. 7.) After restarting the system, the following screen will be displayed. Figure 8-184 Installation Warning Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8-133
[Page 380] 8.) Press Enter key and then the following screen will be shown. (If you want to abort installation procedures, press CTRL+C.) Figure 8-185 Base Image Software Installation Menu 9.) Press A key to install the complete disk. NOTICE Select A when installing the new HDD or upgrading from BT09. (HDD capacity should be minimum 120GB) Select B when replacing C:\ partition only. It means all customer data are NOT deleted. The Ghost pro- cedure is performed with data of the drivers D, E, F and Z left. Select C when replacing C:\ partition and Z:\ partition. It means all customer data are NOT deleted. The Ghost procedure is performed with data of the drivers D, E and F left. Z:\ partition used for reloading C:\ partition and Application software will be replaced. Drive Partition Usage (GRUB) grub data C System Files and Application D User Defined and Preset E Patient Archive data F Swap Z C:\partition Repository for Reloading Function Table 8-54 Drive Partition 8-134 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 381] 10.)Approx. twenty(20) minutes later, the following screen appears. Eject the Base Image Software Disk from the CD/DVD ROM drive. Figure 8-186 Installation Completion 11.)After removing the disk from the drive, Press ALT + CTRL + DEL key. NOTE: After Installing Base Image Software, the “General failure reading drive A. Abort, Retry, Fail?” message can be appeared, but Ignore it! All procedure would be successfully done. WARNING WARNING Remove the disk from the drive. Otherwise you will be encountered the Base Image Software installation screen iteratively. 12.)The following message box can be displayed after the SYSTEM boot up. Press Yes. Figure 8-187 System Setting Change Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8-135
[Page 382] 8-4-2 Verifying Base Image Software 8-4-2-1 Partition Checks 1.) Reboot the SYSTEM and the Desktop screen will be shown as blow. Figure 8-188 Desktop Screen 2.) Click Start button and Run menu, then type explorer and click OK Figure 8-189 Executing Windows Explorer 3.) Right-click My Computer icon on the Desktop and click Manage. Figure 8-190 Opening the Manage Window 8-136 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 383] 8-4-2-1 Partition Checks (cont’d) 4.) Select Storage -> Disk Management and check that only File System, Status, Capacity and Drive Letter of each partition are same as follows NOTE: If 160GB HDD is used, refer to the Figure 8-191. Figure 8-191 Disk Management 160G HDD NOTE: Repo partition and CD/DVD-ROM Drive's Drive Letter should be assigned as Z:, G: respectively. Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8-137
[Page 384] 8-4-2-2 Driver Checks 1.) On the window XP desktop, left click on My Computer then right click on Properties. 2.) The System Properties window appears. Select Hardware > Device Manager. 3.) Verify that ?, X, or ! is not displayed Figure 8-192 Device Manager • If X or ! is displayed: - Left-click on the device with X mark, then right -click on Enable - Left-click on the device with ! mark, then right click on Properties to perform the device driver recognition. When some files are required, designate the file in the directories of C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32 or C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS . If they are not found, search them using a window search function. 8-138 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 385] 8-4-2-3 USB Printer Checks (USB Printer User Only) Without any newly additional user invention, LOGIQ™ P5 will recognize the below 19 kinds of USB printer Printer Name Comment Sony UP-D895/D895MD Sony UP-D897 Digital BW Printer Mitsubishi P93D Mitsubishi P95DW/P95D/P95DE/ P95DW-N/P95DW-B Sony UP-D23MD Sony UP-D25MD Digital Color Printer Mitsubishi CP30DW/CP30DW-Z HP 990cxi LexMark Z65 HP 5550 HP 6122 HP 6540 HP 5650 HP 1000 Standard Printer HP 1200 Xerox Phaser 8400 HP Office jet Pro K550 HP Office jet Pro K5400 HP Deskjet D4360 HP Deskjet 6940 HP Officejet 6000 Special Edition This procedure assumes that the P5 software is installed and is functioning properly. 1.) Attach the USB cable from the printer to the USB port on assigned position Table 8-55 USB Port Position USB Port Position Peripheral Right USB Port on Rear Connector Panel Standard Printer Left USB Port on Rear Connector Panel: Digital Color Printer USB Port on OP Printer Bracket Back Panel Digital BW Printer Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8-139
[Page 386] NOTICE If you plug in USB printer for the first time to the system, restart the system. 8-140 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 387] 8-4-2-3 USB Printer Checks (USB Printer User Only) (cont’d) NOTICE Once a USB printer is connected to one of the USB ports, don't take out the USB printer and plug it in another USB port. Figure 8-193 USB Port - Rear Panel Connector Figure 8-194 USB Port - OP Printer Bracket Back Panel 2.) Make sure that printer properties are proper. (Image orientation and size). Refer to the latest Release Notes. Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8-141
[Page 388] 8-4-2-4 DMC Checks (DMC User Only) NOTE: DMC Cable is supplied only as an option. 1.) Check DMC Cable (USB to Serial Bridge). 2.) Plug in the Cable as shown on the right side of the USB port. DMC Cable Plug on the right Figure 8-195 DMC Cable 3.) Ensure USB to Serial Bridge port is recognized by the system. 4.) Trackball to My computer icon and left click 5.) Right click on Properties . 6.) Right click on the Hardware tab. 7.) Right click on the device manager in the middle right of the hardware tab window. 8-142 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 389] 8-4-2-4 DMC Checks (DMC User Only) (cont’d) 8.) Make sure “USB to Serial Bridge” is displayed as shown the Figure 8-196 Figure 8-196 Device Manager Windows Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8-143
[Page 390] 8-4-3 Installing Application Software NOTE: First time SW installation with peripherals on can cause the BlueScreen. NOTE: When connecting peripherals to the system, make sure to turn off the system first in order to avoid the BlueScreen. WARNING WARNING Base Image software should also be installed prior to the application. 1.) Place the “Application Software” CD into the DVD drive. 2.) Press the Start button on the tool bar at the bottom of the LCD screen and select “ Run ”. Enter “ G:\LoadSoftware ” into the dialog box as shown below. Figure 8-197 Run Load Software 3.) You will see a Command (CMD) window open as shown in the Figure 8-198. Figure 8-198 Command Window 4.) Press the “Y” key twice and copying backup files starts. This takes a few minutes. 8-144 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 391] 8-4-3 Installing Application Software (cont’d) 5.) After copying backup files, the following options appear. (Software version can be changed.) Figure 8-199 Select system 6.) Select a product to be installed. 7.) Then, press the “Y” key to continue. Then the program requests confirmation - “Are you sure?” then Press the “Y” key again. 8.) The installation process will be started. it will take about 20 minutes. 9.) To apply the preset by region, select one of the below options. Figure 8-200 Region selection Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8-145
[Page 392] 8-4-3 Installing Application Software (cont’d) 10.)After the installation is completed the system will power off automatically. Figure 8-201 Installation Complete Message NOTE: Some of systems doesn’t power off automatically. In this case, press and hold power button more than 5 sec. to power off. NOTE: Do not operate with using mouse or keyboard during installation procedures. 11.)Turn on the system and immediately eject the button on the DVD drive to eject the DVDROM Verify that the system boots up no error.(It will take a few minutes) NOTE: The application installation is completed, reboot is required. 12.)Shut down the system. 13.)Start the system 8-146 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 393] 8-4-4 Standard Confirmation & Functional Checks Configure the system settings and perform functional checks after installation of software. Items for configuration and functional checks include: - Confirmation of the software version - Preset Data (if necessary) - Patient Image Data (if necessary) - Functional Checks for Service Platform (Diagnostic Program) 8-4-4-1 Confirming software version 1.) Touch the Utility button on the Touch Panel 2.) Click on About tab. The software version will be shown on the monitor as shown. Confirm the following: Refer to the Figure 8-202. Figure 8-202 Confirmation of software version 3.) Make sure that Application Software Version (R4.x.x or R3.0.x) ), Software Part Number (described on the Application Software CD-ROM) and Image Part Number (described on the Base Image Software CD-ROM). Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8-147
[Page 394] 8-4-4-2 Setting Computer Name 1.) Click on Utility, then select Connectivity. 2.) Click on TCP/IP tab. Figure 8-203 TCPIP tab 3.) Type Computer Name NOTICE The Computer name is unique. Check the scanner serial number printed on the label located at the rear lower side of the scanner. For example, when 12345SU1 is printed, P5-12345SU1 must be entered as a computer name. NOTICE If Enable DHCP checkbox is checked and LAN cable is disconnected from the system, the system bootup time might slow down. 4.) Verify that Enable DHCP has no check mark. If checked, remove the mark. NOTE: If Enable DHCP mark is checked, the system cannot checkout by VOLC. 5.) Check if Computer Name, IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway are proper ones which you wrote down in section 8-3-5-1Saving Connectivity. NOTE: If the “Save” is NOT performed, you can NOT enter Patient screen and NOT perform Export/Import 6.) Click on Save button 7.) Click OK for confirmation dialog box 8.) The system will power OFF automatically. 9.) Turn on the system for functional checks 8-148 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 395] 8-4-4-3 Setting Printer Preferences NOTE: If the 1-3-5 printer setting back-up is NOT performed, ignore this section. 1.) Insert removable disk or media that the printer setting was saved. 2.) Go to Utility -> System -> Peripherals click the Printers. Figure 8-204 Printer set restore 3.) Press the left button of the trackball on the printer which need to be restore from the saved printer setting -> Click “properties” -> Click “Printing Preferences”. 4.) If Sony D897 is used, click “Read”. Figure 8-205 Printer set restore Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8-149
[Page 396] 5.) Select removable disk or media that the printer setting was saved -> Click “Open”. Figure 8-206 Printer set restore 6.) Click the “OK” until all printer windows are closed. 7.) If Sony D895 is used, repeat the above step 1 and 3, then set the parameters below in the layout tab and advanced tab. Parameters Descriptions Orientation Portrait or Landscape Paper size Paper size Scaling Rate of length and width Table 8-56 Parameters 8-150 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 397] 8.) Click the properties of the Density Adjust”. Figure 8-207 Printer set restore 9.) Click “Load”. Figure 8-208 Printer set restore 10.)Select removable disk or media which the printer setting was saved -> click “Open”. 11.)Click the “OK” until all printer windows are closed. Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8-151
[Page 398] 12.)If the printer is not support restore option, restore the printer set from the recorded parameters. Parameters Descriptions Orientation Portrait or Landscape Paper size Paper size Scaling Rate of length and width Density AdjustGamma curve Table 8-57 Parameters NOTE: The parameters depend on printers, so the above parameters are shown to another names and more parameters setting could be needed. 8-152 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 399] 8-4-4-4 Functional Checks for Service Platform (Diagnostic Program) The Service platform uses a web-based user interface (UI) to provide access to common service components. NOTE: After perform diagnostics, shut down and restart to make the system working properly. 1.) Go to Utility and press Service to launch Service Platform. It will take some seconds for activating. 2.) Make sure that CAPS is not selected (should be dimmed) for password entry performed later. Figure 8-209 Utility -> Service 3.) The Service Login window for Service Platform will be shown on the monitor display. Figure 8-210 Log in screen CAUTION If the Login window for Service Platform is not displayed on the monitor, the installation of the Service Platform has failed. Reload the application software or Base System Software (OS) + application software. Contact a Technical Support for details. Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8-153
[Page 400] 8-4-4-4 Functional Checks for Service Platform (Diagnostic Program) (cont’d) 4.) Select GE Service at the “Select User Level” field. 5.) Enter the password for the Service Platform. 6.) Click on Okay . Figure 8-211 Select User Level 7.) Verify that the following screen (Service Platform) is displayed on the monitor. NOTICE When the service platform is NOT displayed, check if CAPS lock is selected. The CAPS should not be selected. 8.) Click on x located at the upper right corner of the service platform screen to close the Service 8-154 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 401] Platform and return to the scan panel. Figure 8-212 Service Platform screen 8-4-4-5 Setting the VCR (if necessary) 1.) Select Utility > System > Peripheral tab. 2.) Under Video Settings, PAL or NTSC. 3.) Under VCR, select Composite or S-Video. 4.) Under VCR, select Panasonic LQ-MD800 or Mitsubishi MD3000, as appropriate. Figure 8-213 Utility > System>Peripherals 5.) Click on Save. 6.) Shut down the scanner, then restart the scanner. 7.) Verify that the VCR can be properly operated. NOTICE Be sure to connect the converter and cable before booting up the system. Otherwise the LOGIQ™ P5 system does not recognize the peripheral devices Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8-155
[Page 402] 8.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-58 Functional Tests Section 4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown 5394141, Rev 1+, Section 8-4-4. Equipment 8-156 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 403] 8-4-4-6 Verifying the VCR (if necessary) 1.) Press Record button, VCR menu shows up at the bottom of the screen. Figure 8-214 VCR Menu 2.) Click Counter Reset, then Press Record menu to start recording. Figure 8-215 Record Menu Displays a red dot in the VCR status area on the Title bar to indicate that recording has begun. Figure 8-216 VCR Status 3.) Press Stop to stop recording the tape at the desired moment. 4.) Press Search to adjust the starting time for video playback. 5.) Press Play to start VCR playback. Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8-157
[Page 404] 8-4-4-7 Setting Printer Properties in Application Software (if necessary) 1.) Select Utility -> Connectivity -> Service tab 2.) Select Standard Printer, and Add Figure 8-217 Utility > Connectivity > Service 3.) Under Properties, select desired Printer, and Save. Figure 8-218 Select the Printer 8-158 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 405] 8-4-4-8 Print Key Assignment and Checkout (if necessary) 1.) Select Utility-> Connectivity-> Button tap. 2.) Choose the desired print button (for example, Print1) under Physical Print Button. Figure 8-219 Physical Print Button 3.) Select Standard Print, and press > >Standard Print is added under printflow View. NOTICE Press << to delete a existing Standard Print. Figure 8-220 Standard Print 4.) Press the print key just configured. The screenshot prints to the destination printer. Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8-159
[Page 406] 8-4-4-9 Regional Setup Procedure for Japanese You can set up the keyboard for Japanese. If you select Japanese, the following items display or may be entered in Japanese. • Patient Name • Exam Comment (on Patient screen and Worksheet) • Annotation (Comments) • Error/Warning Messages • DICOM/Worklist 1.) In Utility--> System--> General, set the Language as JPN. Save this setting, but do not reboot the system yet. Figure 8-221 Changing the System Language to JPN 2.) Press Regional Options, under Standards and Formats select Japanese, under Location select Japan. Press Apply. Figure 8-222 Regional Options 8-160 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 407] 8-4-4-9 Regional Setup Procedure for Japanese (cont’d) 3.) Select the Language tab, press Details, under Installed Services add the Japanese-Microsoft IME Standard 2002 ver. 8.1 keyboard, under Default input language select Japanese, press Apply, Press OK. Figure 8-223 Regional and Language Options—Language Tab 4.) Select the Advanced tab, then select Japanese in the Language for non-Unicode programs pull- down menu. Press Apply. Answer Yes to use files already loaded on the hard disk, then answer No to not reboot the system yet, press OK. Press Save and Exit the Utility screen. 5.) Reboot the system. When your system restarts, the system appears in the selected language. NOTE: To have the settings take effect, you MUST turn off the system and turn it back on. 6.) In Utility --> System --> General, press Regional Options. Select Language Tab and press Details. Remove English under Installed Services. Press Apply and OK. 7.) To type in Japanese, press Alt + tilde/accent key (located between the Esc and F1 keys) in order to start the Input Method Editor (IME). Section 8-4 - Software Installation 8-161
[Page 408] 8-4-4-10 Product Type Check of the System To verify that the correct version of Application software was installed, check the Product Type of the Application software. Verification steps are listed below. 1.) Turn on the system. Wait until the screen comes up. 2.) Press the Utility key and click Admin tab. 3.) Check the value of Product item. Figure 8-224 Checking Product Type 4.) The following table is the matching table. Installed Application Value of Product item P5 Radiology.Arirang A5 Radiology.Arirang.BW A5Pro (A5 w/o PW) Radiology.Arirang.BW2 Table 8-59 Product Type Matching Table 8-162 Section 8-4 - Software Installation
[Page 409] Section 8-5Full Backup/Restore Procedure 8-5-1 General This describes a Full Backup (Database, Image, User preset, Service Data) procedure. Use this instruction when you need to save the data : • before changing a HDD with a new one • before reinstalling Base Application • when you just want to save all of the current data. 8-5-2 Parts Required • USB HDD 8-5-3 Full Backup Procedure 1.) While the Echoloader is running, press ‘Utility’ button and click on the ‘Admin’. 2.) When Title Login window pops up, select an operator with admin authorization. 3.) Type in the password. 4.) press “OK”. 5.) Select “System Admin” page. 6.) press “Execute” button under Full Backup box and the window below pops up. Figure 8-225 Backup and Restore Window Section 8-5 - Full Backup/Restore Procedure 8-163
[Page 410] 8-5-3 Full Backup Procedure (cont’d) 7.) Press “Backup”. Then the below window pops up. Figure 8-226 Emergency Disk Making Wizard 8.) Insert a USB HDD. NOTE: It might take about 30 seconds for the system to recognize the USB HDD. 9.) Press “Next”. 10.)Select USB HDD for backup when Select Drive window is displayed. Figure 8-227 Drive select 11.)Verify that USB HDD is in the list. 8-164 Section 8-5 - Full Backup/Restore Procedure
[Page 411] 8-5-3 Full Backup Procedure (cont’d) 12.)If USB HDD with enough space is not already plugged in, plug in one.Then press Next Figure 8-228 Storage Information 13.)Press next to continue. Then the below windows appear. Figure 8-229 Emergency Disk Making Preparation Figure 8-230 Emergency Disk Making in Progress 14.)Verify that “Backup was completed!” message is displayed. 15.)Press Finish to complete. Section 8-5 - Full Backup/Restore Procedure 8-165
[Page 412] 8-5-4 Restore procedure 1.) From Figure 8-225, press “Restore” button. 2.) Rest of the procedure is the same with “Backup” procedure. NOTICE The system should be rebooted after finishing of Restore procedures. 3.) After reboot, Press “Patient”. Verify that Patient data are restored Press “Utility”. Verify that Userdefined data are restored. 8-166 Section 8-5 - Full Backup/Restore Procedure
[Page 413] Section 8-6Software Reloading 8-6-1 General This describes general Software Reloading of C:\ partition functionality. 8-6-2 Software Reloading Procedure 8-6-2-1 Perform Software Reloading in the Service Platform No media (CD/DVD) is needed to perform this function. This can be done in two ways. A) By logging on to the Service Platform B) To access the system remotely. In case of performing Software Reloading remotely, you will need the assistance of the customer to switch the system back on and put it in disruptive mode. The following procedure applies to both Locally and Remotely. 1.) Go to Utility->System->General 2.) Press “Date/Time” Figure 8-231 Date/Time Section 8-6 - Software Reloading 8-167
[Page 414] 3.) Press “Time Zone” Figure 8-232 Time Zone 4.) Register the current Time Zone Current Time Zone Table 8-1 Current Time Zone 5.) Press “Cancel”. 6.) Log onto the Service Platform. 7.) Go to “Utilities”->”Common Utilities”. 8.) Go to “Utility”->”System”->”About” Verify that Software version and software build version are same with the ones before the Software Reloading. 8-168 Section 8-6 - Software Reloading
[Page 415] 9.) Select “Reload System Software” Figure 8-233 Reload system Software 10.)Verify that “Local Archive” is available under Dataflow. 11.)Press “ReLoad”. 12.)Confirmation message pops up. 13.)Press “Yes” to proceed. Section 8-6 - Software Reloading 8-169
[Page 416] 14.)Progress bar is displayed Figure 8-234 Reloading setup in progress 8-170 Section 8-6 - Software Reloading
[Page 417] 15.)Setup is completed successfully a.) If you do s/w reloading from the system directly, please shut down the system now. b.) For remote s/w reloading, please enable Disruptive mode. Figure 8-235 setup completed message 16.)Press “Disruptive mode” Figure 8-236 Disruptive mode Section 8-6 - Software Reloading 8-171
[Page 418] 17.)If “Disruptive Mode Status” is disabled, Press “Yes” to enable disruptive mode. For the remote reloading, customer has to agree to the diruptive mode. The following window (Figure 8-237) pops up in the system screen and customer has to press “Yes” to enable Disruptive mode. Figure 8-237 Insite Notification 18.)Press “System Shutdown” Figure 8-238 System Shutdown NOTE: If the service dongle is inserted or the system is logged on to the maintenance mode, “System shutdown” will not work. Please close programs and reboot the system manually. 8-172 Section 8-6 - Software Reloading
[Page 419] 19.)Select “Restart System” Figure 8-239 Restart System 20.)Press “Submit” 21.)Press “Confirm” when confirmation message is displayed. 22.)After a while, the system restarts automatically. 23.)Verify that correct date and time are displayed correctly. Section 8-6 - Software Reloading 8-173
[Page 420] 8-6-2-2 Software Reloading 1.) The Base S/W load starts automatically immediately after boot up Figure 8-240 Reloading C:\ partition from Reloading Ghost Image 2.) After finishing C: partition reloading, the system restarts automatically. 3.) When the system restarts, an application installation starts automatically. Figure 8-241 Application installation 8-174 Section 8-6 - Software Reloading
[Page 421] 4.) When installation is finished, the system shuts down automatically. 5.) Press Power Button to start the system. 6.) When system fully boots up after the software reloading, please shutdown system again. NOTE: For the following procedure, disruptive mode should be approved in order to be in done remotely. 7.) Start the system. 8.) Press “Patient” button, and verify under Dataflow that “Local Archive” is available. If it's not available, shut down the unit one more time. 9.) To put the Local Time Zone back, Go to Utility->System->General 10.)Click “Date/Time” Figure 8-242 Date/Time Section 8-6 - Software Reloading 8-175
[Page 422] 11.)Press Time Zone Figure 8-243 Time Zone 12.)Change the time zone to the local time zone from Table 1. 13.)Press “Apply” 14.)Press “Date & Time” tab. Figure 8-244 Date & Time 8-176 Section 8-6 - Software Reloading
[Page 423] 15.)Change the Date and Time correctly if needed. 16.)Press “Apply” 17.)Press “OK” 18.)Turn off the system. 19.)Start the system. 20.)Check if the correct date and time are displayed. Figure 8-245 Date and Time check 21.)The software reloading is completed. Section 8-6 - Software Reloading 8-177
[Page 424] Section 8-7 Mechanical Option Installation instruction These service in subtractions describe the installation procedures of following mechanical options to LOGIQ™ P5. 8-178 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 425] 8-7-1 Endo Probe Holder Installation 1.) Check out the 2 screw holes to be used to install Endo Probe Holder. Figure 8-246 Endo Probe Holder Installation 2.) Install Endo Probe holder on the bottom side of the Cable Arm Hook by screwing 2 screws(2159634, BH M4x10 WHT). Figure 8-247 Endo Probe Holder Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-179
[Page 426] 8-7-2 Microphone Option fixture Installation 1.) Use 2 holes at the bottom of the keyboard. Figure 8-248 Microphone option holes 2.) Screw 2 screws (5178673, FH M4x6 WHT) to fix the Microphone fixture. Figure 8-249 installation of Microphone 8-180 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 427] 8-7-3 BT11 BW Printer Option Installation 1.) This section describes the installation procedure of the BW Printer option. 2.) Assemble the BW PRINTER to BW PRINTER FIX BRKT with screwing 4 screws (2306562, FH M3X6). Figure 8-250 BT11 BW PRINTER Option Installation 3.) Assemble the BT11 BW PRINTER ASSY to SYSTEM using 2 SCREWS (5176744, BH M4X20). Figure 8-251 BT11 BW PRINTER Option Installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-181
[Page 428] 8-7-3 BT11 BW Printer Option Installation (cont’d) 4.) Connect the PRT CABLE ASSY 3 (5168835-2) between BW PRINTER and SYSTEM REAR PANEL. Attach the CABLE MOUNT (5399222) on the REAR COVER and fix the cable as the picture below. Figure 8-252 BT11 BW PRINTER Option Installation 5) Finished feature of BW PRINTER option. Figure 8-253 BT11 BW PRINTER Option Installation 8-182 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 429] 8-7-4 Drawer Option installation 1.) Push the drawer from the front to the rear direction. Figure 8-254 Drawer Option Installation 2.) Unscrew 2 existing screws from the middle cover. 3.) Using the bracket, fix the drawer by screwing 3 screws each of left and right side of the drawer. 2337572 (Screw, FH M3x6 WHT) 5176744 Middle Cover (Screw, BH M4x20 WHT) Figure 8-255 Installation of Drawer Option Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-183
[Page 430] 8-7-5 Cable Arm Hook installation 1.) Cable Arm Hook should be installed in prior to installing Probe Cable Hanger, or Endo Probe Holder. 2.) Unscrew 1 existing screw(2159634, BH M4x10 WHT) from the rear side of the keyboard. Figure 8-256 Cable Arm Hook installation 3.) Screw 2 screws(2306565 BH M4x16 WHT, 2159634 BH M4x10 WHT) to fix the Cable Arm hook. User longer screw provide on the upper hole, and use existing screw removed in the step 2 on the figure below. Figure 8-257 Cable Arm Hook installation 8-184 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 431] 8-7-6 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard installation 1.) Put loctite 290 on the screw(2159634, BH M4X10 WHT) edge. Figure 8-258 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard installation 2.) Fix the BW printer cover beneath the keyboard by the screw(2159634, BH M4X10 WHT). Figure 8-259 BW Printer Cover Keyboard installation 3.) Fix the BW printer base bracket to the BW Printer by screwing 4 screws(2306562, FH M3x6 YEL) (1-4). (2) (1) base bracket (4) (3) Figure 8-260 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-185
[Page 432] 8-7-6 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard installation (cont’d) 4.) Slide and place the BW printer with printer plate to the BW printer cover and screw 2 screws (5178673, FH M4x6 WHT) (1-2) to fix it. Figure 8-261 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard installation 5.) Connect the Power Cable and USB Cable from the printer to the system and tie the cable properly. Figure 8-262 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard installation 8-186 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 433] 8-7-6 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard installation (cont’d) 6.) Install the BW Printer rear cover. a.) Push the BW Printer rear cover to the rear of BW printer cover. b.) Fix the hook of BW Printer rear cover on the BW Printer cover. c.) Push the bottom of BW printer rear cover and install the rear cover. Figure 8-263 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-187
[Page 434] 8-7-7 BW printer Fixture Middle installation 1.) Install BW Printer on the top of the base bracket by screwing 4 screws(2306562, FH M3x6 YEL). Mitsubishi P93DW SONY UP-D897 Figure 8-264 BW Printer Fixture Middle installation 2.) Unscrew 2 existing screw from the middle cover. 3.) Place the BW printer with base bracket on the middle cover and screw 2 screws(5176744, BH M4x20 WHT) to fix it. Figure 8-265 BW Printer Fixture Middle installation 8-188 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 435] 8-7-7 BW printer Fixture Middle installation (cont’d) 4.) Connect the USB cable and power cable from the printer to the system. Figure 8-266 BW Printer Fixture Middle installation 5.) Install BW hide bracket to the rear side of the BW printer and screw 2 screws(2159633, BH M4x8 WHT) to fix it. Figure 8-267 BW Printer Fixture Middle installation Figure 8-268 BW Printer Fixture Middle installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-189
[Page 436] 8-7-8 Color Printer Fixture Middle installation - UP23MD Printer 1.) Install color printer on the top of the base bracket by screw 4 screws(2306562, FH M3x6 YEL). Figure 8-269 Color Printer Fixture Middle installation 2.) Unscrew 2 existing screws from the middle cover. 3.) Screw 1 screw (5176744, BH M4x20 WHT) on each side of the system to fix the Color printer with base bracket to the system. Figure 8-270 Color Printer Fixture Middle installation 8-190 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 437] 8-7-8 Color Printer Fixture Middle installation - UP23MD Printer (cont’d) 4.) Connect the USB cable and Power cable from the color printer to the system as shown in the figure below. Figure 8-271 Color Printer Fixture Middle installation 5.) Install Color printer hide bracket and screw 4 screws(2159633, BH M4x8 WHT) to fix it. Figure 8-272 Color Printer Fixture Middle installation Figure 8-273 Color Printer Fixture Middle installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-191
[Page 438] 8-7-9 Color Printer Fixture Middle installation - UP-D25MD Printer 1.) Install color printer on the top of the base bracket by screw 4 screws(2306562, FH M3x6 YEL). Figure 8-274 Color Printer Fixture Middle installation 2.) Unscrew 2 existing screws from the middle cover. 3.) Screw 2 screws (5176744, BH M4x20 WHT) on each side of the system to fix the Color printer with base bracket to the system. Figure 8-275 Color Printer Fixture Middle installation 8-192 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 439] 8-7-9 Color Printer Fixture Middle installation - UP-D25MD Printer (cont’d) 4.) Connect the USB cable and Power cable from the color printer to the system as shown in the figure below. Figure 8-276 Color Printer Fixture Middle installation 5.) Install Mid Color Cable Bracket and screw 4 screws(2159633, BH M4X8) to fix it. Figure 8-277 Color Printer Fixture Middle installation Figure 8-278 Color Printer Fixture Middle installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-193
[Page 440] 8-7-10 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation - UP23MD Printer Figure 8-279 Printer VCR DVD Fixture installation top 2.) Install Fixture DVD bot bracket on the top cover by screwing 2 screws(2327592, FH M4x14 YEL). Figure 8-280 Printer VCR DVD Fixture installation top 3.) Install color printer to the DVD top bracket by screwing 4 screws(2306562, FH M3x6 YEL). Figure 8-281 Printer VCR DVD Fixture installation top 8-194 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 441] 8-7-10 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation - UP23MD Printer (cont’d) 4.) Screw 4 screws(2159633, BH M4x8 WHT) on both sides to fix the color printer and DVD with top bracket to the color printer top bracket. Figure 8-282 Printer VCR DVD Fixture installation top 5.) Connect the USB cable and Power cable from the color printer and DVD to the system. For more wiring information, refer to the Basic Service Manual. 6.) Install hide bracket by screwing 2 screws(2159633, BH M4x8 WHT). Figure 8-283 Printer VCR DVD Fixture installation top 7.) Tie the cable properly using the tie wrap. Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-195
[Page 442] 8-7-11 Color Printer Fixture Top Installation - UP-D25MD Printer Figure 8-284 Color Printer Fixture Top Installation 2.) Connect the USB cable and Power cable to the Color Printer. Figure 8-285 Color Printer Fixture Top Installation 3.) Install Fixture DVD bot bracket on the top cover by screwing 2 screws (2327592, FH M4x14). Figure 8-286 Color Printer Fixture Top Installation 8-196 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 443] 8-7-11 Color Printer Fixture Top Installation - UP-D25MD Printer (cont’d) 4.) Install Top Cable BRKT_UPD25MD by screwing 2 screws(2159633, BH M4X8). Figure 8-287 Color Printer Fixture Top Installation 5.) Install Color Printer to the DVD top Bracket by screwing 4 screws (2306562, FH M3X6). Figure 8-288 Color Printer Fixture Top Installation 6.) Screw 4 screws(2159633, BH M4X8) on both sides to fix the color printer with TOP Bracket to the color printer bottom bracket. Figure 8-289 Color Printer Fixture Top Installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-197
[Page 444] 8-7-11 Color Printer Fixture Top Installation - UP-D25MD Printer (cont’d) 7.) Connect the USB cable and Power Cable to the system. 8.) Tie the cables using the tie wrap. Figure 8-290 Color Printer Fixture Top Installation 8-198 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 445] 8-7-12 Printer VCR DVD fixture Top installation - CP900 Printer Figure 8-291 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 2.) Install Fixture VCR bot bracket on the top cover by screwing 2 screws(2306565, BH M4x16 WHT). Figure 8-292 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 3.) Install color printer to the VCR top bracket by screwing 4 screws(5161586, M3x8 WHT). Figure 8-293 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-199
[Page 446] 8-7-12 Printer VCR DVD fixture Top installation - CP900 Printer (cont’d) 4.) Screw 2 screws(2159633, BH M4x8 WHT) on each sides to fix the color printer with base bracket to the color printer top bracket. (3) (4) (1) (2) Figure 8-294 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 5.) Connect the USB from the color printer as shown in the figure below. Figure 8-295 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 6.) Connect the cable from the color printer to the system. Figure 8-296 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 8-200 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 447] 8-7-12 Printer VCR DVD fixture Top installation - CP900 Printer (cont’d) 7.) Install hide bracket by screwing 3 screws(2159633, BH M4x8 WHT). Figure 8-297 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 8.) Tie the cable properly using the tie wrap. Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-201
[Page 448] 8-7-13 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top Installation (MD-3000) 8-7-13-1 VCR Remote Port Configuration 1.) LOGIQ™ P5 control the Mitsubishi MD-3000 VCR through USB. Hence the VCR remote control port must be configured as USB 2.) Open the remote control module in the VCR. Figure 8-298 VCR Remote Control Panel 3.) Unscrew 2 screws on the VCR remote control port panel and out the remote control module from VCR. Unscrew 1 screw on the module. Figure 8-299 VCR Remote Control Panel 2 8-202 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 449] 8-7-13-1 VCR Remote Port Configuration (cont’d) 4.) Set the DIP switch on the VCR remote control panel. The SW 7 in DIP switch should be set to “ON” position for the USB remote control. Figure 8-300 DIP Switch on the Panel 5.) Insert the remote control module into the VCR and connect the USB cable between the “Remote” USB on the console rear panel and USB port of VCR. 6.) Plug the service dongle and turn on the VCR and System. 7.) Login to maintenance mode and open the device manager. 8.) Check if the VCR remote device is identified by OS. Figure 8-301 Remote device in the device manager Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-203
[Page 450] 8-7-13-2 Bracket Installation Figure 8-302 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 2.) Install Fixture Top bracket on the top cover by screwing 2 screws(2306565, BH M4x16 WHT). Figure 8-303 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 3.) Install VCR recorder to the base bracket by screwing 4 screws(2159634, BH M4x10 WHT). Figure 8-304 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 8-204 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 451] 8-7-13-2 Bracket Installation (cont’d) 4.) Screw 2 screws(2159633, BH M4x8 WHT) on each side of the system to fix the VCR recorder with base bracket to the VCR top bracket. Figure 8-305 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 5.) Connect the cables (Power Cable, USB cable, S-VHS Cable, and Sound cables) from the VCR to the system. Figure 8-306 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 6.) Connect the cables to the system on the rear panel. Figure 8-307 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-205
[Page 452] 8-7-13-2 Bracket Installation (cont’d) 7.) Connect the cables (Power Cable, USB cable, S-VHS Cable, and Sound cables) from the VCR to the system. Figure 8-308 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 8.) Connect the cables to the system on the rear panel. Figure 8-309 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation 8-206 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 453] 9.) Install VCR hide bracket by screwing 3 screws(2159633, BH M4x8 WHT). Figure 8-310 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-207
[Page 454] 8-7-14 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top Installation (MD-800) Figure 8-311 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation (LQ MD800) 2.) Install Fixture DVD bot bracket on the top cover by screwing 2 screws(2327592, FH M4x14 YEL). Figure 8-312 Printer VCR DVD Fixture installation top 3.) Install Fixture Top bracket on the top cover by screwing 4 screws(2373565, FH M4x20). Figure 8-313 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation (LQ MD800) 8-208 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 455] 8-7-14 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top Installation (MD-800) (cont’d) 4.) Install DVD recorder to the base bracket by screwing 2 screws(2159633, BH M4x8 WHT) on each side. Figure 8-314 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation (LQ MD800) 5.) Connect the USB cable and power cable from the DVD to the system. Figure 8-315 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation (LQ MD800) 6.) Connect the cables to the system on the rear panel. Figure 8-316 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation (LQ MD800) Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-209
[Page 456] 8-7-14 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top Installation (MD-800) (cont’d) 7.) Install DVD hide bracket by screwing 2 screws(2159633, BH M4x8). Figure 8-317 Printer VCR DVD Fixture Top installation (LQ MD800) 8-210 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 457] 8-7-15 Rear Handle installation 1.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2) and remove Rear hook. Figure 8-318 Rear Handle Installation 2.) Unscrew 2 screws (1-2) and remove the rear handle bracket. Figure 8-319 Rear Handle Installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-211
[Page 458] 8-7-15 Rear Handle installation (cont’d) 3.) Screw 2 screws(5172296, HSH M8x25) from the back of the rear handle. Figure 8-320 Rear Handle Installation 4.) Screw 1 screw(5178673, FH M4x6 WHT) and Install handle dummy bracket. (1) Figure 8-321 Rear Handle Installation 8-212 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 459] 8-7-16 Additional Task Lamp installation 1.) This is the installation instruction of additional task lamp. Figure 8-322 Additional Task Lamp Installation 2.) Connect the USB connector to the location of light bulb mark. Figure 8-323 Additional Task Lamp Installation 3.) Install plastic holder to the task lamp bracket. Figure 8-324 Additional Task Lamp Installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-213
[Page 460] 8-7-16 Additional Task Lamp installation (cont’d) 4.) Install task lamp bracket to the rear side of keyboard by screwing 2 screws(5178673, FH M4x6 WHT). Figure 8-325 Additional Task Lamp Installation 5.) Fix the task lamp light as shown on the figure below. Figure 8-326 Additional Task Lamp Installation 6.) Install BW hide bracket if it is uninstalled during the installation process. Figure 8-327 Additional Task Lamp Installation 8-214 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 461] 8-7-17 Protect Cover Installation 1.) Refer to the figure below the location of the protect covers to be installed. Front Protect Cover Rear Protect Cover Figure 8-328 Protect Cover Installation 2.) Install the protect cover using the double stick tape. Figure 8-329 Protect Cover Installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-215
[Page 462] 8-7-18 Swivel Lock Caster Installation NOTE: Both Front Casters and Rear Casters are swivel type in LOGIQ™ A5 but in LOGIQ™ A5, only Front Casters are swivel type (Rear Casters are “Fixed” type). 1.) This is the installation instruction of the Protect Cover. Refer to the figure below for the location of the protect covers to be installed. 2.) Lift the system up front and fix it not to move during installation. 3.) Unscrew 8 screws (1A-8A) to remove the existing front casters. Refer to the figure below. keep the screws for use. 4.) Replace them to Swivel Lock Casters by screwing 8 screws (1A-8A). Figure 8-330 Swivel Lock Caster 8-216 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 463] 8-7-19 LOGIQ A5 Rear Swivel Caster Installation 1.) Refer to the figure below for the location of the Rear Swivel Caster to be installed. 2.) Lift the system up front and fix it not to move during installation. 3.) Unscrew 8 screws (1-8) to remove the existing front casters. Refer to the figure below. keep the screws for use. 4.) Replace them to Rear Swivel Casters by screwing 8 screws (1-8). Figure 8-331 Rear Swivel Caster Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-217
[Page 464] 8-7-20 BT11 Drawer Option Installation 1.) This section describes the installation procedure of the drawer option. 2.) Assemble the BW PRINTER to DRAWER FIX BRKT with screwing 4 screws (2306562, FH M3X6). Figure 8-332 BT11 Drawer Option Installation 3.) Assemble the BT11 DRAWER to DRAWER FIX BRKT using 2 hooks. Figure 8-333 BT11 Drawer Option Installation 8-218 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 465] 8-7-20 BT11 Drawer Option Installation (cont’d) 4.) Screw 2 screws (2159634, BH M4X10) behind the Assembly. Figure 8-334 BT11 Drawer Option Installation 5.) Screw 2 screws (5176744, BH M4X20) to fix the DRAWER Assy to the system. Figure 8-335 BT11 Drawer Option Installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-219
[Page 466] 8-7-20 BT11 Drawer Option Installation (cont’d) 6.) Connect the BW Printer cable and fix the cables with CABLE MOUNT. Refer to the pictures below. Figure 8-336 BT11 Drawer Option Installation 7.) Installation Completion. Figure 8-337 BT11 Drawer Option Installation 8-220 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 467] 8-7-21 MTZ PROBE HOLDER Installation 1.) This section describes the installation procedure of the MTZ PROBE HOLDER. 2.) Assemble the MTZ PROBE HOLDER FIX BRKT to MTZ HOLDER with 3 screws (2160212, FH M4X8) Figure 8-338 MTZ PROBE HOLDER Installation 3.) Assemble the Holder to bottom of the Keyboard with 2 screws (2159634, BH M4X10). Figure 8-339 MTZ PROBE HOLDER Installation 4.) Installation completion. Figure 8-340 MTZ PROBE HOLDER Installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-221
[Page 468] 8-7-22 DVR Fixture Top Installation - SONY DVO-1000MD DVD Recorder 1.) This section describes the installation procedure of SONY DVO-1000MD DVD recorder. 2.) Unscrew 2 existing screw from the TOP COVER. Figure 8-341 SONY DVR Fixture Top Installation 3.) Assemble the FIXTURE DVD BOTTOM BRKT on the TOP COVER by screwing 2 screws (2327592, FH M4X14). Figure 8-342 SONY DVR Fixture Top Installation 8-222 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 469] 8-7-22 DVR Fixture Top Installation - SONY DVO-1000MD DVD Recorder (cont’d) 4.) Assemble the SONY DVO-1000MD to TOP FIXTURE BRKT by screwing 4 screws (2306562, FH M3X6). Figure 8-343 SONY DVR Fixture Top Installation 5.) Assemble the DVO-1000MD with TOP FIXTURE BRKT to FIXTURE DVD BOTTOM BRKT by screwing 4 screws (2159333, BH M4X8). Figure 8-344 SONY DVR Fixture Top Installation Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction 8-223
[Page 470] 8-7-22 DVR Fixture Top Installation - SONY DVO-1000MD DVD Recorder (cont’d) 6.) Connect the cable connector with the reference to the picture below. Figure 8-345 SONY DVR Fixture Top Installation 7.) Assemble the TOP CABLE BRKT behind the SONY DVR to cover the Cables by screwing 2 screws (2153633, BH M4X8) and tie the cable using the CABLE TIE with the hole in the red rectangle shown in the right picture of Figure 8-346 below. Figure 8-346 SONY DVR Fixture Top Installation 8-224 Section 8-7 - Mechanical Option Installation instruction
[Page 471] Section 8-8 PHI(Protecting Health Information) DATA COMMUNICATION It's not allowed to send the PHI data outside of confidential Patient-Doctor environment without encryption of PHI. If PHI needs to be sent to GE employees for troubleshooting purpose, all PHI should be encrypted or protected from unauthorized access by using PKZIP to compress the files with password. And also it can only be sent via a GE Intranet. 8-8-1 Prevent exporting patient data to removable To protect health information, prevent exporting patient data to removable media (CD/DVD/USB flash/ USB HDD) using Data Transfer (Export/MPEGVue), SaveAs, QuickSave, EzBackup/EzMove, Backup for Patient/Report Archive. This feature can be set ON/OFF by only Administrator on Utility -> Admin -> System Admin page. (Default is Off) Figure 8-347 Enable/Disable Option for Prevent export data to removable media Section 8-8 - PHI(Protecting Health Information) DATA COMMUNICATION 8-225
[Page 472] 8-8-2 ENCRYPTION PROCEDURE 1.) Open PKZip for windows wizard, click on Use PIZIP options Wizard and click on options to do some settings. Figure 8-348 Open PKZip for windows wizard for setting Options 8-226 Section 8-8 - PHI(Protecting Health Information) DATA COMMUNICATION
[Page 473] 2.) Switch to Security tab, make below settings, and then click " OK " Figure 8-349 Setting Security tab for mask passwords 3.) Choose Compress files into a new ZIP file, and then click "Next" Figure 8-350 Setting Compress files into a new .ZIP file Section 8-8 - PHI(Protecting Health Information) DATA COMMUNICATION 8-227
[Page 474] 4.) Set storage location and file name Figure 8-351 Set storage location and file name 5.) Select the files you want to compress, the Add to List , click on Finish Figure 8-352 Select the file want compress 8-228 Section 8-8 - PHI(Protecting Health Information) DATA COMMUNICATION
[Page 475] 6.) A dialog box will pop out ask for password entry, enter password, confirm it then click OK . Figure 8-353 Confirm password entry 7.) After finish compress, click Done. Figure 8-354 Successful extraction Section 8-8 - PHI(Protecting Health Information) DATA COMMUNICATION 8-229
[Page 476] This page was intentionally left blank. 8-230 Section 8-8 - PHI(Protecting Health Information) DATA COMMUNICATION
[Page 477] Chapter 9 Renewal Parts Section 9-1Overview This chapter gives you an overview of Renewal Parts for LOGIQ™ P5 and A5/A5Pro. Table 9-1 Contents in Chapter 9 Section Description Page Number 9-1 Overview 9-1 9-2 List of Abbreviations 9-2 9-3 MONITOR 9-3 9-4 KEYBOARD 9-5 9-5 COVERS 9-7 9-6 PCB 9-9 9-7 BODY 9-11 9-8 POWER 9-14 9-9 Cables 9-16 9-10 Options 9-20 9-11 Software 9-21 9-12 Probes 9-22 9-13 Peripherals 9-23 Section 9-1 - Overview 9-1
[Page 478] Section 9-2List of Abbreviations • Assy - Assembly • Ctrl - Control • FRU 1 - Replacement part available in part hub • FRU 2 - Replacement part available from the manufacturer (lead time involved) • Int - Internal • I/O - Input/Output • KB - Keyboard • LCD - Liquid Crystal Display • MON - Monitor • PAT - Patient • PC - Personal Computer (Back End Processor) • SYSCONCM - System control cellular SOM • SYSCONPM - System control Pentium SOM • APS - Arirang Power supply • ARP - Arirang RearPanel • ACWD - Arirang Continuous Wave Doppler • P3RLY - Port 3 Relay • P2RLY - Port 2 Relay • CL1TRX - COLOR MLA1 TX/RX • BL1TRX - BLACK & WHITE MLA1 Tx/Rx • ARC - Arirang Remote control • ACPC - AC Power Control • AEXP - Arirang External Pheriperal • ASIG - Analog Signal connection 9-2 Section 9-2 - List of Abbreviations
[Page 479] Section 9-3 MONITOR Figure 9-1 Monitor Section 9-3 - MONITOR 9-3
[Page 480] Section 9-3 MONITOR (cont’d) LA5 monitor cover set 5144589-3 LOGIQ A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes 101 LP5 Monitor cover set 5144590-3 LOGIQ P5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes LP5 Monitor Cover Set 5252337-2 1 1 Yes LCD Arm with cover 5144507 LOGIQ A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes LCD Flexible Arm KIT 5264538 LOGIQ P5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes LCD Arm with cover 5399274 LOGIQ P5 1 1 Yes LCD Flexible Arm KIT 5257303-3 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes P5 LCDMON II Assy 5328696 LOGIQ P5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes A5 LCDMON II Assy 5328697 LOGIQ A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes P5 BT11 LCDMONII Assy 5399193 LOGIQ P5 1 1 Yes Table 9-2 MONITOR 9-4 Section 9-3 - MONITOR
[Page 481] Section 9-4 KEYBOARD Figure 9-2 KEYBOARD BLOCK Section 9-4 - KEYBOARD 9-5
[Page 482] Section 9-4 KEYBOARD (cont’d) LOGIQ P5 Main Keyboard Assy 5144536 LOGIQ P5 ONLY 1 1 Yes Yes Yes LOGIQ A5 Main Keyboard Assy 5171625 LOGIQ A5 ONLY 1 1 Yes Yes Yes LOGIQ P5 Main Keyboard Assy for 5334846 LOGIQ P5 Japan Only 1 1 Yes JPN LOGIQ A5 Main Keyboard Assy for 5334848 LOGIQ A5 Japan Only 1 1 Yes JPN Main Keyboard Assy 5252353 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes Main Keyboard Assy for JPN 5334850 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes LOGIQ P5 Sub Keyboard Assy 5144538-2 LOGIQ P5 ONLY 1 1 Yes Yes Yes LOGIQ A5 Sub Keyboard Assy 5177533-2 LOGIQ A5 ONLY 1 1 Yes Yes Yes LOGIQ P5 Sub Keyboard Assy for 5334847 LOGIQ P5 Japan Only 1 1 Yes JPN LOGIQ A5 Sub Keyboard Assy for 5334849 LOGIQ A5 Japan Only 1 1 Yes JPN LP5 Sub Keyboard Assy 5399194 LOGIQ P5 1 1 Yes LP5 Sub Keyboard Assy for JPN 5399192 LOGIQ P5 1 1 Yes 202 Trackball Assy 5144543 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes English A/N Key Assy 5144533 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Greek A/N Key Assy 5168937 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Russian A/N Key Assy 5167845 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Swedish A/N Key Assy 5177708 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Norwegian A/N Key Assy 5176980 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes English A/N Key Assy 5252354 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes Greek A/N Key Assy 5252355 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes Russian A/N Key Assy 5252356 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes Swedish A/N Key Assy 5252357 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes Norwegian A/N Key Assy 5252358 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes 204 Freeze Key Assy 5144540 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 205 TGC Key Assy 5144541 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 206 TGC Knob Set 5144542 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 207 Sub Keyboard Encoder Knob set 5144539 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 208 LOGIQ P5 Keycap set 5144547 LOGIQ P5 ONLY 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 209 Main Keyboard Encoder Knob set 5177823 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 210 Speaker Pad 5224928 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Table 9-3 KEYBOARD 9-6 Section 9-4 - KEYBOARD
[Page 483] Section 9-5 COVERS Figure 9-3 COVERS Section 9-5 - COVERS 9-7
[Page 484] Section 9-5 COVERS (cont’d) Side Left Cover 5327119 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Side Left Cover 5327214 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes Side Right Cover 5327120 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Side Right Cover 5327215 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes Front Cover 5144511 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Front Cover 5336567 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes Rear Cover 5144512-2 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes LP6 Rear Cover 5252315 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes Middle Cover 5144513 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes LP6 Middle Cover 5252310 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes Top Cover 5144514 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes LP6 Top Cover 5252319 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes Top Bottom Cover 5144515 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes LP6 Top Bottom Cover 5252318 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes Pole Cover 5144516 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes LP6 Pole Cover 5252314 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes Neck Front 5144517 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Neck Front 5399195 LOGIQ P5 1 1 Yes Neck Rear 5144519 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes LP6 Neck Rear 5252312 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes Dummy Cover L 5168108 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Dummy Cover L 5257053 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes Dummy Cover R 5167096 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Dummy Cover R 5257042 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes 312 EMI Cover L 5327123 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 313 EMI Cover R 5327124 LOGIQ P5/A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Flexible Arm Cover Set 5306791-2 LOGIQ P5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Flexible Arm Cover Set 5257033-2 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes Table 9-4 COVERS 9-8 Section 9-5 - COVERS
[Page 485] Section 9-6PCB Figure 9-4 PCB BOARDS Section 9-6 - PCB 9-9
[Page 486] Section 9-6 PCB (cont’d) 400 APS Assy 5166108 LOGIQ P5 / LOGIQ A5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes LOGIQ P5 or LOGIQ A5 with CL1TRX Assy 5144578 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Color Option BL1TRX Assy 5172144 LOGIQ A5 ONLY 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes LOGIQ P5 or LOGIQ A5 with 3 P3RLY assy 5144579-2 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes port option P2RLY assy 5144580-2 LOGIQ A5 ONLY 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 403 P2RLY with dummy 5177273-2 LOGIQ P5 ONLY 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Make sure to check the removal procedure and notice of “8-2-31 - 404 Backplane assy 5144581-2 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Backplane Assy“before removing and installation the Assy. 405 ACWD Assy 5144582-2 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes LOGIQ P5 ONLY Make sure to check the removal procedure and notice of “8-2-33 - SYSCONPM Assy 5144584-4 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes SYSCON PM Assy/SYSCON CM Assy“before removing and installation the Assy LOGIQ A5 ONLY Make sure to check the removal procedure and notice of 8-2-33 - SYSCONCM Assy 5177111-4 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes SYSCON PM Assy/SYSCON CM Assy“before removing and installation the Assy LOGIQ P5 or LOGIQ A5 with PM SOM Assy with 1G 5178410-2 CPU Upgrade or Color Upgrade 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Option CM SOM Assy with 512M 5178834-2 LOGIQ A5 ONLY 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes PC module DualCore SOM 5252327-2 1 1 Yes Common with LP6 408 ASIG Assy 5144588 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 409 ECG Assy 5196517 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Make sure to check the removal procedure and notice of “8-2-33 - L1SYSCON BASE 410 5179267-4 SYSCON PM Assy/SYSCON CM 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes BOARD Assy“before removing and installation the Assy 411 ASIR Assy 5264181 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 412 Nest Fan Assy 5144556 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Table 9-5 PCB BOARDS 9-10 Section 9-6 - PCB
[Page 487] Section 9-7 BODY Figure 9-5 BODY BLOCK Section 9-7 - BODY 9-11
[Page 488] Section 9-7 BODY (cont’d) Front Caster 5144523 LOGIQ P5 ONLY 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Front Caster 5178525 LOGIQ A5 ONLY 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Rear Caster 5144524 LOGIQ P5 ONLY 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Rear Caster 5177898 LOGIQ A5 ONLY 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 502 Rear Handle 5144525 Option 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 503 Rear Hook 5165418 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 504 Probe Holder 5165304 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 505 Cup Holder 5168950 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 506 ECG Cable Hook 5164599 Option 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 507 Air Filter Set 5144526 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes SATA (80G) HDD Assy 5177519 1 1 Yes Yes P5 BT09 160G SATA HDD 509 5328125 1 1 Yes Assy SATA HDD 250G Assy 5400701 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes ARP Assy 110V 5144586-2 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes ARP Assy 220V 5144587-2 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes LP6 ARP Assy 110V 5252328 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes LP6 ARP Assy 220V 5252329 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes 511 Cable Arm Hook 5178888-2 Option 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 512 160G HDD for Consip 5264671 Only Italy Consip System 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Touch UP paint 5176646 Option 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Touch UP paint 5257041 Common with LP6 1 1 Yes 514 UPS Fixture brkt Kit 5212390 Option 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Option 517 Option Dummy Brkt 5363935-2 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Common with LP6 Table 9-6 BODY BLOCK 9-12 Section 9-7 - BODY
[Page 489] Samsung latptop type Samsung Slim DVD Drive 5264920-2 1 1 Yes Slim DVD drive DVD drive 5269594-2 Pioneer DVD Drive 1 1 Yes Samsung Slim DVD 515 DAB Assy 5315404 1 1 Yes driver adapter Assy Samsung SATA DVD + 516 DVD Assy Set 5327112-2 1 1 Yes Yes BRKT Table 9-7 DVD Section 9-7 - BODY 9-13
[Page 490] Section 9-8 POWER Figure 9-6 POWER BLOCK 9-14 Section 9-8 - POWER
[Page 491] Section 9-8 POWER (cont’d) 600 ACPC Assy 5144559 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes LOGIQ P5 Transbox Assy 110V 5144560 LOGIQ P5 ONLY 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes LOGIQ P5 Transbox Assy 220V 5144562 LOGIQ P5 ONLY 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes LOGIQ A5 Transbox Assy 110V 5177417 LOGIQ A5 ONLY 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes LOGIQ A5 Transbox Assy 220V 5177276 LOGIQ A5 ONLY 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Fuse Set 110 5168996 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Fuse Set 220 5177924 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Power Cord for 110v 2389073 110v 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Power Cord for 220v 5308254 220v 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Power Cord for China 2389074 Only China 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Power Cord for Israel 5189985 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Power Cord for Argentina 5189874 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 603 Power Code for Italy 5189619 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Power Cord for Denmark 5189461 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Power Cord for ANZ 5189439 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Power Cord for UK/HK 5189398 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Power Cord for Switzerland 5189311 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Power Cord for India 5189127 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Table 9-8 POWER BLOCK Section 9-8 - POWER 9-15
[Page 492] Section 9-9Cables Figure 9-7 Cable 9-16 Section 9-9 - Cables
[Page 493] Section 9-9 Cables (cont’d) DVI Cable + Speaker Cable + KBD Control Cable 1. DVI Cable Connect one side (Label:DVI) to LCDMON II Assy and another side (Label:J206) to PCB Silk J206 of Backplane Assy 2. Speaker Cable Connect one side (Label: L 700 Multi Cable Assy 1 5169853 & R) to Label L,R of 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Speaker Assy and another side (Label:J207) to PCB Silk J207 of Backplane Assy 3. Keyboard Control Cable Connect one side (Label:CON1) to Keyboard Assy and another side (Label:J209) to PCB Silk J209 of Backplane Assy Mon Pwr Cable + BW PWR Cable + BW USB Cable + KB USB Cable 1. Monitor Power Cable - Connect one side (Label:CON7) to Label CON 7 of Monitor power Con cable or Monitor power con long cable and another side (Label: CON 11) to Lable CON 11 of Internal AC Power cable assy 2. BW Printer Power Cable - Connect one side (Label:CON10) to Label CON10 of USB CON Cable 701 Multi Cable Assy 2 5168859 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes CON9) to Lable CON9 of LP5 ARP Assy 3.Keyboard USB Cable - Connect one side (Label:KBD) to LP5 Keyboard Assy J221) to PCB Silk J221 of LP5 Backplane Assy” 4. BW Printer USB Cable - Connect one side (Label:PRN) to BW Printer Bracket and another side (Label: J223) to PCB Silk J223 of LP5 Backplane Assy” Section 9-9 - Cables 9-17
[Page 494] Front USB Cable + MIC 1. Front USB Cable - Connect one side (Label: F_USB) to Front USB Bracket and another side (Label: J14) to Label J14 of 702 Multi Cable Assy 3 5168797 LP5 ARP Assy 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 2. MIC Cable - Connect one side (Label:MIC) to LP5 Front USB Bracket and another side (Label: J205) to PCB Silk J205 of LP5 Backplane Assy Connect one side (label:CON7) to Label “CON7” of Monitor power 703 Monitor Power Conn Cable 5166286 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes cable and another side (Label:MON) to LCDMON II Assy Connect one side (label:CON7) to Label Monitor Power Conn Long “CON7” of Monitor power 704 5168941 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Cable cable and another side (Label:MON) to LCDMON II Assy Connect one side (Label: J203) to PCB Silk “J203” of LP5 Backplane and another 705 ACPC Cable 5168846 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes side (Label:CON2) to Label “CON2” of Internal ACPC ConCable Connect one side to BW Printer Power cable and 706 Printer Cable Assy 1 5177395 another side to External 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Printer (short cable) Connect one side to BW Printer Power cable and 707 Printer Cable Assy 2 5168842 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes another side to External Printer (long cable) Connect one side (Label:ODD) to LP5 ODD Assy and another side 708 EIDE Cable 5168955-2 1 1 Yes Yes (Label: J204) to PCB Silk J204 of LP5 Backplane Assy Connect one side (Label:APS) to Label APS of LP5 APS Assy 709 APS AC Power Cable 5168913 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes CON3) to Label CON3 of LP5 AC Out Cable 9-18 Section 9-9 - Cables
[Page 495] Connect one side (Label CON5) to Label CON5 of LP5 AC Out Cable 710 Peripheral AC Power Cable 5165244 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes CON6) to Label CON6 of LP5 ARP Assy Connect one side (Label J13) to Label PCB Silk J13 of LP5 Syscon Assy 711 AEXP Cable 5172066 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes J15) to Label J15 of LP5 ARP Assy Connect one side to DCWD Bracket and another 712 DCWD Cable Assy 5174403 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes side(Label: J7) to PCB Silk J7 of ACWD Assy ECG Patient Cable only for 713 IEC Type ECG CABLE 5341188 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Japan ECG Patient Cable for Asia, 714 AHA Type ECG CABLE 5341189 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes US, and Europe. Section 9-9 - Cables 9-19
[Page 496] Section 9-10Options Table 9-10 OPTIONS 800 Endo Probe Holder 5171933 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 801 VCR DVD Fixture Top 5171717-2 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 802 BW Printer Fixture Keyboard 5172473-3 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 803 BW Printer Fixture Middle 5172353-2 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 804 VCR Color Printer DVD Fixture Middle 5172238-3 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 805 Paper Holder 5172484-2 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 806 LCD Flexible Arm KIT 5264538-2 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 807 Probe Cable Hanger 5172178 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 808 Drawer 5171620 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 809 ECG Kit with AHA cable 5172098-2 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 810 ECG kit with IEC cable 5341186 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 811 4D KIT 5171709-5 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 3 Button Foot Switch 5327110 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 Button Foot Switch 5327111 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 813 Additional Task Lamp KIT 5171582 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 814 Microphone 5171727 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 815 Protective Cover 5176417 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 816 Swivel Lock Caster 5184603 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 817 3rd probe Ports kit 5171892-3 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes LOGIQ P5 818 CW Doppler kit 5171900-2 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes ONLY 819 ARC Switch Set 5327115 1 1 Yes Yes 820 ARC Receiver Dongle 5336186 1 1 Yes Yes 9-20 Section 9-10 - Options
[Page 497] Section 9-11Software Table 9-11 Software Item Part Name FRU Number Description Qty FRU LP5 BT11 CD SET 5395395 R4.0.X 1 1 LP5 A5 BT09 CD SET 5327125 R3.0.X 1 1 LP5 A5 BT08 CD SET 5272499-5 R2.0.4 1 1 LP5 A5 BT06 CD SET 5196353-8 R1.0.8 1 1 Section 9-11 - Software 9-21
[Page 498] Section 9-12Probes Table 9-12 Probes Item Part Name FRU Number Qty FRU R1.0.X R2.0.X R3.0.X~ R4.0.X~ 1 3.5C PROBE 2050357 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 2 3.5CS PROBE 2051858 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 3 4C PROBE 5123455 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 8C PROBE 2348094 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 5 E8C PROBE 2294641 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 E8CS PROBE 47236865 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 7 BE9C PROBE 2389382 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 8L PROBE 5140738 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 9 9L PROBE 5149427 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 10 10L PROBE 2294523 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 11 11L PROBE 5171885 1 1 Yes Yes Yes 12 12L PROBE 2295377 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 13 i739 PROBE 2259206 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 14 t739 PROBE 2259246 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 15 3S-02 PROBE 2323337 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 16 5S-02 PROBE 2347469 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 17 7S-02 PROBE 2347471 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 18 ERB PROBE 2258309 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 19 4D3C-L PROBE KTZ195893 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 20 P2D TE100024 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 21 P6D TQ100002 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 22 UG7C Probe 5147187 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 23 5CS Probe 5143934 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes 24 3CRF Probe 5196216 1 1 Yes Yes 25 4DE7C Probe KTZ195859 1 1 Yes Yes Yes 26 3Sp Probe 5327196 1 1 Yes Yes 27 5Sp Probe 5327197 1 1 Yes Yes 28 4D8C Probe KTZ156959 1 1 Yes Yes 29 BE9CS Probe 5266132 1 1 Yes Yes 30 i12L Probe 2264883 1 1 Yes Yes 9-22 Section 9-12 - Probes
[Page 499] Section 9-13Peripherals Table 9-13 Peripherals Item Part Name FRU Number Description Qty FRU Panasonic LQ-MD800P 1 LQ-MD800P 5120592 1 1 DVR Video Recorder Panasonic LQ-MD800E 2 LQ-MD800E 5120593 1 1 DVR Video Recorder 3 VCR Mitsubishi HS-MD3000U 066E9513 VCR 1 1 4 VCR Mitsubishi HS-MD3000E 066E9514 VCR 1 1 5 Sony UP-D895MD 2288502 Digital B/W printer 1 1 6 SONY UP-D897 5171608 Digital B/W printer 1 1 7 Mitsubishi P93D Digital B/W printer 1 1 8 Mitsubishi P95DW Digital B/W printer 1 1 9 Mitsubishi P95D Digital B/W printer 1 1 10 Mitsubishi P95DE Digital B/W printer 1 1 11 Mitsubishi P95DW-N Digital B/W printer 1 1 12 Mitsubishi P95DW-B Digital B/W printer 1 1 13 SONY UP-D23MD 2401985 Digital Color printer 1 1 14 Sony UP-D25MD 5389822 Digital Color printer 1 1 15 Mitsubishi CP30DW 5310492 Digital Color printer 1 1 16 Mitsubishi CP30DW-Z Digital Color printer 1 1 17 HP 990cxi 066E0407 Standard printer 1 1 18 HP 6122 2378741 Standard printer 1 1 19 HP 6540 5121837 Standard printer 1 1 20 HP 5650 5121839 Standard printer 1 1 21 HP Business Inkjet 1200 066E0424 Standard printer 1 1 22 HP Office jet Pro K550 EP100925 Standard printer 1 1 23 HP Office jet Pro K5400 EQ100158 Standard printer 1 1 24 HP Deskjet D4360 5357534 Standard printer 1 1 25 HP Deskjet 6940 5351754 Standard printer 1 1 26 LexMark Z65 Standard printer 1 1 27 HP 1000 Standard printer 1 1 28 Xerox Phaser 8400 Standard printer 1 1 29 HP Officejet 6000 Special Edition Standard printer 1 1 30 Sony DVO-1000MD VCR 1 1 Section 9-13 - Peripherals 9-23
[Page 500] This page was intentionally left blank. 9-24 Section 9-13 - Peripherals
[Page 501] Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance Section 10-1 Overview 10-1-1 Periodic Maintenance Inspections It has been determined by engineering that your LOGIQ™ P5 system does not have any high wear components that fail with use, therefore no Periodic Maintenance Inspections are mandatory. Some Customers Quality Assurance Programs may require additional tasks and or inspections at a different frequency than listed in this manual. 10-1-2 Purpose of Chapter 10 This chapter describes Care & Maintenance on the scanner and peripherals. These procedures are intended to maintain the quality of the ultrasound systems performance . Read this chapter completely and familiarize yourself with the procedures before performing a task. Table 10-1 Contents in Chapter 10 Section Description Page Number 10-1 Overview 10-1 10-2 Why do Maintenance 10-2 10-3 Maintenance Task Schedule 10-2 10-4 Tools Required 10-4 10-5 System Maintenance 10-7 10-6 Electrical Safety Tests 10-12 10-7 When There's Too Much Leakage Current... 10-28 CAUTION Practice good ESD prevention. Wear an anti–static strap when handling electronic parts and even when disconnecting/connecting cables. DANGER THERE ARE SEVERAL PLACES ON THE BACKPLANE, THE AC DISTRIBUTION, AND DC DISTRIBUTION THAT ARE DANGEROUS. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG AND OPEN THE MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE YOU REMOVE ANY PARTS. BE CAUTIOUS WHENEVER POWER IS STILL ON AND COVERS ARE REMOVED. CAUTION Do not pull out or insert circuit boards while power is ON. CAUTION Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System performance and cooling require this. Section 10-1 - Overview 10-1
[Page 502] Section 10-2 Why do Maintenance 10-2-1 Keeping Records It is good business practice that ultrasound facilities maintain records of quality checks and corrective maintenance. The Ultrasound Inspection Certificate (provided on page 10-29) provides the customer with documentation that the ultrasound scanner is maintained on a periodic basis. A copy of the Ultrasound Periodic Maintenance Inspection Certificate should be kept in the same room or near the scanner. 10-2-2 Quality Assurance In order to gain accreditation from organizations such as the American College of Radiology (USA), it is the customer’s responsibility to have a quality assurance program in place for each scanner. The program must be directed by a medical physicists, the supervising radiologist/physician or appropriate designee. Routine quality control testing must occur regularly. The same tests are performed during each period so that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective action can be taken. Testing results, corrective action and the effects of corrective action must be documented and maintained on the site. Your GE service representative can help you with establishing, performing and maintaining records for a quality assurance program. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service. Section 10-3 Maintenance Task Schedule 10-3-1 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? The Care & Maintenance Task Schedule (provided on page 10-3) specifies how often your LOGIQ™ P5 should be serviced and outlines items requiring special attention. NOTE: It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the LOGIQ™ P5 care & maintenance is performed as scheduled in order to retain its high level of safety, dependability and performance. Your GE Service Representative has an in-depth knowledge of your LOGIQ™ P5 ultrasound scanning system and can best provide competent, efficient service. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service. The service procedures and recommended intervals shown in the Care & Maintenance Task Schedule assumes that you use your LOGIQ™ P5 for an average patient load (10-12 per day) and not use it as a primary mobile unit which is transported between diagnostic facilities. NOTE: If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, then it is recommended to increase the maintenance frequencies. 10-2 Section 10-2 - Why do Maintenance
[Page 503] Table 10-2 Customer Care Schedule Per Facilities Service at Indicated Time Daily Monthly Quarterly QA Program Notes Clean Probes •* * or before each use Clean Probe Holders • more frequently depending on Clean Air Filter • your environment Inspect AC Mains Cable • Mobile Unit Check Weekly Inspect Cables and Connectors • Clean Console • Clean Monitor and Touch Panel • Inspect Wheels, Casters, brakes and • Mobile Unit Check Daily Swivel Locks Check Control Panel Movement • Mobile Unit Check Daily also after corrective Console Leakage Current Checks • maintenance also after corrective Peripheral Leakage Current Checks • maintenance also after corrective Surface Probe Leakage Current Checks • maintenance Endocavity Probe Leakage also after corrective Current Checks maintenance Transesphongeal Probe Leakage also after corrective Current Checks maintenance Surgical Probe Leakage also after corrective Current Checks maintenance also after corrective Measurement Accuracy Checks • maintenance also after corrective Probe/Phantom Checks • maintenance also after corrective Functional Checks • maintenance Section 10-3 - Maintenance Task Schedule 10-3
[Page 504] Section 10-4 Tools Required 10-4-1 Standard GE Tool Kit The following is a description of the “Standard” GE tool kit in the USA. Not all tools are required for PMs. Table 10-3 Overview of GE-1 Tool Kit Contents Tool ID Description Tool ID Description 9-45358 Pliers Retaining Ring 9-XL9971MM Xcelite-hex Blade 1.27mm 9-4078 Scribe 9-XL9972MM Xcelite-hex Blade 1.5mm 9-44572 Wrench Open End 3/8 - 7/16 9-XL9973MM Xcelite-hex Blade 2 mm 9-44579 Wrench Open End 1/2 - 9/16 9-XL9974MM Xcelite-hex Blade 2.5mm 9-44579 Wrench Open End 1/2 - 9/16 9-XL9975MM Xcelite-hex Blade 3mm 9-45385 Pliers, Arc Joint 7 inch 9-XL9976MM Xcelite-hex Blade 4mm 9-45378 Pliers, Slip Joint 9-XL9977MM Xcelite-hex Blade 5mm 9-4518 Pliers, Long Nose, Miniature 9-XL991CM Handle 9-4518 Pliers, Long Nose, Miniature C2356E Screw starter - Kedman Quick Wedge 9-44776 Ignition Wrench Set, 10 pc. BLBO Box - 18 Compartment 9-44601 Wrench, Adj., 4 inch DWL4283T Box - 5 Compartment 9-4151 Screwdriver, Blade, Stubby 9-41322 Pickup Tool, Claw type 9-41421 Screwdriver, Blade, Pocket clip 9-6757 6 pc Needle File Set 9-41594 Screwdriver, Blade 1/8 in. x 4 in. 9-9487 Utility Knife 9-41581 Screwdriver, Blade 3/16 in. x 4 in. 9-45341 Pliers Vice Grip 10 inch 9-39451 20' Steel Tape, locking Spring load 9-3001 Xacto Pen Knife 9-GH807 Ratchet, Offset, Slotted 9-HT62002 Solder Aid, Fork and Hook 68-412 Ratchet, Offset, Phillips 9-4099 Mirror, Round, Telescoping 9-GH130 Tapered Reamer 9-GH3001 Steel Rule Decimal 6 inch 9-41584 Screwdriver, slotted 1/4 in.X 6 in. 9-GH300ME Steel Rule Metric 6 inch 9-4118 Screwdriver, Phillips #2, Stubby 9-XL9920 Xcelite-hex Blade.050 inch 9-41293 Screwdriver, Phillips #0 9-XL9921 Xcelite-hex Blade 1/16 inch 9-41294 Screwdriver, Phillips #1 9-XL9922 Xcelite-hex Blade 5/16 inch 9-41295 Screwdriver, Phillips #2 9-XL9923 Xcelite-hex Blade 3/32 inch 9-46677 Hex Keys, 20 pc., Metric 9-XL9924 Xcelite-hex Blade 1/8 inch 9-34701 1/4 in. Standard.Socket set (19 pc) 9-XL9925 Xcelite-hex Blade 5/32 inch 9-43499 1/2 inch Socket 1/4 inch drive 9-XL9926 Xcelite-hex Blade 3/16 inch 9-4355 Flex Spinner 9-XL99764 Xcelite-hex Blade 7/64 9-43523 Breaker 9-XL99964 Xcelite-hex Blade 9/64 9-43531 6 inch Ext. 9-XLM60 Mini-screwdriver kit 10-4 Section 10-4 - Tools Required
[Page 505] Table 10-3 Overview of GE-1 Tool Kit Contents (Continued) Tool ID Description Tool ID Description 9-65283 Case 8.5 in. x 4.5 in. x 2 in. Deep 9-45072 Pliers 6 inch Diagonal 9-46696 Hex Keys 9-XL100X Wire Stripper/Cutter 5 inch - 100X 9-39829 Torpedo Level, Magnetic 9-XL87CG Pliers - very fine needle nose-87CG 9-38461 Hammer, Ball Peen, 4 oz 9-WEWDT-07 Weller-Soldering-Replacement Tip(1) 9-4280 Universal Joint 1/4 inch 9-WS175-E Wiss - Surgical Scissors 9-WEW60P3 Weller - Soldering Iron, 3 wire KH174 Hemostat 5 inch Straight 9-WECT5B6 Weller - Soldering Iron Tip KH175 Hemostat 5 inch curved 9-WEWDP12 Weller - Desoldering Pump 9-Z9480121 Alignment tool (red) 93383 Flashlight Mini-Mag Lite (AAA Bat.) 9-GH408 Tweezers 21576 Brush - Bristle 9-4516 Pliers 4 1/4 inch Diagonal Table 10-4 Overview of GE-2 Tool Kit Contents GE-2 Sears Kit (#99034) Tool ID Description Tool ID Description 9-45381 Pliers, Arc Joint 9 1/2 inch 9-44067 Socket 1 1/16 in. for 1/2 in. drive 9-45092 Pliers, Linesman 8 1/2 inch 9-42679 Socket 10MM Hex for 1/2 in. drive (2273333) 9-42882 Punch, Pin 3/32 inch 9-44262 Extension 10 inch for 1/2 in. drive (2273405) 9-42884 Punch, Pin 5/32 inch 9-4258 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch Adapter 9-42886 Punch, Pin 1/4 inch 9-34374 3/8 inch Metric Socket Set - 12 PT 9-42973 Cold Chisel 1/2 inch 9-44311 16mm Socket 12 pt. 9-GH77 Center Punch Automatic 9-33485 Metal Socket Tray 9-GH890 File Handle, Adj. 9-33484 Metal Socket Tray 9-31276 File, Round, Bastard 8 inch 9-33484 Metal Socket Tray 9-31277 File, Half Round, Bastard 8 inch 9-52068 Tap and Drill Set 9-31263 File, Flat Mill 8 inch 9-52722 #6 Tap 21045C Close Quarter Saw 9-52723 #8 Tap 9-44604 Wrench, Adj 10 inch High Speed Drill Set 9-41587 Screwdriver 5/16 inch x 8 inch #36 Drill 9-41586 Screwdriver, Stubby 5/16 inch #29 Drill 9-GH19512 Countersink 1/2 inch 9-44046 3/8 inch Socket Set 9-44741 12 PC Combination Wrench Set Section 10-4 - Tools Required 10-5
[Page 506] 10-4-2 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment 10-4-2-1 Specific Requirements for Care & Maintenance Table 10-5 Overview of Requirements for Care & Maintenance Tool Part Number Comments Digital Volt Meter (DVM) Electric Safety Analyzer DALE 600 46-285652G1 For 120V Unit Electric Safety Analyzer DALE 46-328406G2 For 220V Units 600E Leakage Current Ultrasound Kit 2113015 For 120V and 220V Units 46–194427P231 Kit includes anti–static mat, wrist strap and cables for 200 to 240 46–194427P279 V system Anti Static Kit 46–194427P369 3M #2204 Large adjustable wrist strap 46–194427P373 3M #2214 Small adjustable wrist strap 46–194427P370 3M #3051 conductive ground cord 46–194427P278 120V Anti Static Vacuum Cleaner 46–194427P279 230V Air Filter 10-5-4-2 air intake Safety Analyzer 46–285652G1 DALE 600 KIT (or equivalent) for electrical tests E7010GG 60 minute SVHS VCR Cassette E7010GF 120 minute SVHS VCR Head Cleaner See VCR user manual for requirements E8381AA blank 128 M disk E8381AB blank 230 M disk 3.5” MOD MEDIA 5.25” MOD Media 3.5” MOD Media Cleaner 2117811 cleans the diskettes 5.25” MOD Media Cleaner cleans the diskettes 3.5” MOD Head Cleaner Kit 2148392 cleans the drive heads 5.25” MOD Head Cleaner Kit cleans the drive heads QIQ Phantom E8370RB RMI Grayscale Target Model 403GS CD-RW Media For LOGIQ™ P5 B/W Printer Cleaning Sheet See printer user manual for requirements Color Printer Cleaning Sheet See printer user manual for requirements Disposable Gloves 10-6 Section 10-4 - Tools Required
[Page 507] Section 10-5 System Maintenance 10-5-1 Preliminary Checks The preliminary checks take about 15 minutes to perform. refer to the system user documentation whenever necessary. Table 10-6 System Checks 1 Ask & Listen Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment. Fill in the top of the Ultrasound Inspection Certificate (see page 29). Note all probes and system 2 Paperwork options. Turn the system power on and verify that all fans and peripherals turn on. Watch the displays during 3 Power up power up to verify that no warning or error messages are displayed. 4 Probes Verify that the system properly recognizes all probes. 5 Displays Verify proper display on the monitor and touch panel. 6 Presets Backup all customer presets on an CD-RW. Section 10-5 - System Maintenance 10-7
[Page 508] 10-5-2 Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4) The functional checks take about 60 minutes to perform. refer to the system user documentation whenever necessary. 10-5-2-1 System Checks Table 10-7 System Functional Checks Chec k Step Description Verify basic B-Mode (2D) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode B-Mode of operation. Verify basic CF-Mode (Color Flow Mode) operation. Check the basic system controls that CF-Mode affect this mode of operation. Verify basic Doppler operation (PW and CW if available). Check the basic system controls Doppler Modes that affect this mode of operation. Verify basic M-Mode operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of M-Mode operation. Verify the basic operation of all optional modes such as Multi-Image, 3D, Contrast, *Applicable Software Harmonics, Cine, Stress Echo,... etc. Check the basic system controls that affect each Options options operation. Use the Visual Channel Utility on the 10L probe to verify that all system xmit/recv channels Xmit/Recv Elements are functional. Keyboard Test Perform the Keyboard Test Procedure to verify that all keyboard controls are OK. Monitor Verify basic Monitor display functions. refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual. Touch Panel Verify basic Touch Panel display functions. refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual. Scan a gray scale phantom and use the measurement controls to verify distance and area Measurements calculation accuracy. refer to the User Manual, Chapter 18, for measurement accuracy specifications. NOTE: * Some software may be considered standard depending upon system model configuration. 10-8 Section 10-5 - System Maintenance
[Page 509] 10-5-2-2 Peripheral/Option Checks If any peripherals or options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted. refer to the User Manual for a list of approved peripherals/options. Table 10-8 GE Approved Peripheral/Hardware Option Functional Checks 1 VCR Verify record/playback capabilities of the VCR. Clean heads and covers if necessary. 2 B/W Printer Verify hardcopy output of the B/W video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary. 3 Color Printer Verify hardcopy output of the Color video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary. 4 DICOM Verify that DICOM is functioning properly. Send an image to a DICOM device. Verify that InSite is functioning properly. Ensure two-way remote communications. 5 InSite/iLinq (Warranty & Contract Customers only) 6 Camera Verify hardcopy output of the film camera. Clean as necessary. 7 Footswitch Verify that the footswitch is functioning as programed. Clean as necessary. 8 ECG Verify basic operation with customer 10-5-3 Input Power 10-5-3-1 Mains Cable Inspection Table 10-9 Mains Cable Inspection 1 Unplug Cord Disconnect the mains cable from the wall and system. 2 Inspect Inspect it and its connectors for damage of any kind. Verify that the LINE, NEUTRAL and GROUND wires are properly attached to the terminals, and that no 3 Verify strands may cause a short circuit. 4 Verify Inlet connector retainer is functional. 10-5-4 Cleaning 10-5-4-1 General Cleaning Table 10-10 General Cleaning Use a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, damp cloth to carefully wipe the entire system. Be careful 1 Console not to get the cloth too wet so that moisture does not enter the console. 2 Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel). Section 10-5 - System Maintenance 10-9
[Page 510] 10-5-4-2 Air Filter Cleaning Table 10-11 Air Filter Cleaning - frequency varies with your environment Remove Filter 1 refer to Chapter 8 for air filter location and removal instructions. Cover The filters can be cleaned in sprinkling water, or they can be dusted with a vacuum cleaner. If the filter 2 Clean Filter is metal wash and/or vacuum. If the filter is fiber or plastic vacuum or replace. 3 Install Filter Install the clean filter. NOTE: For your convenience or of the air filter is too dirty, replacement filters are available. refer to Chapter 9 for the air filter replacement part number. 10-5-5 Physical Inspection Table 10-12 Physical Checks Verify that all system labeling is present and in readable condition. refer to the LOGIQ™ P5 User 1 Labeling Manual for details. 2 Scratches & Dents Inspect the console for dents, scratches or cracks. 3 Control Panel Inspect keyboard and control panel. Note any damaged or missing items. Control Panel Verify ease of control panel (Operator I/O Panel) movement in all acceptable directions. Ensure that Movement it latches in position as required. Check all wheels and casters for wear and verify operation of foot brake, to stop the unit from moving, 5 Wheels & Brakes and release mechanism. Check all caster locks and caster swivel locks for proper operation. Cables & Check all internal cable harnesses and connectors for wear and secure connector seating. Pay Connectors special attention to footswitch assembly and probe strain or bend reliefs. Shielding & Check to ensure that all EMI shielding, internal covers, air flow panels and screws are in place. Covers Missing covers and hardware could cause EMI/RFI problems while scanning. 8 External I/O Check all connectors for damage and verify that the labeling is good. 9 Op Panel Lights Check for proper operation of all operator panel and TGC lights. 10 Monitor Light Check for proper operation of any monitor lights if available. External 11 Check for proper operation of any external microphones by recording an audio test. Microphone 10-10 Section 10-5 - System Maintenance
[Page 511] 10-5-6 Optional Diagnostic Checks Optionally you can access the diagnostic software as described in Chapters 5 or 7. View the error logs and run desired diagnostics. 10-5-6-1 View the Logs 1.) Review the system error log for any problems. 2.) Check the temperature log to see if there are any trends that could cause problems in the future. 3.) Check the Configuration Log; update if needed. 10-5-7 Probe Maintenance 10-5-7-1 Probe Related Checks Table 10-13 Probe Related Checks 1 Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel). Thoroughly check the system probe connectors and remove dust from inside the connector sockets 2 Probes if necessary. Visually check for bent, damaged or missing pins 10-5-7-2 Basic Probe Care The system user manuals and various probe handling cards provide a complete description of probe care, maintenance, cleaning and disinfection. Ensure that you are completely familiar with the proper care of GE probes. Ultrasound probes can be easily damaged by improper handling. See the User Manual and probe care cards for more details. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage. Failure to properly handle or maintain a probe may also void its warranty. Any evidence of wear indicates the probe cannot be used. Do a visual check of the probe pins and system sockets before plugging in a probe. TEE and Interoperative probes often have special considerations and individual probe user manuals. For TEE and Interoperative probes also refer to their separate user manuals. 10-5-7-3 Basic Probe Cleaning refer to the User’s Manual for details on probe cleaning. NOTE: To help protect yourself from blood borne diseases, wear approved disposable gloves. These are made of nitrile derived from vegetable starch to prevent allergic latex reactions. NOTE: Failure to follow the prescribed cleaning or disinfection procedures will void the probe’s warranty. DO NOT soak or wipe the lens with any product not listed in the User Manual. Doing so could result in irreparable damage to the probe. Follow care instructions that came with the probe. NOTE: Disinfect a defective probe before you return it. Be sure to tag the probe as being disinfected. Section 10-5 - System Maintenance 10-11
[Page 512] Section 10-6 Electrical Safety Tests 10-6-1 Safety Test Overview The electrical safety tests in this section are based on and conform to NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards. They are intended for the electrical safety evaluation of cord-connected, electrically operated, patient care equipment. If additional information is needed, refer to the NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 documents. WARNING WARNING THE USER MUST ENSURE THAT THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS ARE PERFORMED AT LEAST EVERY 12 MONTHS ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE PATIENT SAFETY STANDARD IEC-EN 60601-1. ONLY TRAINED PERSONS ARE ALLOWED TO PERFORM THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS MENTIONED ABOVE. CAUTION To avoid electrical shock, the unit under test must not be connected to other electrical equipment. Remove all interconnecting cables and wires. The unit under test must not be contacted by users or patients while performing these tests. CAUTION Possible risk of infection. Do not handle soiled or contaminated probes and other components that have been in patient contact. Follow appropriate cleaning and disinfecting procedures before handling the equipment. Test the system, peripherals and probes for leakage current. Excessive leakage current can cause injury or death in sensitive patients. High leakage current can also indicate degradation of insulation and a potential for electrical failure. Do not use probes or equipment having excessive leakage current. To minimize the risk that a probe may shock someone the customer should: • Not use a probe that is cracked or damaged in any way • Check probe leakage current: * Based on your facilities QA program for surface probes * Based on your facilities QA program for endocavitary probes * whenever probe damage is suspected 10-12 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
[Page 513] 10-6-2 GEMS Leakage Current Limits The following limits are summarized for NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards. These limits are GEMS standards and in some cases are lower than the above standards listed. Table 10-14 Chassis Leakage Current Limits—Accessible Metal Surfaces Country Normal Condition Open Ground Reverse Polarity Open Neutral USA N/A 0.3 mA 0.3 mA N/A Other 0.1 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA Table 10-15 Type BF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Non-Conductive (Floating) Surface and Cavity Probes Normal Country Condition Open Ground Reverse Polarity Open Neutral *Mains Applied USA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA N/A Other 0.1 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA 5.0 mA Table 10-16 Type CF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Surgical Probes and ECG Connections Normal Country Condition Open Ground Reverse Polarity Open Neutral *Mains Applied USA 0.01 mA 0.05mA 0.05 mA N/A 0.025 mA Other 0.01 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA NOTE: *Mains Applied refers to the sink leakage test where mains (supply) voltage is applied to the part to determine the amount of current that will pass (or sink) to ground if a patient contacted mains voltage. The following tests are performed at the factory and should be performed at the site. These tests are: grounding continuity, chassis leakage current, probe leakage current, and ECG leakage current. All measurements are made with an electrical safety analyzer Model 600/600E built by Dale Technology Corporation or equivalent device. Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests 10-13
[Page 514] 10-6-3 Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada Test all outlets in the area for proper grounding and wiring arrangement by plugging in the neon outlet tester and noting the combination of lights that are illuminated. Any problems found should be reported to the hospital immediately and the receptacle should not be used. Figure 10-1 Typical Outlet Tester The Dale 600 has self-contained lamps designed for testing the outlet wiring arrangement. Plug the Dale 600 into each outlet to be tested comparing the lamp status. Combination of Lights REVERSE OPEN Condition CORRECT OPEN HOT/GROUND WIRING POLARITY GROUND HOT REVERSED Figure 10-2 Dale 600 Outlet Test NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the Neutral (grounded supply) conductor and the Grounding (protective earth) conductor are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected. 10-14 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
[Page 515] 10-6-4 Grounding Continuity CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. The patient must not be contacted to the equipment during this test Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed metal parts of the case. The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 ohms. reference the procedure in the IEC 601-1.1. Figure 10-3 Ground Continuity Test 10-6-4-1 Meter Procedure Follow these steps to test the ground wire resistance. 2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet. cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the LOGIQ™ P5 unit. 4.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to the RESISTANCE position. 5.) Set the meter's “POLARITY” switch to the OFF (center) position. 6.) Measure and record the ground wire resistance. Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests 10-15
[Page 516] 10-6-4-2 Dale 600 - Ground Continuity The Dale 600 measures line cord resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the meter’s Chassis Cable clamp. Test the grounding continuity of the system to all exposed metal parts in accordance with the IEC 601-1.1 procedure as above. refer to the Dale 600 Instruction Manual for meter self tests and operation. Record measured resistance of the grounding continuity. The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 (Use any safety analyzer.) Outlet Test Lamps Functions Normal Selector Reverse Polarity Neutral Open/Closed Chassis Clamp Figure 10-4 Dale 600 Ground Continuity Test 10-16 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
[Page 517] 10-6-5 Chassis Leakage Current Test 10-6-5-1 Definition This test measures the current that would flow in a grounded person who touched accessible metal parts of the bedside station if the ground wire should break. The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit On and Off, with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest reading. CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, don't touch the unit! CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the unit is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged. 10-6-5-2 Generic Procedure The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The testing meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit ON and OFF, with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest reading of current. Figure 10-5 Set Up for Chassis Source Leakage Current, IEC 601-1 Clause 19 - Continuos Leakage Currents and Patient, Auxiliary Currents When using the Microguard or a similar test instrument, its power plug may be inserted into the wall outlet and the equipment under test is plugged into the receptacle on the panel of the meter. This places the meter in the grounding conductor and the current flowing from the case to ground will be indicated in any of the current ranges. The maximum allowable limit for chassis source leakage is shown in Table 10-14. Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests 10-17
[Page 518] 10-6-5-3 Dale 600 Meter Procedure When measuring system chassis currents with the Dale 600, always use the CHASSIS selection of the external/chassis function switch. This requires the ground clip lead and changing the meters switches in accordance with the IEC 601-1.1. refer to the Dale 600 Instruction Manual for meter self-test and operation. Record the highest leakage current measured. Follow these steps to test the unit for leakage current. 2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the LOGIQ™ P5. 4.) Set the tester's “FUNCTION” switch to CHASSIS position. Outlet Test Lamps Functions Normal Selector Reverse Polarity Neutral Open/Closed Chassis Clamp Figure 10-6 Ground and Chassis Leakage Current Test 5.) Follow the test conditions described for respective test points shown in Table 10-17. Table 10-17 Chassis Leakage Current Test Condition TEST CONDITION 1 Mounting screw for probe receptacle 2 caster support 3 Mounting screw for CRT housing 4 Mounting screw for peripheral plugged into unit 5 Mounting screw for other peripheral powered by unit 6.) Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of PM data kept on site. 10-18 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
[Page 519] 10-6-5-4 Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in Table 10-14. Record all data on the PM Inspection Certificate. Table 10-18 Typical Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current Tester Neutral Test 1 Tester Polarity or Ground Probe Test 2 Test 3 Optional Optional Unit Power Switch Switch Connector caster CRT Test 4 Test 5 Enter Name of tested peripheral here: ON REV OPEN ON REV CLOSED OFF REV OPEN OFF REV CLOSED 10-6-6 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground 10-6-6-1 Definition This test measures the current which would flow to ground from any of the isolated ECG leads. The meter simulates a patient who is connected to the monitoring equipment and is grounded by touching some other grounded surface. Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the ultrasound console Off and On. For each combination the operating controls, such as the lead switch, should be operated to find the worst case condition. Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity when the unit is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching the polarity using the POLARITY switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged. Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests 10-19
[Page 520] 10-6-6-2 Generic Procedure Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the operating controls such as the lead switch should be operated to find the worst case condition. Appliance power switch Patient lead selector switch (if any) (use both “off” and “on” positions) The connection is at service entrance (activated as required) or on the supply side of a separately Polarity reversing switch derived system (use both positions) Patient connected leads Appliance H (Black) POWER OUTLET N (White) Internal circuitry Between each patient lead and ground G (Green) Building Insulating surface ground Current meter Grounding contact switch (use in both H = Hot “open” and “closed” positions) N = Neutral (grounded) G = Grounding conductor Figure 10-7 Test Circuit for Measuring Non-Isolated Patient Leads 10-6-6-3 Dale 600 Meter Procedure The Dale 600 provides five snap type ECG buttons for testing patient leads. Snap on all patient leads to the meter and assure that the ground clip is connected to the system’s ground terminal. Select the meter’s LEAD-GND function. Select and test each ECG lead positions (except “ALL”) of the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations found in “PATIENT LEAD LEAKAGE” table in the “PM CHECKLIST”. Record the highest leakage current measured for each Power selection. Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock hazard, the system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO TEST switch is depressed. When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, don't touch the unit! Follow these steps to test the ECG module for leakage current. 2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet. cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the LOGIQ™ P5 unit. 4.) Connect the patient leads to the corresponding snaps located at the upper front of the Dale 600/ 600E. Lead nomenclature for this test is not important. 10-20 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
[Page 521] 10-6-6-3Dale 600 Meter Procedure (cont’d) ECG Patient ECG Lead Selector ISO Rocker Switch Figure 10-8 ECG Leakage Current Test 5.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to LEAD TO GROUND position to measure the patient lead to ground leakage current. 6.) Select and test each ECG lead positions (except ALL) of the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations. Table 10-19 Testing Power Conditions ECG Power Meter’s Polarity Switch Meter’s Neutral Switch ON REVERSE CLOSED ON REVERSE OPEN OFF REVERSE CLOSED OFF REVERSE OPEN Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests 10-21
[Page 522] 10-6-6-3Dale 600 Meter Procedure (cont’d) 7.) Record the patient lead to ground leakage current measured on the data sheet. 8.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to LEAD TO LEAD position to measure the lead to lead leakage current. 9.) Select and test each ECG lead positions (except ALL) of the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations. 10.)Record the lead to lead leakage current measured on the data sheet. 11.)Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to LEAD ISO position to measure the patient lead isolation current. 12.)Select and test each ECG lead positions (except ALL) of the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations. 13.)Depress the rocker switch to ISO TEST and read the isolation current. To apply the voltage to the lead safely, the voltage is only applied when the rocker switch is depressed to ISO TEST. 14.)Record the patient lead isolation current measured on the data sheet. 10-6-7 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Lead reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function selector to the LEAD-LEAD position. Select and test each of the five ECG lead positions (except ALL) on the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations found in the table. Record the highest leakage current measured. 10-6-7-1 Dale 600 Patient Lead Tests NEUTRAL POLARITY 1.) Closed Normal 2.) Open Normal 3.) Closed Reversed 4.) Open Reversed 10-6-8 Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function selector to the LEAD-ISO. Select the ALL position on the lead selector. Depress the rocker switch to ISO TEST to test lead isolation. CAUTION Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock hazard, the system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO TEST switch is depressed. NOTE: It is not necessary to test each lead individually or power condition combinations as required in previous tests. 10-22 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
[Page 523] 10-6-8-1 Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in the table below. Record all data on the PM Inspection Certificate. Table 10-20 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current Maximum Allowance Limit AC Power GROUND Source GROUND OPEN CLOSED Patient Lead to Ground Leakage Current Test 115V 10uA 10uA and 220/240V 500uA 10uA Patient Lead to Lead Leakage Current Test Table 10-21 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current AC Power Maximum Source Allowance Limit 115V 20uA Patient Lead Isolation Current Test 220/240V 5mA Table 10-22 Typical Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current Tester Tester Tester Lead Selector ECG Polarity Ground Power Switch Switch RL RA LA LL C ON REVERSE CLOSED ON REVERSE OPEN OFF REVERSE CLOSED OFF REVERSE OPEN Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests 10-23
[Page 524] 10-6-9 Probe Leakage Current Test 10-6-9-1 Definition This test measures the current that would flow to ground from any of the probes through a patient who is being scanned and becomes grounded by touching some other grounded surface. 10-6-9-2 Generic Procedure Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the probe must be active to find the worst case condition. POLARITY REVERSING SWITCH H (BLACK) PROBE CONSOLE N (WHITE) POWER OUTLET G (GREEN) MOMENTARY SWITCH LEAKAGE TEST METER Figure 10-9 Set Up for Probe Leakage Current NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage current, dependent on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement. 10-6-9-3 Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter The Dale 600/600E provides a method for testing probes independently from the system. The meter utilizes a probe adapter to apply a test potential commonly to all connector pins. The probe's imaging area is immersed in a saline solution along with a grounding probe from the meter to complete the current path. Saline solution is a mixture of water and salt. The salt adds a free ion to the water, making it conductive. Normal saline solution is 0.9% salt or 1/2 gram salt per 1 liter of water. If saline is not available, a mixture of 1 quart water with one or more grams of table salt, mixed thoroughly, will substitute. To avoid probe damage and possible electric shock, do not immerse probes into any liquid beyond the level indicated in the probe users manual. Do not touch the probe, conductive liquid or any part of the unit under test while the ISO TEST switch is depressed. Follow these steps to test each transducer for leakage current. 2.) Plug the unit into the test meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet. 3.) Connect the probe for test with the meter's appropriate adapter. 4.) Plug the saline probe into the meter's “CHASSIS” connector. 5.) Plug the probe adapter into the meter's connector marked “EXTERNAL”. 10-24 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
[Page 525] 10-6-9-3Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter (cont’d) Figure 10-10 Transducer Source Leakage Current Test 6.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to EXTERNAL position. 7.) Add the saline probe and the imaging area of the probe into the saline bath. 8.) Have unit power ON for the first part; turn it OFF for the second half. 9.) Depress the ISO TEST rocker switch and record the highest current reading. 10.)Follow the test conditions described in Table 10-23 for every transducer. 11.)Keep a record of the results with other hand copies of PM data. Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests 10-25
[Page 526] 10-6-9-4 No Meter Probe Adapter Procedure Figure 10-11 Check Without Probe Adapter Follow these steps to test each transducer for leakage current. 2.) Plug the unit into the test meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet. 3.) Plug the external probe into the meter's (Dale 600) “EXTERNAL” connector. 4.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to EXTERNAL position. 5.) Connect the probe for test with the connector of the console. 6.) Add the saline probe and the imaging area of the probe into the saline bath. 7.) Have unit power ON for the first part; turn it OFF for the second half. 8.) Depress the ISO TEST rocker switch and record the highest current reading. 9.) Follow the test conditions described in Table 10-23 for every transducer. 10.)Keep a record of the results with other hand copies of PM data. 10-26 Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests
[Page 527] 10-6-9-5 Data Sheet for Transducer Source Leakage Current The test passes when all readings measure less than the values shown in Table 10-15 and Table 10- 16. Record all data on the PM Inspection Certificate. Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the unit is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged Table 10-23 Typical Data Sheet For Transducer Source Leakage Current Transducer Tested: Tester Power Polarity Tester GROUND or Unit Power Switch NEUTRAL Switch Measurement ON REV OPEN ON REV CLOSED OFF REV OPEN OFF REV CLOSED Section 10-6 - Electrical Safety Tests 10-27
[Page 528] Section 10-7 When There's Too Much Leakage Current... CHASSIS FAILS Check the ground on the power cord and plug for continuity. Ensure the ground is not broken, frayed, or intermittent. Replace any defective part. Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs. Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage. Test the wall outlet; verify it is grounded and is free of other wiring abnormalities. Notify the user or owner to correct any deviations. As a work around, check the other outlets to see if they could be used instead. NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the white neutral wire and the green grounding wire are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected. PROBE FAILS Test the probe in another connector to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the scanner. NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage, dependent on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement. The maximum allowable leakage current for body surface contact probe differs from inter-cavity probe. Be sure to enter the correct probe type in the appropriate space on the check list. If excessive leakage current is slot dependent, inspect the system connector for bent pins, poor connections, and ground continuity. If the problem remains with the probe, replace the probe. PERIPHERAL FAILS Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs. Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage. STILL FAILS If all else fails, begin isolation by removing the probes, external peripherals, then the on board ones, one at a time while monitoring the leakage current measurement. NEW UNIT If the leakage current measurement tests fail on a new unit and if situation can not be corrected, submit a Safety Failure Report to document the system problem. Remove unit from operation. ECG FAILS Inspect cables for damage or poor connections. 10-28 Section 10-7 - When There's Too Much Leakage Current...
[Page 529] ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE Customer Name: System ID: Dispatch Number / Date Performed: Warranty/Contract/HBS System Type Model Number: Serial Number: Manufacture Date: Probe 1: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 2: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 3: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 4: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 5: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 6: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 7: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 8: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: Probe 9: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number: * Scan Format: Phased Array, Linear Array, Curved Array, Mechanical Array or Other FUNCTIONAL CHECKS PHYSICAL INSPECTION AND CLEANING OK? or Physical Inspection and Cleaning Functional Check (if applicable) N/A (if applicable) Inspect Clean B-Mode Function Console Doppler Modes Function Monitor CF-Mode Function Touch Panel M-Mode Function Air Filter Applicable Software Options Probe Holders Applicable Hardware Options External I/O Control Panel Wheels, Brakes & Swivel Locks Monitor Cables and Connectors GE Approved Peripherals (VCR, CD-RW, MOD, Touch Panel Printers) Measurement Accuracy GE Approved Peripherals COMMENTS: ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ Section 10-7 - When There's Too Much Leakage Current... 10-29
[Page 530] ELECTRICAL SAFETY Max Value Value Electrical Test Performed Allowed Measured OK? Comments Outlet (correct ground &wiring config.) System Ground Continuity Chassis Source Leakage Current - Probe Chassis Source Leakage Current - Caster Chassis Source Leakage Current - CRT Patient Lead Source Leakage (Lead to Ground) Patient Lead Source Leakage (Lead to Lead) Patient Lead Source Leakage (Isolation) Peripheral 1 Leakage Current Peripheral 1Ground Continuity Peripheral 2 Leakage Current Peripheral 2Ground Continuity Peripheral 3 Leakage Current Peripheral 3Ground Continuity PROBES Probe Number Max Value Max Value (from previous page) Allowed Measured OK? Comments Probe 1: Probe 2: Probe 3: Probe 4: Probe 5: Probe 6: Probe 7: Probe 8: Probe 9: Final Check. All system covers are in place. System scans with all probes as expected. Accepted by: ______________________________________________________________________ 10-30 Section 10-7 - When There's Too Much Leakage Current...
[Page 531]
[Page 532] © 2011, 2014, General Electric Company. GE Healthcare 9, Sunhwan-ro 214beon-gil, Jungwon-gu, Seongnam-si, Gyeonggi-do, Korea www.gehealthcare.com